Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation B021078: Bid Proposal

Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation B021078: Bid Proposal

Russellville, Arkansas

10/26/2021

ATU Project No. B021078

BE Project No. ATU-001

Prepared by

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 0

SECTION TITLE

00001 COVER SHEET

00010 TABLE OF CONTENTS

00020 INVITATION TO BID

00030 NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS

00100 INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS

00300 BID FORM

00312 BID BOND

00420 STATEMENT OF BIDDER’S QUALIFICATIONS

00480 NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT

00500 AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR

00600 ARKANSAS STATUTORY PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND

00640 WARRANTY BOND

00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS

00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

00800A PREVAILING WAGE RATE DETERMINATION

00840 NOTICE OF AWARD

00845 NOTICE TO PROCEED

01000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES

01045 DEMOLITION, CUTTING AND PATCHING

01150 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

01200 PROJECT MEETINGS

01300 SUBMITTALS

01370 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010-2

DIVISION 23 MECHANICAL

SECTION TITLE

230010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

230015 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING

230020 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION

230030 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

230075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

230086 PIPING INSULATION

230090 SUPPORTS, HANGERS AND ANCHORS

230120 PIPING SPECIALTIES

230150 HYDRONIC PIPING

230160 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION

230705 HIGH PRESSURE DUCTWORK

230710 HVAC SHEET METAL

230895 AIR TERMINAL DEVICES

230990 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

239000 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM

DIVISION 22 PLUMBING

SECTION TITLE

220160 NATURAL GAS SYSTEM

DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL

SECTION TITLE

260000 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

262416 PANELBOARDS

262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

END OF SECTION 00010

00020-1

SECTION 00020

INVITATION TO BID

Bid Proposal B021078: Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation

Arkansas Tech University will accept sealed bids for the Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation. Bid forms

should be addressed to Jessica Holloway, APO, Director Business Services at Arkansas Tech University

and will be received at Arkansas Tech University, Young Building, 203 West O Street, Russellville, AR

72801, (479) 968-0269 until 2:00 pm CST, Oct 26, 2021 and then publicly opened and read aloud at RCB

(Brown) Hall Rm 355, 105 W O St, Russellville, AR 72801.

Details may be found on the ATU Procurement website: www.atu.edu/purchasing

A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held on October 19th, at 10:00 am at Crabaugh Hall located at

Arkansas Tech University, 1310 N El Paso Ave, Russellville, AR 72801.

Building access and site work may begin no sooner than December 15, 2021. Contractor shall coordinate

delivery and storage of owner furnished air handler with owner and air handler vendor.

Arkansas Tech University reserves the right to reject any and all bids and to waive defects in bids.

For information concerning the proposed work, contact Melanie Richardson, Brown Engineers, LLC, at

17200 Chenal Pkwy Ste. 300 PMB 324, Little Rock, AR 72223 501-448-0100 ext. 157.

Minority and small business vendors or contractors are encouraged to bid on any and all Arkansas Tech

University projects.

Bids received later than the specified time and date will be returned to the bidder unopened.


http://www.atu.edu/purchasing

00030-1

SECTION 00030

NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS

Sealed bids for Bid Proposal B021078: Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation will be received by Arkansas

Tech University, “Owner”, at Arkansas Tech University, Young Building, 203 West O Street,

Russellville, AR 72801, (479) 968-0269 until 2:00 pm CST, Oct 26, 2021 and then publicly opened and

read aloud at RCB (Brown) Hall Rm 355, 105 W O St, Russellville, AR 72801.

Details may be found on the ATU Procurement website: www.atu.edu/purchasing

All proposals shall be on the forms furnished with the Specifications and shall be enclosed in a sealed

envelope addressed to “Jessica Holloway, APO, Director Business Services at Arkansas Tech University”

and marked "Bid for Bid Proposal B021078: Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation.” Bids shall be

accompanied by a cashier's or certified check upon a national or state bank in an amount not less than five

percent (5%) of the total maximum bid price payable without recourse to Arkansas Tech University or a bid

bond in the same amount from a reliable surety company, as a guarantee that the Bidder will enter into a

contract and execute performance and payment bonds within ten (10) days after notice of award of Contract

to Bidder. The notice of award of Contract shall be given by the Owner within ten (10) days following the

opening of bids. The successful Bidder must furnish a performance and payment bond upon the form

provided in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price from an approved surety

company holding a permit from the State of Arkansas to act as surety, or other surety or sureties acceptable

to the Owner.

A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held on October 19th, at 10:00 am at Crabaugh Hall located at:

Arkansas Tech University

1310 N El Paso Ave

Russellville, AR 72801

Representatives of OWNER and ENGINEER will be present to discuss the Project. Bidders are required

to attend and participate in the conference. Bidders will be required to inform themselves of all addenda

duly issued.

Building access and site work may begin no sooner than December 15, 2021. Contractor shall coordinate

delivery and storage of owner furnished air handler with owner and air handler vendor.

http://www.atu.edu/purchasing

00030-2

All bidders must be licensed in accordance with the requirements of the Arkansas Contractors

Licensing Board in accordance with Act 150 of the 1965, as amended. All bidders must be qualified in all

respects to do business in Arkansas.

Bids will be considered on the basis of cost, the Bidder's financial responsibility, his equipment, and his past

performance in completing similar work. Arkansas Tech University reserves the right to reject any or all

bids, in whole or in part, or award items separately, or to waive informalities in bids received.

Bids must remain in effect for 60 days after the bid opening date.

00100-1

SECTION 00100

INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS

1. DEFINED TERMS

1.1 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders, which are defined in the Standard General

Conditions of the Construction Contract, have the meanings assigned to them in the

General Conditions. The term “Bidder” means one who submits a Bid directly to

OWNER, as distinct from Sub-Bidder, who submits a Bid to a Bidder. The term

“Successful Bidder” means the lowest, qualified, responsible and responsive Bidder to

whom OWNER (on the basis of OWNER’S evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an

award. The term “Bidding Documents” included the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid,

Information for Bidders, the Bid Form, and the proposed Contract Documents (including

all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids).

2. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS

2.1 Complete sets of Bidding Documents in the number and for the deposit sum, if any,

stated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid may be obtained from the OWNER.

Deposit for Bidding Documents are non-refundable.

2.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; the OWNER does

not assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of the

incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.

2.3 The OWNER in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms does

so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or

grant for any other use. All Bidding Documents shall remain the property of the OWNER

and ENGINEER, and any use of the Bidding Documents for any purpose other than the

bidding of the Project is strictly prohibited.

3. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS

3.1 Each Bid must contain evidence of Bidder’s qualifications to do business in the state

where the Project is located.

3.2 Qualifications shall be submitted in a separate sealed envelope at the date and time listed

on the Bid Proposal. Refer to Section 00420 – Statement of Bidder’s Qualifications.

4. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE

4.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract

Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that

may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, (c) consider Federal,

State and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance or

furnishing of the Work, (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder’s observations with the

Contract Documents, and (e) notify ENGINEER of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies

in the Contract Documents.

00100-2

4.1.1 Determine that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and

convey understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance of the

Work.

4.1.2. Become aware of the general nature of the work to be performed by OWNER

and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding

Documents.

4.2 No geotechnical or subsurface information is provided for this work The Bidder shall

make further investigations and tests as the Bidder deems necessary in order to provide

the Work at the Contract Price, within Contract Time, and in accordance with the terms

and conditions of the General Documents.

4.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground

Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based upon information and data furnished to the

Owner by Owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and Owner does not assume

responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof, unless it is expressly provided

otherwise in the Supplemental Conditions.

4.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to the

prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities and other physical

conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions

appear in Paragraph 4.2 and 4.3 of the General Conditions.

4.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder will be responsible to make or obtain such

explorations, tests and data concerning physical conditions (surface, subsurface and

Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise, which may affect cost,

progress, performance or furnishing the Work in accordance with the time, price and

other terms and conditions the Contract Documents.

4.6 On request in advance, OWNER will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct

such explorations and tests as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid.

Bidder shall fill all holes, clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon

completion of such explorations. A representative of the OWNER shall be present during

all tests.

4.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights of way and easements for

access thereto and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work

are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required

for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be

provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in

existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by OWNER.

4.8 Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of the general

nature of work that is to be performed at the site by OWNER or others (such as utilities

and other prime contractors) that relates to the work for which a Bid is to be submitted.

On request, OWNER will provide to each Bidder for examination access to or copies of

Contract Documents (other than portions thereof related to price) for such work.

00100-3

4.9 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that

Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception the

Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Bidding

Documents and applying any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences and

procedures of construction that may be shown or indicated or expressly required by the

Bidding Documents, that Bidder has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts,

errors, ambiguities and discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding

Documents and that the written resolutions thereof by ENGINEER are acceptable to

Bidder, and that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey

understanding of all terms and conditions for performing and furnishing the Work.

4.10 The provisions of 4.1 through 4.8, inclusive, do not apply to Asbestos, Polychlorinated

Biphenyls (PCBs), Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or Radioactive Material covered by

Paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions.

PRE-BID CONFERENCE

4.11 A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held as stated in the Invitation to Bid.

Representatives of OWNER and ENGINEER will be present to discuss the Project.

Bidders are encouraged to attend and participate in the conference. ENGINEER will

transmit to all prospective Bidders of record such Addenda, as ENGINEER deems

necessary, in response to questions arising at the conference. Oral statements may not be

relied upon and will not be binding or legally effective.

SITE AND OTHER AREAS

4.12 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for

access thereto and other lands designated for use by CONTRACTOR in performing the

Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto

required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment or storage of

materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work are to be obtained and paid for

by CONTRACTOR. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in

existing facilities are to be obtained and paid for by OWNER unless otherwise provided

in the Contract Documents.

5. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA

5.1 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed in

writing to ENGINEER. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by

ENGINEER in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered

to all parties recorded by ENGINEER as having received the Bidding Documents.

Questions received less than three (3) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not

be answered. Only questions answered by formal, written Addenda will be binding. Oral

and other interpretations will be without legal effect.

5.2 Prior to the deadline for receiving Bids, Addenda may also be issued to modify the

Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by OWNER or ENGINEER.

00100-4

6. BID SECURITY

6.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid security made payable to OWNER in an amount

of five (5) percent of the Bidder’s maximum bid price and in the form of a certified or

bank check or a Bid Bond (on form attached, if a form is prescribed), issued by a surety.

6.2 The Bid security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until Bidder has executed the

Agreement and furnished the required Contract security, whereupon the Bid security will

be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Agreement and

furnish the required Contract security within ten (10) days after the Notice of Award,

OWNER may annul the Notice of Award, and the Bid security of that Bidder will be

forfeited. The Bid security of other Bidders whom OWNER believes to have a reasonable

chance of receiving the award may be retained by OWNER until the earliest or the

seventh (7th) day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or the sixty-first (61st) day

after the Bid Opening, whereupon Bid security furnished by such Bidders will be

returned. Bid security with Bids which are not competitive will be returned within seven

(7) days after the Bid opening.

7. CONTRACT TIME

7.1 The number of days within which the Work is to be substantially completed and also

completed and ready for final payment (the Contract Time) are set forth in the Agreement

and these Contract Documents.

8. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

8.1 Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, are set forth in the Agreement.

9. SUBSTITUTE OR “OR EQUAL” ITEMS

9.1 The Bid shall be base on the specific products or their approval equal described on the

Drawings or written in the Specifications. Any product may be used which is specified by

the referenced standards (such as ASTM) and which meets those standards. For products

which are specified by naming one or more manufacturers preceded by “equal to” or

followed by “or equal,” a written request for substitution shall be submitted for approval

by the ENGINEER. Such written requests will be considered up to ten (10) days prior to

the scheduled Bid opening.

10. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS

10.1 If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers

and other persons and organizations (including those who are to furnish the principal

items of material and equipment) to be submitted to Owner in advance of a specified date

prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, apparent Successful Bidder, and any other

Bidder so requested, shall within five (5) working days after Bid opening submit to

OWNER a list of all such Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations

proposed for those portions of the Work for which such identification is required. Such

list shall be accompanied by an experience statement with pertinent information

regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each such

Subcontractor, Supplier, person or organization if requested by Owner. An Owner or

Engineer who after due investigation has reasonable objection to any proposed

00100-5

Subcontractor, Supplier, other person or organization, may before Notice of Award is

given request apparent Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an

increase in Bid price.

10.2 If apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, OWNER may

award the contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable

Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations. The declining to make

requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security of any

Bidder. Any Subcontractor, Supplier, other person or organization listed and to whom

OWNER or ENGINEER does not make written objection prior to the giving of Notice of

Award will be deemed acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER subject to revocation of

such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Agreement as provided in paragraph

6.06.B of the General Conditions.

10.3 No CONTRACTOR shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, other

person or organization against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection.

10.4 Trade (including, but not necessarily limited to electrical, plumbing and mechanical)

permits are required for the respective subcontractors to obtain City inspection.

11. BID FORM

11.1 The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents.

11.2 All blanks on the Bid Form must be completed in ink or by typewriter. Erasures and

alterations must be initialed and dated by the signer in ink.

11.3 Unit process and lump sum amounts shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of

discrepancy, the amount shown in words will govern and the unit price will govern over

the extended amount.

11.4 Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or vice

president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and

the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary.

The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature.

11.5 Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner,

whose title must appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership

must be shown below the signature.

11.6 All names must be typed or printed below the signature.

11.7 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda (the numbers of

which must be filled in on the Bid Form).

11.8 The address, telephone number, and fax number if applicable for communications

regarding the Bid must be shown.

11.9 A Bid by a limited liability company shall be executed in the name of the firm by a

member and accompanied by evidence of the authority to sign. The state of formation of

the firm and the official address of the firm must be shown below the signature.

00100-6

11.10 A Bid by an individual shall show the Bidder’s name and official address.

11.11 A Bid by a joint venture shall be executed by each joint venture in the manner indicated

on the Bid Form. The official address of the joint venture must be shown below the

signature.

12. SUBMISSION OF BIDS

12.1 Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Advertisement or Invitation

to Bid. Bids shall be bound in the original project manual and shall be enclosed in an

opaque sealed envelope, marked with the Project Title (and, if applicable, the designated

position of the Project for which the Bid is submitted) and name, address, and

contractor’s license number of the Bidder, and accompanied by the Bid security and other

required documents. If the Bid is sent through the mail or other delivery system, the

sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate envelope with the notation “BID

ENCLOSED” on the face of it.

13. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS

13.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the

manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are to be

submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids.

13.2 If, within twenty-four (24) hours after Bids are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed,

written notice with the OWNER and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable

satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation

of its Bids, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid and the Bid security will be returned.

Thereafter, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Work to be

provided under the Contract Documents.

14. OPENING OF BIDS

14.1 Bids will be opened and (unless obviously non-responsive) read aloud publicly. An

abstract of the amounts of the base Bids and major alternates (if any) will be made

available to the Bidders after the opening of the Bids. Bids will be returned without being

read aloud if all applicable portions of the Contract Documents are not met by the Bidder.

15. BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE

15.1 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for sixty (60) days after the day of the Bid

opening, but OWNER may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid

security prior to that date.

16. AWARD OF CONTRACT

16.1 OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all informalities

and to negotiate Contract terms with the Successful Bidder, and the right to disregard all

nonconforming, non-responsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids. Also, OWNER reserves

the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder if OWNER believes that it would not be in the

best interest of the Project to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is

00100-7

not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet

any other pertinent standard or criteria established by OWNER. Discrepancies in the

multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices.

Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum

thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.

16.2 In evaluating Bids, OWNER will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or

not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices and

other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award.

OWNER may accept any such alternatives in any order or combination, whether in the

order in which they are listed in the Bid Form or not.

16.3 OWNER may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers,

and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the Work as to which

the identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations must be

submitted as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. OWNER also may consider the

operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance data and guarantees of major

items of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the Work when such data

is required to be submitted prior to the Notice of Award.

16.4 OWNER may conduct such investigations as OWNER deems necessary to assist in the

evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial

ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and

organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract

Documents to OWNER’s satisfaction within the prescribed time.

16.5 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest Bidder whose evaluation

by OWNER indicates to OWNER that the award will be in the best interest of the

Project.

16.6 If the Contract is to be awarded, OWNER will give the Successful Bidder a Notice of

Award within sixty (60) days after the day of the Bid opening.

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

16.7 Attention of Bidders is directed to Supplementary Conditions, included in these

documents for provisions concerning scope of work, completion time, availability of

plans, specifications and other documents, payment and similar subjects.

17. CONTRACT SECURITY

17.1 The General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions set forth OWNER’s

requirements as to performance and payment Bonds and a Warranty Bond. When the

Successful Bidder delivers the executed Agreement to OWNER, it must be accompanied

by the required performance and payment Bonds. At the time of Final Acceptance, the

Contractor shall provide the OWNER the Warranty Bond.

18. SIGNING OF AGREEMENT

18.1 When OWNER gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied

by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement and all other written

00100-8

Contract Documents attached. Within ten (10) days thereafter Contractor shall sign and

deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached documents to

OWNER with the required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter, OWNER shall deliver

one fully signed counterpart to Contractor. Each counterpart is to be accompanied by a

complete set of the Drawings with appropriate identification.

19. PRE-BID CONFERENCE

19.1 A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held on October 19th, at 10:00 am at Crabaugh

Hall located at:


1310 N El Paso Ave


Representatives of OWNER and ENGINEER will be present to discuss the Project.

Bidders are required to attend and participate in the conference. ENGINEER will

transmit to all prospective Bidders of record such Addenda as ENGINEER considers

necessary in response to questions arising at the conference. Bidders are reminded that

any representation or understandings arising from any such Pre-Bid Conference shall not

supercede the written provision of the Contract Documents themselves.

20. RETAINAGE

20.1 Provisions concerning retainage are set forth in the General Contract and Supplemental

Conditions.

21. SPECIAL LEGAL REQUIREMENTS

21.1 Attention of Bidders is called to Act 150, Acts of Arkansas 1965, concerning the

licensing of contractors to do business in Arkansas.

21.2 It is conclusively presumed that Bidders have familiarized themselves with Arkansas

laws which may be applied to a Contract for the Work proposed herein as the

aforementioned Acts are not exclusive. It is further conclusively presumed that Bidders

have familiarized themselves with Federal and local laws, ordinances and regulations

pertaining to the Work proposed herein.


00300-1

SECTION 00300

BID FORM

PROJECT IDENTIFICATION: Arkansas Tech University

Bid no. B021078

Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation

THIS BID IS SUBMITTED TO: Jessica Holloway, APO, Director Business Services


Young Building, 203 West O Street


THIS BID IS SUBMITTED BY:

ADDRESS:

ARTICLE 1. The undersigned BIDDER proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an

agreement with OWNER in the form included in the Contract Documents to perform and furnish all Work

as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Contract Price and within the Contract Time

indicated in the Agreement and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract

Documents.

ARTICLE 2. BIDDER accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Advertisement or Invitation to

Bid and Instructions to BIDDERs, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid

security. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for sixty (60) days after the day of Bid opening.

BIDDER will sign and submit the Agreement with the Bonds and other documents required by the

Contract Documents within fifteen days after the date of OWNER’s Notice of Award.

ARTICLE 3. In submitting this Bid, BIDDER represents, as more fully set forth in the Agreement,

that:

3.1 BIDDER has examined copies of all the Contract Documents and of the following Addenda

(receipt of which is hereby acknowledged):

Date Number Authorized Signature

00300-2

3.2 BIDDER has visited the site and become familiarized with the nature and extent of the Contract

Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner

may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work.

3.3 BIDDER has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully

studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies which pertain to the

subsurface or physical conditions at the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or

furnishing of the Work as BIDDER considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of the Work at

the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the

Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraphs 4.02 and 4.03 of the General

Conditions, and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports or similar

information or data are or will be required by BIDDER for such purposes.

3.4 BIDDER has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract

Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes

responsibility for the accurate location of said Underground Facilities. No additional examinations,

investigations, explorations, tests, reports or similar information or data in respect of said Underground

Facilities are or will be required by BIDDER in order to perform and furnish the Work at the Contract

Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract

Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.04 of the General Conditions.

3.5 BIDDER has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations,

explorations, tests, reports and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.

3.6 BIDDER has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies that it has

discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to

BIDDER.

3.7 This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed person, firm or

corporation and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association,

organization or corporation; BIDDER has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other

BIDDER to submit a false or sham Bid; BIDDER has not solicited or induced any person, firm or

corporation to refrain from bidding, and BIDDER has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any

advantage over any other BIDDER or over OWNER.

ARTICLE 4. Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the

following, as specified in text form, and numerically:

00300-3

4.1 BIDDER’S BID AMOUNT

Item

No.

Estimated

Quantity Unit Description and Unit Price in Words

Total Amount

(in Figures)

1 1 LS All supervision, labor, materials, tools,

equipment, incidentals and related items

required for construction of the Crabaugh Hall

HVAC Renovation , the sum of

_______

________________________________Dollars

and Cents

$

The Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation will be awarded to the lowest qualified BIDDER for the Work to

be included.

4.2 PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS

The following information gives the name, business address, and portion of work (description and dollar

amount of work to be done) for each subcontractor that will be used in the work if the BIDDER is

awarded the Contract. No subcontractor doing work in excess of 3 percent of the total amount of the Bid

who is not listed below shall be used without the written approval of the OWNER.

Additional supporting data may be attached to this page. Each page shall be sequentially numbered and

headed “Proposed Subcontractors”, and shall be signed.

Firm Name Business Address Description of Work Dollar Amount

00300-4

4.3 PROPOSED EQUIPMENT LIST

The BIDDER is required to list the major proposed equipment as outlined in the relevant Technical

Specifications as part of the proposed Work.

Specification Equipment Manufacturer

ARTICLE 5. BIDDER agrees that the Work will be completed within the following time(s):

5.1 BIDDER agrees to be Substantially Completed with the Item No. 1 within 130 calendar days of

the effective date of the Notice to Proceed, and, if Substantial Completion is not achieved by this date, to

pay liquidated damages in the amount of $500/day for each additional day until Substantial

Completion for Item No. 1 is achieved. Building access and site work may begin no sooner than

December 15, 2021. BIDDER agrees that the project will be completed and Ready for Final Payment

within 30 calendar days after Substantial Completion of all contracted work in accordance with Article 14

of the General Conditions.

5.2 BIDDER accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to Liquidated Damages in the event of

failure to complete the Work within the times specified in the Agreement.

ARTICLE 6. The following documents are attached to and made a condition of this Bid:

6.1 Required Bid Security in the form of a certified check or a Bid Bond in the amount of 5% of the

total Bid price.

6.2 Noncollusion Affidavit.

ARTICLE 7. Communications concerning this Bid shall be addressed to the following address:

Melanie C. Richardson, PE

Brown Engineers, LLC

17200 Chenal Pkwy. Suite 300 PMB 324

Little Rock, AR 72223

Phone: (501) 448-0100 ext. 157

00300-5

ARTICLE 8. The terms used in this Bid which are defined in the General Conditions or

Instructions to BIDDERS will have the meanings assigned to them.

BIDDER submitting this BID is:

A Corporation, incorporated in the State of

A Partnership, consisting of the following partners, whose full names are:

An Individual whose full name is:

SUBMITTED on , 2021.

(Name of BIDDER)

Approved By

(Authorized Signature) (Title)

Attested By

(Authorized Signature) (Address)

Seal

(If a Corporation) (City and State) (Zip Code)

(Telephone Number)

(Facsimile Number)


00312-1

SECTION 00312

BID BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the undersigned,

____________________________________________________________ as Principal, and

____________________________________________________________ as Surety, are hereby held and

firmly bound unto the Arkansas Tech University, hereinafter called the OWNER in the penal sum of

Five percent of the Amount Bid (5% of bid) for payment of which,

well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, successors and assigns.

The Condition of the above obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to the

Owner a certain BID, attached hereto and hereby made a part hereof to enter into a contract in writing, for

Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation at Arkansas Tech University

.

NOW, THEREFORE,

(a) If said BID shall be rejected, or

(b) If said BID shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the

Form of Contract attached hereto (properly completed in accordance with said BID) and

shall furnish a BOND for his faithful performance of said contract, and for the payment

of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall

in all other respects perform the agreement created by the acceptance of said BID, then

this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect; it being

expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims

hereunder shall in no event exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals, and such

of them as are corporations have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be

signed by their proper officers, the day and year first set forth above.

00312-2

Signed, this day of , 20 .

(Principal)

By:

(Surety)

By:


00420-1

SECTION 00420

STATEMENT OF BIDDER’S QUALIFICATIONS – PRIME CONTRACTOR

All requests must be addressed in writing and the data given must be clear and comprehensive.

All bidders shall submit a Statement of Qualifications that addresses the requested items listed below.

This statement must be notarized. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached sheets.

The BIDDER may submit any additional information he/she desires.

A. REQUESTS REGARDING BIDDER

1. Name of Bidder.

2. Permanent main office address.

3. When organized.

4. If a corporation, where incorporated.

5. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your

present firm or trade name?

6. Contracts on hand: (Schedule these, showing amount of each contract and the

anticipated dates of completion.)

7. General character of work performed by your company.

8. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? (If so, where and

why?)

9. Have you ever defaulted on a contract? (If so, where and why?)

10. List similar projects of the size and magnitude of this Project which were

completed by your company, stating the cost for each and the month and year

completed. Include the entity for which the work was performed with names,

titles and phone numbers.

11. List your major equipment currently available for this contract and designate

whether owned or leased.

12. Background and experience of field personnel currently employed by your

organization who will perform the work.

13. Background and experience of the principal members (officers) of your

organization. Include president, vice president, secretary, treasurer, etc.

14. Give Bank reference.

00420-2

15. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any

other information that may be required by the OWNER?

16. Give bonding agent and limit.

17. If subcontractor is to be used for this contract, state the percentage of work

anticipated to be completed by subcontractor. If subcontractor is to perform

work, a separate Statement of Bidder’s Qualifications regarding subcontractor

and the method used by the subcontractor. Refer to Section 00100.

00420-3

Qualifications shall be submitted in a separate sealed envelope at the date and time listed on the Bid

Proposal.

(Name of Bidder)

By:

Title:

State of

County of

being duly sworn deposes and says that he is

of

and that the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true and correct.

Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20 .

Notary Public

My Commission expires

, 20 .


00480-1

SECTION 00480

NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT

State of §

§

County of §

, of lawful age, being first duly sworn, says that (he/she) is the

agent authorized by the Bidder to submit the attached Bid.

Affiant further states that the Bidder has not been a party to any collusion among Bidders in

the restraint of freedom of competition by agreement to bid at a fixed price or to refrain from bidding; or

with any official or employee of the Owner as to quantity, quality, or price in the prospective Contract, or

any other terms of said prospective Contract; or, in any discussion between Bidders and any official of the

Owner concerning exchange of money or other thing of value for special consideration in the letting of a

Contract.

Bidder’s Authorized Agent

Name of Bidder’s Firm

SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN TO BEFORE ME, this day of , 20 .

Notary Public

My Commission expires

, 20 .

00500-1

SECTION 00500

AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR

THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the th day of in the year

by and between ARKANSAS TECH UNIVERSITY (hereinafter called OWNER) and

(hereinafter called CONTRACTOR).

1. The CONTRACTOR shall commence and complete all Work as specified or indicated in the

Contract Documents. The WORK is generally described as follows:

CRABAUGH HALL HVAC RENOVATION,

CONSISTING OF:

• Mobilization;

• Coordination of delivery and storage of owner-furnished equipment;

• Demolition and removal of existing equipment;

• Replacement of equipment; and

• Other miscellaneous work related thereto.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all materials, supplies, tools, equipment, labor and other

services necessary for the completion of the WORK described herein.

3. The CONTRACTOR shall commence the WORK required by the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

on or before a date to be specified in the NOTICE TO PROCEED and completed and ready for

final payment as specified in the Bid Form. The CONTRACTOR shall pay the OWNER, as

liquidated damages, the sum specified in the Bid Form for each calendar day thereafter that

WORK is not complete.

4. The CONTRACTOR agrees to perform all of the WORK described in the CONTRACT

DOCUMENTS and comply with the terms therein as shown in the BID PROPOSAL.

5. The term CONTRACT DOCUMENTS shall mean and include the following:

5.1 Invitation to Bid

5.2 Information for Bidders

00500-2

5.3 Supplemental Information for Bidders (where applicable)

5.4 Bid Proposal

5.5 Bid Bond

5.6 Agreement Between Owner and Contractor

5.7 Performance and Payment Bond

5.8 Contractor’s Act of Assurance Form (where applicable)

5.9 MBE/WBE Compliance Evaluation Form (where applicable)

5.10 General Conditions

5.11 Supplemental Conditions – RLF (where applicable)

5.12 Supplementary Conditions

5.13 Prevailing Wage Rates

5.14 Notice of Award

5.15 Notice to Proceed

5.16 Project Specifications

5.17 Drawings Consisting of a Cover Sheet and Drawings

5.18 Addenda numbers (to be issued if necessary).

5.19 Change Orders (to be issued if necessary).

6. The Owner shall pay the CONTRACTOR in the manner and at such times as set forth in the

General Conditions such amounts as required by the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.

7. The CONTRACTOR agrees to be Substantially Completed with the Item No. 1 of the Bid Form

within 130 calendar days of the effective date of the Notice to Proceed, and, if Substantial

Completion is not achieved by this date, to pay liquidated damages in the amount of $500/day for

each additional day until Substantial Completion for Item No. 1 of the Bid Form is achieved. The

CONTRACTOR agrees that the project will be completed and Ready for Final Payment within 30

calendar days after Substantial Completion of all contracted work in accordance with Article 14 of

the General Conditions.

8. This Agreement shall be binding upon all parties hereto and their respective heirs, executors,

administrators, successors, and assigns.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have executed, or caused to be executed by their

duly authorized officials, this Agreement in three (3) counterparts, each of which shall be deemed as an

original.

00500-3

OWNER CONTRACTOR

PRINTED NAME: PRINTED NAME:

BY BY

(Signature) (Signature)

(CORPORATE SEAL) (CORPORATE SEAL)

ATTEST ATTEST

Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices:

(If CONTRACTOR is a corporation, attach

evidence of authority to sign.)


00600-1

SECTION 00600

ARKANSAS STATUTORY PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND

WE, as Principal, hereinafter called Principal, and

as Surety, hereinafter call the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Arkansas Tech University

(Owner), for the amount of

($ ) for the payment whereof Principal and Surety bind themselves, their

heirs, personal representatives, and successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, and firmly by these

presents.

Principal has by written agreement dated

entered into a contract with Owner for Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation

, which contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter

referred to as the Contract.

The condition of this obligation is such that if the Principal shall faithfully perform the Contract on his

part and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the Owner from all cost and damage which he may

suffer by reason of failure so to do and shall fully reimburse and repay the Owner all outlay and expense

which the Owner may incur in making good any such default, and, further, that if the Principal shall pay

all persons all indebtedness for labor or materials furnished or performed under said contract failing

which such persons shall have a direct right of action against the Principal and Surety jointly and

severally under this obligation, subject to the Owner’s priority, then this obligation shall be null and void;

otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.

No suit, action or proceeding shall be brought on this bond outside the State of Arkansas. No suit, action

or proceeding shall be brought on this bond except by the Owner after six months from the date final

payment is made on the Contract, nor shall any suit, action or proceeding be brought by the Owner after

two years from the date on which the final payment under the Contract falls due. Any Alterations which

may be made in the terms of the contract or in the work to be done under it, or the giving by the Owner of

any extension of time for the performance of the Contract, or any other forbearance on the part either of

the Owner or Principal to the other shall not in any way release the Principal and the Surety or Sureties, or

either or any of them, their heirs, personal representatives, successors, or assigns from their liability

hereunder, notice to the Surety or Sureties of any such alteration, extension, or forbearance being hereby

waived.

00600-2

In no event shall the aggregate liability of the Surety exceed the sum set herein.

Executed on the day of , 20 .

By:

(Seal)

Principal

Witness: )

)

Attest: )

By:

(Seal)

Surety

This Bond is given in compliance with Act 351 of 1953, as amended.


00640-1

SECTION 00640

WARRANTY BOND

We, , as principal (“Principal”), and

as surety (“Surety”) are hereby jointly and severally held and firmly bound unto Arkansas Tech

University, as Obligee (“Owner”), for the payment of Dollars ($

), subject to the terms and conditions provided herein.

WHEREAS, Principal executed and entered into that certain Agreement with Owner dated

, 20 (the Contract), the provisions of

which are incorporated herein by reference, and unless otherwise defined herein all defined terms used or

referred to herein shall have the meaning ascribed thereto in the Contract. In addition to other obligations

and liabilities, the Contract required Principal to perform the Work for the Project and to furnish this

Bond to Owner in compliance with Article 5 of the General Conditions and the Supplementary

Conditions.

NOW THEREFORE, the obligations of Principal and Surety herein shall remain in full force and effect as

provided herein, subject to becoming null and void upon the occurrence of either or both of the conditions

that (a) Principal shall fully perform and satisfy all obligations and liabilities of Principal under the

warranty and guarantee provisions of Sections 13.2 and 13.12 of the General Conditions, as modified or

supplemented by the Supplementary Conditions or any other applicable Contract Documents, at any time

within one year after the date of Final Acceptance or such longer period of time as may be prescribed

therein (the “Warranty Period”), all of which includes without limitation either correcting the defective

Work, or removing and replacing it with nondefective Work, or paying all direct, indirect or

consequential costs of such correction or removal and replacement, all as provided therein, or (b) Owner

shall fail to institute a lawsuit, action or other proceeding under this Bond before the expiration of three

(3) months following the end of the Warranty Period.

FURTHER PROVIDED, that (a) any changes, modifications, amendments, alterations or

supplementations in or to the Contract, and Contract Documents or the Work, or the giving by Owner of

any extension of time for the performance of the Contract, or any other forbearance on the part of either

Owner or Principal to the other, shall not in any way release the Principal or Surety, or either of them,

from their liability hereunder, notice to the Surety of any of the forgoing being hereby waived, (b) in no

event shall the aggregate liability of Surety exceed the amount set herein, and (c) the rights and

00640-2

obligations hereof shall be binding upon and shall inure to the benefit of Principal, Surety, Owner and

their respective heirs, legal representatives, partners, privies, successors and assigns, provided that

nothing herein shall authorize the assignment of any such rights and obligations except upon compliance

with Section 9.2 of the Contract.

Executed on the day of , 20 .

By

(Seal)

Witness: )

)

Attest: )

(Seal)


EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.

Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.

00700-1

This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its use or

modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated Project and the

Controlling Law.

STANDARD

GENERAL CONDITIONS

OF THE

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

Prepared by

ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS COMMITTEE

and

Issued and Published Jointly By

PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE

a practice division of the

NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS

___________________

AMERICAN COUNCIL OF ENGINEERING COMPANIES

___________________

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS

This document has been approved and endorsed by

The Associated General Contractors of America

Construction Specifications Institute



00700-2

Copyright ©2002

National Society of Professional Engineers

1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314

American Council of Engineering Companies

1015 15th Street, N.W., Washington, DC 20005

American Society of Civil Engineers

1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400

These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Suggested Forms of Agreement Between Owner and

Contractor Nos. C-520 or C-525 (2002 Editions). Their provisions are interrelated and a change in one may necessitate a

change in the other. Comments concerning their usage are contained in the EJCDC Construction Documents, General and

Instructions (No. C-001) (2002 Edition). For guidance in the preparation of Supplementary Conditions, see Guide to the

Preparation of Supplementary Conditions (No. C-800) (2002 Edition).

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY .............................................................................................................. 6

1.01 Defined Terms .......................................................................................................................................................... 6

1.02 Terminology ............................................................................................................................................................. 8

ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS ............................................................................................................................... 9

2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance ......................................................................................................... 9

2.02 Copies of Documents ............................................................................................................................................... 9

2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ........................................................................................... 9

2.04 Starting the Work ..................................................................................................................................................... 9

2.05 Before Starting Construction ................................................................................................................................... 9

2.06 Preconstruction Conference .................................................................................................................................... 9

2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules ............................................................................................................................... 9

ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE ...................................................................... 10

3.01 Intent ...................................................................................................................................................................... 10

3.02 Reference Standards .............................................................................................................................................. 10

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ................................................................................................................ 10

3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents .............................................................................................. 11

3.05 Reuse of Documents ............................................................................................................................................... 11

3.06 Electronic Data ...................................................................................................................................................... 11

ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS ................................................................................................ 11

4.01 Availability of Lands .............................................................................................................................................. 11

4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ...................................................................................................................... 12

4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ........................................................................................................ 12

4.04 Underground Facilities .......................................................................................................................................... 13

4.05 Reference Points .................................................................................................................................................... 13

4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site ......................................................................................................... 13

ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE ............................................................................................................................. 14

5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds .............................................................................................................. 14

5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers .............................................................................................................................. 15

5.03 Certificates of Insurance ........................................................................................................................................ 15

5.04 Contractor’s Liability Insurance ........................................................................................................................... 15

5.05 Owner’s Liability Insurance .................................................................................................................................. 16

5.06 Property Insurance ................................................................................................................................................ 16

5.07 Waiver of Rights ..................................................................................................................................................... 17

5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds .................................................................................................... 17

5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace ....................................................................................... 17

5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer ..................................................................................... 18

ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES .......................................................................................................... 18

6.01 Supervision and Superintendence .......................................................................................................................... 18

6.02 Labor; Working Hours ........................................................................................................................................... 18

6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ...................................................................................................................... 18

6.04 Progress Schedule .................................................................................................................................................. 18

6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals” ................................................................................................................................. 19

6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others............................................................................................... 20

6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties ...................................................................................................................................... 21

6.08 Permits ................................................................................................................................................................... 21

6.09 Laws and Regulations ............................................................................................................................................ 21

6.10 Taxes ...................................................................................................................................................................... 22

6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas ................................................................................................................................... 22

6.12 Record Documents ................................................................................................................................................. 22

6.13 Safety and Protection ............................................................................................................................................. 22

6.14 Safety Representative ............................................................................................................................................. 23

6.15 Hazard Communication Programs ........................................................................................................................ 23

6.16 Emergencies ........................................................................................................................................................... 23

6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples ................................................................................................................................. 23

6.18 Continuing the Work .............................................................................................................................................. 24

6.19 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee .................................................................................................... 24

6.20 Indemnification ...................................................................................................................................................... 24

6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services .......................................................................................................... 25

ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK AT THE SITE ......................................................................................................................... 25

7.01 Related Work at Site............................................................................................................................................... 25

7.02 Coordination .......................................................................................................................................................... 26

7.03 Legal Relationships ................................................................................................................................................ 26

ARTICLE 8 - OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES ...................................................................................................................... 26

8.01 Communications to Contractor .............................................................................................................................. 26

8.02 Replacement of Engineer ....................................................................................................................................... 26

8.03 Furnish Data .......................................................................................................................................................... 26

8.04 Pay When Due ....................................................................................................................................................... 26

8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests .............................................................................................................. 26

8.06 Insurance ............................................................................................................................................................... 26

8.07 Change Orders ....................................................................................................................................................... 26

8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals .......................................................................................................................... 26

8.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities ............................................................................................................... 27

8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ................................................................................................ 27

8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements ..................................................................................................................... 27

ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................................... 27

9.01 Owner’s Representative ......................................................................................................................................... 27

9.02 Visits to Site ........................................................................................................................................................... 27

9.03 Project Representative ........................................................................................................................................... 27

9.04 Authorized Variations in Work .............................................................................................................................. 27

9.05 Rejecting Defective Work ....................................................................................................................................... 27

9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments ..................................................................................................... 28

9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work ...................................................................................................................... 28

9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................................................... 28

9.09 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities ..................................................................................... 28

ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS ........................................................................................................... 28

10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work ........................................................................................................................... 28

10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ....................................................................................................................... 29

10.03 Execution of Change Orders .................................................................................................................................. 29

10.04 Notification to Surety ............................................................................................................................................. 29

10.05 Claims .................................................................................................................................................................... 29

ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK .................................................................. 30

11.01 Cost of the Work .................................................................................................................................................... 30

11.02 Allowances ............................................................................................................................................................. 31

11.03 Unit Price Work ..................................................................................................................................................... 31

ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES ..................................................... 32

12.01 Change of Contract Price ...................................................................................................................................... 32

12.02 Change of Contract Times ..................................................................................................................................... 33

12.03 Delays .................................................................................................................................................................... 33

ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ....... 33

13.01 Notice of Defects .................................................................................................................................................... 33

13.02 Access to Work ....................................................................................................................................................... 33

13.03 Tests and Inspections ............................................................................................................................................. 33

13.04 Uncovering Work ................................................................................................................................................... 34

13.05 Owner May Stop the Work ..................................................................................................................................... 34

13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work ............................................................................................................. 34

13.07 Correction Period .................................................................................................................................................. 34

13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work ............................................................................................................................... 35

13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work...................................................................................................................... 35

ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION .............................................................................. 36

14.01 Schedule of Values ................................................................................................................................................. 36

14.02 Progress Payments ................................................................................................................................................ 36

14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title .............................................................................................................................. 37

14.04 Substantial Completion .......................................................................................................................................... 37

14.05 Partial Utilization .................................................................................................................................................. 38

14.06 Final Inspection ..................................................................................................................................................... 38

14.07 Final Payment ........................................................................................................................................................ 38

14.08 Final Completion Delayed ..................................................................................................................................... 39

14.09 Waiver of Claims ................................................................................................................................................... 39

ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION ......................................................................................... 39

15.01 Owner May Suspend Work ..................................................................................................................................... 39

15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ........................................................................................................................... 39

15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience ............................................................................................................... 40

15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate .............................................................................................................. 40

ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION ................................................................................................................................ 41

16.01 Methods and Procedures ....................................................................................................................................... 41

ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS ......................................................................................................................................... 41

17.01 Giving Notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 41

17.02 Computation of Times ............................................................................................................................................ 41

17.03 Cumulative Remedies ............................................................................................................................................. 41

17.04 Survival of Obligations .......................................................................................................................................... 41

17.05 Controlling Law ..................................................................................................................................................... 41

17.06 Headings ................................................................................................................................................................ 41



00700 - 6

GENERAL CONDITIONS

ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY

1.01 Defined Terms

A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements

or Contract Documents and printed with initial capital

letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings

indicated which are applicable to both the singular and

plural thereof. In addition to terms specifically defined,

terms with initial capital letters in the Contract

Documents include references to identified articles and

paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms.

1. Addenda--Written or graphic instruments

issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct,

or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed

Contract Documents.

2. Agreement--The written instrument which is

evidence of the agreement between Owner and Contractor

covering the Work.

3. Application for Payment--The form acceptable

to Engineer which is to be used by Contractor during the

course of the Work in requesting progress or final

payments and which is to be accompanied by such

supporting documentation as is required by the Contract

Documents.

4. Asbestos--Any material that contains more

than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing

asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels

established by the United States Occupational Safety and

Health Administration.

5. Bid--The offer or proposal of a Bidder

submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices

for the Work to be performed.

6. Bidder--The individual or entity who submits

a Bid directly to Owner.

7. Bidding Documents--The Bidding

Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents

(including all Addenda).

8. Bidding Requirements--The Advertisement or

Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, bid security of

acceptable form, if any, and the Bid Form with any

supplements.

9. Change Order--A document recommended by

Engineer which is signed by Contractor and Owner and

authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work

or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract

Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the

Agreement.

10. Claim--A demand or assertion by Owner or

Contractor seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or

Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the

terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by

a third party is not a Claim.

11. Contract--The entire and integrated written

agreement between the Owner and Contractor concerning

the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations,

representations, or agreements, whether written or oral.

12. Contract Documents-- Those items so

designated in the Agreement. Only printed or hard copies

of the items listed in the Agreement are Contract

Documents. Approved Shop Drawings, other Contractor’s

submittals, and the reports and drawings of subsurface

and physical conditions are not Contract Documents.

13. Contract Price--The moneys payable by

Owner to Contractor for completion of the Work in

accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the

Agreement (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03

in the case of Unit Price Work).

14. Contract Times--The number of days or the

dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve Milestones, if

any, (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) com-

plete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as

evidenced by Engineer’s written recommendation of final

payment.

15. Contractor--The individual or entity with

whom Owner has entered into the Agreement.

16. Cost of the Work--See Paragraph 11.01.A for

definition.

17. Drawings--That part of the Contract

Documents prepared or approved by Engineer which

graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the

Work to be performed by Contractor. Shop Drawings and

other Contractor submittals are not Drawings as so

defined.

18. Effective Date of the Agreement--The date

indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective,

but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which

the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the

two parties to sign and deliver.

19. Engineer--The individual or entity named as

such in the Agreement.



00700 - 7

20. Field Order--A written order issued by

Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but

which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or

the Contract Times.

21. General Requirements--Sections of Division

1 of the Specifications. The General Requirements pertain

to all sections of the Specifications.

22. Hazardous Environmental Condition--The

presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum,

Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such

quantities or circumstances that may present a substantial

danger to persons or property exposed thereto in

connection with the Work.

23. Hazardous Waste--The term Hazardous

Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of

the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as

amended from time to time.

24. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations-

-Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinanc-

es, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies,

agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction.

25. Liens--Charges, security interests, or

encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or

personal property.

26. Milestone--A principal event specified in the

Contract Documents relating to an intermediate comple-

tion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the

Work.

27. Notice of Award--The written notice by

Owner to the Successful Bidder stating that upon timely

compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions

precedent listed therein, Owner will sign and deliver the

Agreement.

28. Notice to Proceed--A written notice given by

Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract

Times will commence to run and on which Contractor

shall start to perform the Work under the Contract

Documents.

29. Owner--The individual or entity with whom

Contractor has entered into the Agreement and for whom

the Work is to be performed.

30. PCBs--Polychlorinated biphenyls.

31. Petroleum--Petroleum, including crude oil or

any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions

of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and

14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil,

petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline,

kerosene, and oil mixed with other non-Hazardous Waste

and crude oils.

32. Progress Schedule--A schedule, prepared and

maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and

duration of the activities comprising the Contractor’s plan

to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times.

33. Project--The total construction of which the

Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may

be the whole, or a part.

34. Project Manual--The bound documentary

information prepared for bidding and constructing the

Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual,

which may be bound in one or more volumes, is contained

in the table(s) of contents.

35. Radioactive Material--Source, special nucle-

ar, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy

Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended

from time to time.

36. Related Entity -- An officer, director, partner,

employee, agent, consultant, or subcontractor.

37. Resident Project Representative--The autho-

rized representative of Engineer who may be assigned to

the Site or any part thereof.

38. Samples--Physical examples of materials,

equipment, or workmanship that are representative of

some portion of the Work and which establish the

standards by which such portion of the Work will be

judged.

39. Schedule of Submittals--A schedule, prepared

and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and

the time requirements to support scheduled performance

of related construction activities.

40. Schedule of Values--A schedule, prepared

and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the

Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used

as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for

Payment.

41. Shop Drawings--All drawings, diagrams,

illustrations, schedules, and other data or information

which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for

Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some

portion of the Work.

42. Site--Lands or areas indicated in the Contract

Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the

Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and

easements for access thereto, and such other lands

furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of

Contractor.

43. Specifications--That part of the Contract

Documents consisting of written requirements for

materials, equipment, systems, standards and

workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain



00700 - 8

administrative requirements and procedural matters

applicable thereto.

44. Subcontractor--An individual or entity

having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other

Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work

at the Site.

45. Substantial Completion--The time at which

the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to

the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or

a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in

accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the

Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the

purposes for which it is intended. The terms “substantially

complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to all

or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion

thereof.

46. Successful Bidder--The Bidder submitting a

responsive Bid to whom Owner makes an award.

47. Supplementary Conditions--That part of the

Contract Documents which amends or supplements these

General Conditions.

48. Supplier--A manufacturer, fabricator, suppli-

er, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct

contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to

furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the

Work by Contractor or any Subcontractor.

49. Underground Facilities--All underground

pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults,

tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and

any encasements containing such facilities, including

those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid

petroleum products, telephone or other communications,

cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other

liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems.

50. Unit Price Work--Work to be paid for on the

basis of unit prices.

51. Work--The entire construction or the various

separately identifiable parts thereof required to be

provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes

and is the result of performing or providing all labor,

services, and documentation necessary to produce such

construction, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating

all materials and equipment into such construction, all as

required by the Contract Documents.

52. Work Change Directive--A written statement

to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the

Agreement and signed by Owner and recommended by

Engineer ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the

Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen subsurface

or physical conditions under which the Work is to be

performed or to emergencies. A Work Change Directive

will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times

but is evidence that the parties expect that the change

ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will

be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order

following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if

any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times.

1.02 Terminology

A. The following words or terms are not defined

but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract

Documents, have the following meaning.

B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives

1. The Contract Documents include the terms “as

allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered”, “as directed” or

terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of

professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the

adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,”

“proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or

import are used to describe an action or determination of

Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise

of professional judgment, action or determination will be

solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance

with the requirements of and information in the Contract

Documents and conformance with the design concept of

the completed Project as a functioning whole as shown or

indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a

specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any

such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be

effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to

supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any

duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to

the provisions of Paragraph 9.09 or any other provision of

the Contract Documents.

C. Day

1. The word “day” means a calendar day

of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.

D. Defective

1. The word “defective,” when modifying the

word “Work,” refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty,

or deficient in that it:

a. does not conform to the Contract Documents,

or

b. does not meet the requirements of any

applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or

approval referred to in the Contract Documents,

or

c. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s -

recommendation of final payment (unless

responsibility for the protection thereof has been

assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in

accordance with Paragraph 14.04 or 14.05).



00700 - 9

E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide

1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection

with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to

supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment

to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use

or installation and in usable or operable condition.

2. The word “install,” when used in connection

with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put

into use or place in final position said services, materials,

or equipment complete and ready for intended use.

3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used

in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall

mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or

equipment complete and ready for intended use.

4. When “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “pro-

vide” is not used in connection with services, materials, or

equipment in a context clearly requiring an obligation of

Contractor, “provide” is implied.

F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Docu-

ments, words or phrases which have a well-known

technical or construction industry or trade meaning are

used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such

recognized meaning.

ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS

2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance

A. When Contractor delivers the executed

counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall

also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be

required to furnish.

B. Evidence of Insurance: Before any Work at

the Site is started, Contractor and Owner shall each

deliver to the other, with copies to each additional insured

identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of

insurance (and other evidence of insurance which either

of them or any additional insured may reasonably request)

which Contractor and Owner respectively are required to

purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5.

2.02 Copies of Documents

A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to ten

printed or hard copies of the Drawings and Project

Manual. Additional copies will be furnished upon request

at the cost of reproduction.

2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to

Proceed

A. The Contract Times will commence to run on

the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement

or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in

the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given

at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the

Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times com-

mence to run later than the sixtieth day after the day of

Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of

the Agreement, whichever date is earlier.

2.04 Starting the Work

A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on

the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No

Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which

the Contract Times commence to run.

2.05 Before Starting Construction

A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after

the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise

specified in the General Requirements), Contractor shall

submit to Engineer for timely review:

1. a preliminary Progress Schedule; indicating

the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and

completing the various stages of the Work, including any

Milestones specified in the Contract Documents;

2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and

3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the

Work which includes quantities and prices of items which

when added together equal the Contract Price and subdi-

vides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to

serve as the basis for progress payments during

performance of the Work. Such prices will include an

appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to

each item of Work.

2.06 Preconstruction Conference

A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a

conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and

others as appropriate will be held to establish a working

understanding among the parties as to the Work and to

discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.05.A,

procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other

submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and

maintaining required records.

2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules

A. At least 10 days before submission of the first

Application for Payment a conference attended by

Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be

held to review for acceptability to Engineer as provided

below the schedules submitted in accordance with

Paragraph 2.05.A. Contractor shall have an additional 10

days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete

and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be

made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are

submitted to Engineer.



00700 - 10

1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to

Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work

to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance

will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the

Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or

progress of the Work nor interfere with or relieve

Contractor from Contractor’s full responsibility therefor.

2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be

acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable

arrangement for reviewing and processing the required

submittals.

3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be

acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it

provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to

component parts of the Work.

ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT,

AMENDING, REUSE

3.01 Intent

A. The Contract Documents are complementary;

what is required by one is as binding as if required by all.

B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to

describe a functionally complete Project (or part thereof)

to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Docu-

ments. Any labor, documentation, services, materials, or

equipment that may reasonably be inferred from the

Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade

usage as being required to produce the intended result will

be provided whether or not specifically called for at no

additional cost to Owner.

C. Clarifications and interpretations of the

Contract Documents shall be issued by Engineer as

provided in Article 9.

3.02 Reference Standards

A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and

Regulations

1. Reference to standards, specifications,

manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization,

or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such

reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the

standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regula-

tions in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the

Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids),

except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the

Contract Documents.

2. No provision of any such standard,

specification, manual or code, or any instruction of a

Supplier shall be effective to change the duties or

responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any

of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees

from those set forth in the Contract Documents. No such

provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to

Owner, or Engineer, or any of, their Related Entities, any

duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of

the Work or any duty or authority to undertake respon-

sibility inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract

Documents.

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies

A. Reporting Discrepancies

1. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents

Before Starting Work: Before undertaking each part of the

Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the

Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent

figures therein and all applicable field measurements.

Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer

any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which

Contractor may discover and shall obtain a written

interpretation or clarification from Engineer before

proceeding with any Work affected thereby.

2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents

During Performance of Work: If, during the performance

of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error,

ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents

or between the Contract Documents and any provision of

any Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of

the Work or of any standard, specification, manual or

code, or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor

shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor

shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except

in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A) until an

amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has

been issued by one of the methods indicated in Paragraph

3.04.

3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or

Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambigu-

ity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless

Contractor knew or reasonably should have known

thereof.

B. Resolving Discrepancies

1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated

in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract

Documents shall take precedence in resolving any

conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between the

provisions of the Contract Documents and:

a. the provisions of any standard, specification,

manual, code, or instruction (whether or not

specifically incorporated by reference in the

Contract Documents); or

b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations

applicable to the performance of the Work



00700 - 11

(unless such an interpretation of the provisions of

the Contract Documents would result in violation

of such Law or Regulation).

3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract

Documents

A. The Contract Documents may be amended to

provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work

or to modify the terms and conditions thereof by either a

Change Order or a Work Change Directive.

B. The requirements of the Contract Documents

may be supplemented, and minor variations and

deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more

of the following ways:

1. A Field Order;

2. Engineer’s approval of a Shop Drawing or

Sample; (Subject to the provisions of Paragraph

6.17.D.3); or

3. Engineer’s written interpretation or

clarification.

3.05 Reuse of Documents

A. Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier

or other individual or entity performing or furnishing all

of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with

Contractor, shall not:

1. have or acquire any title to or ownership

rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or

other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or

bearing the seal of Engineer or Engineer’s consultants,

including electronic media editions; or

2. reuse any of such Drawings, Specifications,

other documents, or copies thereof on extensions

of the Project or any other project without written consent

of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification

or adaption by Engineer.

B. The prohibition of this Paragraph 3.05 will

survive final payment, or termination of the Contract.

Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining

copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes.

3.06 Electronic Data

A. Copies of data furnished by Owner or

Engineer to Contractor or Contractor to Owner or

Engineer that may be relied upon are limited to the

printed copies (also known as hard copies). Files in

electronic media format of text, data, graphics, or other

types are furnished only for the convenience of the

receiving party. Any conclusion or information obtained

or derived from such electronic files will be at the user’s

sole risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic

files and the hard copies, the hard copies govern.

B. Because data stored in electronic media

format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently or

otherwise without authorization of the data’s creator, the

party receiving electronic files agrees that it will perform

acceptance tests or procedures within 60 days, after which

the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the

data thus transferred. Any errors detected within the 60-

day acceptance period will be corrected by the

transferring party..

C. When transferring documents in electronic

media format, the transferring party makes no

representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or

readability of documents resulting from the use of

software application packages, operating systems, or

computer hardware differing from those used by the

data’s creator.

ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS;

SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;

HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS;

REFERENCE POINTS

4.01 Availability of Lands

A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall

notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions not

of general application but specifically related to use of the

Site with which Contractor must comply in performing

the Work. Owner will obtain in a timely manner and pay

for easements for permanent structures or permanent

changes in existing facilities. If Contractor and Owner are

unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or

extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or

Contract Times, or both, as a result of any delay in

Owner’s furnishing the Site or a part thereof, Contractor

may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph

10.05.

B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall

furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal

title and legal description of the lands upon which the

Work is to be performed and Owner’s interest therein as

necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic's or

construction lien against such lands in accordance with

applicable Laws and Regulations.

C. Contractor shall provide for all additional

lands and access thereto that may be required for

temporary construction facilities or storage of materials

and equipment.



00700 - 12

4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions

A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary

Conditions identify:

1. those reports of explorations and tests of

subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site that

Engineer has used in preparing the Contract Documents;

and

2. those drawings of physical conditions in or

relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or

contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities)

that Engineer has used in preparing the Contract

Documents.

B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical

Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the general

accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports

and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not

Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified

in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance

on such “technical data,” Contractor may not rely upon or

make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of

their Related Entities with respect to:

1. the completeness of such reports and drawings

for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to,

any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences,

and procedures of construction to be employed by

Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident

thereto; or

2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and

information contained in such reports or shown or

indicated in such drawings; or

3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion

drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data,

interpretations, opinions, or information.

4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions

A. Notice: If Contractor believes that any subsur-

face or physical condition at or contiguous to the Site that

is uncovered or revealed either:

1. is of such a nature as to establish that any

“technical data” on which Contractor is entitled to rely as

provided in Paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or

2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the

Contract Documents; or

3. differs materially from that shown or indicated

in the Contract Documents; or

4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially

from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally

recognized as inherent in work of the character provided

for in the Contract Documents;

then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware

thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or

physical conditions or performing any Work in connec-

tion therewith (except in an emergency as required by

Paragraph 6.16.A), notify Owner and Engineer in writing

about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb

such condition or perform any Work in connection

therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written

order to do so.

B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written

notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A, Engineer will

promptly review the pertinent condition, determine the

necessity of Owner's obtaining additional exploration or

tests with respect thereto, and advise Owner in writing

(with a copy to Contractor) of Engineer’s findings and

conclusions.

C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments

1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or

both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent that the

existence of such differing subsurface or physical

condition causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s

cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work;

subject, however, to the following:

a. such condition must meet any one or more of

the categories described in Paragraph 4.03.A;

and

b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a Unit

Price Basis, any adjustment in Contract Price

will be subject to the provisions of Paragraphs

9.07 and 11.03.

2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any

adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if:

a. Contractor knew of the existence of such

conditions at the time Contractor made a final

commitment to Owner with respect to Contract

Price and Contract Times by the submission of a

Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated

contract; or

b. the existence of such condition could

reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a

result of any examination, investigation, explo-

ration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous

areas required by the Bidding Requirements or

Contract Documents to be conducted by or for

Contractor prior to Contractor's making such

final commitment; or



00700 - 13

c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as

required by Paragraph 4.03.A.

3. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree

on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of

any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times,

or both, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in

Paragraph 10.05. However, Owner and Engineer, and any

of their Related Entities shall not be liable to Contractor

for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but

not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,

attorneys, and other professionals and all court or

arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by

Contractor on or in connection with any other project or

anticipated project.

4.04 Underground Facilities

A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data

shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with

respect to existing Underground Facilities at or

contiguous to the Site is based on information and data

furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such

Underground Facilities, including Owner, or by others.

Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Sup-

plementary Conditions:

1. Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible

for the accuracy or completeness of any such information

or data; and

2. the cost of all of the following will be included

in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full

responsibility for:

a. reviewing and checking all such information

and data,

b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or

indicated in the Contract Documents,

c. coordination of the Work with the owners of

such Underground Facilities, including Owner,

during construction, and

d. the safety and protection of all such Under-

ground Facilities and repairing any damage

thereto resulting from the Work.

B. Not Shown or Indicated

1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or

revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not shown

or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable

accuracy in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall,

promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further

disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any

Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as

required by Paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of such

Underground Facility and give written notice to that

owner and to Owner and Engineer. Engineer will

promptly review the Underground Facility and determine

the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the

Contract Documents to reflect and document the

consequences of the existence or location of the Under-

ground Facility. During such time, Contractor shall be

responsible for the safety and protection of such

Underground Facility.

2. If Engineer concludes that a change in the

Contract Documents is required, a Work Change

Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and

document such consequences. An equitable adjustment

shall be made in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or

both, to the extent that they are attributable to the

existence or location of any Underground Facility that

was not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated

with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents and

that Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably

have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated.

If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on

entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any

such adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times,

Owner or Contractor may make a Claim therefor as

provided in Paragraph 10.05.

4.05 Reference Points

A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to

establish reference points for construction which in

Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to

proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible

for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the

established reference points and property monuments, and

shall make no changes or relocations without the prior

written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to

Engineer whenever any reference point or property

monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation

because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and

shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or

relocation of such reference points or property

monuments by professionally qualified personnel.

4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site

A. Reports and Drawings: Reference is made to

the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of

those reports and drawings relating to a Hazardous

Environmental Condition identified at the Site, if any, that

have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of

the Contract Documents.

B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical

Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the general

accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports

and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not

Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified

in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance

on such “technical data,” Contractor may not rely upon or

make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of

their Related Entities with respect to:



00700 - 14

1. the completeness of such reports and drawings

for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to,

any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences

and procedures of construction to be employed by

Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident

thereto; or

2. other data, interpretations, opinions and

information contained in such reports or shown or

indicated in such drawings; or

3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion

drawn from any “technical data” or any such other data,

interpretations, opinions or information.

C. Contractor shall not be responsible for any

Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or re-

vealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in

Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract

Documents to be within the scope of the Work.

Contractor shall be responsible for a Hazardous

Environmental Condition created with any materials

brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors,

Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is

responsible.

D. If Contractor encounters a Hazardous

Environmental Condition or if Contractor or anyone for

whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous

Environmental Condition, Contractor shall immediately:

(i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all

Work in connection with such condition and in any area

affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by

Paragraph 6.16.A); and (iii) notify Owner and Engineer

(and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing).

Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning

the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to

evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any.

E. Contractor shall not be required to resume

Work in connection with such condition or in any affected

area until after Owner has obtained any required permits

related thereto and delivered to Contractor written notice:

(i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is

or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or

(ii) specifying any special conditions under which such

Work may be resumed safely. If Owner and Contractor

cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or

extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or

Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stop-

page or such special conditions under which Work is

agreed to be resumed by Contractor, either party may

make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

F. If after receipt of such written notice

Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on

a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to

resume such Work under such special conditions, then

Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the

area affected by such condition to be deleted from the

Work. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to

entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of an

adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result

of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party

may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph

10.05. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work

performed by Owner’s own forces or others in accordance

with Article 7.

G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and

Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless

Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the

officers, directors, partners, employees, agents,

consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them

from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages

(including but not limited to all fees and charges of

engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals

and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution

costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous

Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous

Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated

in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the

Contract Documents to be included within the scope of

the Work, and (ii) was not created by Contractor or by

anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in

this Paragraph 4.06. G shall obligate Owner to indemnify

any individual or entity from and against the conse-

quences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.

H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and

Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold

harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors,

partners, employees, agents, consultants, and

subcontractors of each and any of them from and against

all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not

limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,


arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of

or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition

created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor

is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.H shall

obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity

from and against the consequences of that individual’s or

entity’s own negligence.

I. The provisions of Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and

4.04 do not apply to a Hazardous Environmental

Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site.

ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE

5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds

A. Contractor shall furnish performance and

payment bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the

Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and

payment of all of Contractor’s obligations under the

Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect

until one year after the date when final payment becomes

due or until completion of the correction period specified



00700 - 15

in Paragraph 13.07, whichever is later, except as provided

otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract

Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other

bonds as are required by the Contract Documents.

B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by

the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by

Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such

sureties as are named in the current list of “Companies

Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties

on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Compa-

nies” as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the

Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S.

Department of the Treasury. All bonds signed by an agent

must be accompanied by a certified copy of the agent’s

authority to act.

C. If the surety on any bond furnished by

Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or

its right to do business is terminated in any state where

any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the

requirements of Paragraph 5.01.B, Contractor shall

promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20

days after the event giving rise to such notification,

provide another bond and surety, both of which shall

comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 5.01.B and

5.02.

5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers

A. All bonds and insurance required by the

Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by

Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from surety or

insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized

in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue

bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so

required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also

meet such additional requirements and qualifications as

may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions.

5.03 Certificates of Insurance

A. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies

to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary

Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence

of insurance requested by Owner or any other additional

insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and

maintain.

B. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies

to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary

Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence

of insurance requested by Contractor or any other

additional insured) which Owner is required to purchase

and maintain.

5.04 Contractor’s Liability Insurance

A. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such

liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work

being performed and as will provide protection from

claims set forth below which may arise out of or result

from Contractor’s performance of the Work and

Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract

Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor,

any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or

indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the

Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be

liable:

1. claims under workers’ compensation,

disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit

acts;

2. claims for damages because of bodily injury,

occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor’s

employees;

3. claims for damages because of bodily injury,

sickness or disease, or death of any person other than

Contractor’s employees;

4. claims for damages insured by reasonably

available personal injury liability coverage which are sus-

tained:

a. by any person as a result of an offense directly

or indirectly related to the employment of such

person by Contractor, or

b. by any other person for any other reason;

5. claims for damages, other than to the Work

itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible

property wherever located, including loss of use resulting

therefrom; and

6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or

death of any person or property damage arising out of the

ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle.

B. The policies of insurance required by this

Paragraph 5.04 shall:

1. with respect to insurance required by

Paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, include

as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion

regarding professional liability) Owner and Engineer, and

any other individuals or entities identified in the Supple-

mentary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as addi-

tional insureds, and include coverage for the respective

officers, directors, partners, employees, agents,

consultants and subcontractors of each and any of all such

additional insureds, and the insurance afforded to these

additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all

claims covered thereby;

2. include at least the specific coverages and be

written for not less than the limits of liability provided in

the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or

Regulations, whichever is greater;



00700 - 16

3. include completed operations insurance;

4. include contractual liability insurance covering

Contractor’s indemnity obligations under Paragraphs 6.11

and 6.20;

5. contain a provision or endorsement that the

coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially

changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior

written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor

and to each other additional insured identified in the

Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of

insurance has been issued (and the certificates of

insurance furnished by the Contractor pursuant to

Paragraph 5.03 will so provide);

6. remain in effect at least until final payment

and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be

correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in

accordance with Paragraph 13.07; and

7. with respect to completed operations insur-

ance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-

made basis, remain in effect for at least two years after

final payment.

a. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other

additional insured identified in the Supple-

mentary Conditions, to whom a certificate of

insurance has been issued, evidence satisfactory

to Owner and any such additional insured of

continuation of such insurance at final payment

and one year thereafter.

5.05 Owner’s Liability Insurance

A. In addition to the insurance required to be

provided by Contractor under Paragraph 5.04, Owner, at

Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain at Owner’s

expense Owner’s own liability insurance as will protect

Owner against claims which may arise from operations

under the Contract Documents.

5.06 Property Insurance

A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supple-

mentary Conditions, Owner shall purchase and maintain

property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the

amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to

such deductible amounts as may be provided in the

Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and

Regulations). This insurance shall:

1. include the interests of Owner, Contractor,

Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other individuals

or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions,

and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents,

consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them,

each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and

shall be listed as an insured or additional insured;

2. be written on a Builder’s Risk “all-risk” or

open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall

at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to

the Work, temporary buildings, false work, and materials

and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least

the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning,

extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious

mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition

occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations,

water damage, (other than caused by flood) and such

other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically

required by the Supplementary Conditions;

3. include expenses incurred in the repair or

replacement of any insured property (including but not

limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects);

4. cover materials and equipment stored at the

Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by

Owner prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided

that such materials and equipment have been included in

an Application for Payment recommended by Engineer;

5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by

Owner;

6. include testing and startup; and

7. be maintained in effect until final payment is

made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner,

Contractor, and Engineer with 30 days written notice to

each other additional insured to whom a certificate of

insurance has been issued.

B. Owner shall purchase and maintain such

boiler and machinery insurance or additional property

insurance as may be required by the Supplementary

Conditions or Laws and Regulations which will include

the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and

Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified

in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers,

directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and

subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is

deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as

an insured or additional insured.

C. All the policies of insurance (and the certifi-

cates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased

and maintained in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will

contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage

afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or

renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice

has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other

additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has

been issued and will contain waiver provisions in accor-

dance with Paragraph 5.07.

D. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing

and maintaining any property insurance specified in this

Paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of Contractor,

Subcontractors, or others in the Work to the extent of any



00700 - 17

deductible amounts that are identified in the Supple-

mentary Conditions. The risk of loss within such

identified deductible amount will be borne by Contractor,

Subcontractors, or others suffering any such loss, and if

any of them wishes property insurance coverage within

the limits of such amounts, each may purchase and

maintain it at the purchaser’s own expense.

E. If Contractor requests in writing that other

special insurance be included in the property insurance

policies provided under Paragraph 5.06, Owner shall, if

possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will

be charged to Contractor by appropriate Change Order.

Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, Owner

shall in writing advise Contractor whether or not such

other insurance has been procured by Owner.

5.07 Waiver of Rights

A. Owner and Contractor intend that all policies

purchased in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will protect

Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all

other individuals or entities identified in the Supple-

mentary Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional

insureds (and the officers, directors, partners, employees,

agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of

them) in such policies and will provide primary coverage

for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes

of loss covered thereby. All such policies shall contain

provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any

loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recov-

ery against any of the insureds or additional insureds

thereunder. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against

each other and their respective officers, directors,

partners, employees, agents, consultants and

subcontractors of each and any of them for all losses and

damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of

the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and

any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and,

in addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors,

and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities

identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as

insured or additional insured (and the officers, directors,


subcontractors of each and any of them) under such

policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the

above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party

making such waiver may have to the proceeds of

insurance held by Owner as trustee or otherwise payable

under any policy so issued.

B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor,

Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors,


subcontractors of each and any of them for:

1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use,

or other consequential loss extending beyond direct

physical loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work

caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other

perils whether or not insured by Owner; and

2. loss or damage to the completed Project or

part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from

fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any

property insurance maintained on the completed Project

or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization

pursuant to Paragraph 14.05, after Substantial Completion

pursuant to Paragraph 14.04, or after final payment

pursuant to Paragraph 14.07.

C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner

covering any loss, damage or consequential loss referred

to in Paragraph 5.07.B shall contain provisions to the

effect that in the event of payment of any such loss,

damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no

rights of recovery against Contractor, Subcontractors, or

Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees,

agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of

them.

5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds

A. Any insured loss under the policies of

insurance required by Paragraph 5.06 will be adjusted

with Owner and made payable to Owner as fiduciary for

the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the

requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of

Paragraph 5.08.B. Owner shall deposit in a separate

account any money so received and shall distribute it in

accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest

may reach. If no other special agreement is reached, the

damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys

so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and

the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order .

B. Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust

and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the

parties in interest shall object in writing within 15 days

after the occurrence of loss to Owner’s exercise of this

power. If such objection be made, Owner as fiduciary

shall make settlement with the insurers in accordance with

such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no

such agreement among the parties in interest is reached,

Owner as fiduciary shall adjust and settle the loss with the

insurers and, if required in writing by any party in

interest, Owner as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper

performance of such duties.

5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to

Replace

A. If either Owner or Contractor has any

objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions

of the bonds or insurance required to be purchased and

maintained by the other party in accordance with Article 5

on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract



00700 - 18

Documents, the objecting party shall so notify the other

party in writing within 10 days after receipt of the

certificates (or other evidence requested) required by

Paragraph 2.01.B. Owner and Contractor shall each

provide to the other such additional information in respect

of insurance provided as the other may reasonably

request. If either party does not purchase or maintain all

of the bonds and insurance required of such party by the

Contract Documents, such party shall notify the other

party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the

start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to

any change in the required coverage. Without prejudice to

any other right or remedy, the other party may elect to

obtain equivalent bonds or insurance to protect such other

party's interests at the expense of the party who was

required to provide such coverage, and a Change Order

shall be issued to adjust the Contract Price accordingly.

5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property

Insurer

A. If Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a

portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial

Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph

14.05, no such use or occupancy shall commence before

the insurers providing the property insurance pursuant to

Paragraph 5.06 have acknowledged notice thereof and in

writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated

thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance

shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies,

but the property insurance shall not be canceled or

permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or

occupancy.

ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

6.01 Supervision and Superintendence

A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct

the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such

attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as

may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with

the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely

responsible for the means, methods, techniques,

sequences, and procedures of construction. Contractor

shall not be responsible for the negligence of Owner or

Engineer in the design or specification of a specific

means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of

construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly

required by the Contract Documents.

B. At all times during the progress of the Work,

Contractor shall assign a competent resident superin-

tendent who shall not be replaced without written notice

to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary

circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor’s

representative at the Site and shall have authority to act on

behalf of Contractor. All communications given to or

received from the superintendent shall be binding on

Contractor.

6.02 Labor; Working Hours

A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably

qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and

perform construction as required by the Contract Docu-

ments. Contractor shall at all times maintain good disci-

pline and order at the Site.

B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or

protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site

or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the

Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be

performed during regular working hours. Contractor will

not permit the performance of Work on a Saturday,

Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner’s written

consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) given

after prior written notice to Engineer.

6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment

A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract

Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full

responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor,

transportation, construction equipment and machinery,

tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone,

water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other

facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance,

testing, start-up, and completion of the Work.

B. All materials and equipment incorporated into

the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be

of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in

the Contract Documents. All special warranties and

guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly

run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer,

Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including

reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and

quality of materials and equipment.

C. All materials and equipment shall be stored,

applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used,

cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions

of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be

provided in the Contract Documents.

6.04 Progress Schedule

A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress

Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.07

as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided

below.



00700 - 19

1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for

acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.07)

proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will

not result in changing the Contract Times. Such adjust-

ments will comply with any provisions of the General Re-

quirements applicable thereto.

2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress

Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be

submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article

12. Adjustments in Contract Times may only be made by

a Change Order.

6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals”

A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is

specified or described in the Contract Documents by

using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a

particular Supplier, the specification or description is

intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and

quality required. Unless the specification or description

contains or is followed by words reading that no like,

equivalent, or “or-equal” item or no substitution is

permitted, other items of material or equipment or

material or equipment of other Suppliers may be

submitted to Engineer for review under the circumstances

described below.

1. “Or-Equal” Items: If in Engineer’s sole

discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by

Contractor is functionally equal to that named and

sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will

be required, it may be considered by Engineer as an

“or-equal” item, in which case review and approval of the

proposed item may, in Engineer’s sole discretion, be

accomplished without compliance with some or all of the

requirements for approval of proposed substitute items.

For the purposes of this Paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed

item of material or equipment will be considered

functionally equal to an item so named if:

a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment

Engineer determines that:

1) it is at least equal in materials of

construction, quality, durability, appearance,

strength, and design characteristics;

2) it will reliably perform at least

equally well the function and achieve the results

imposed by the design concept of the completed

Project as a functioning whole,

3) it has a proven record of performance

and availability of responsive service; and

b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and

incorporated into the Work:

1) there will be no increase in cost to

the Owner or increase in Contract Times, and

2) it will conform substantially to the

detailed requirements of the item named in the

Contract Documents.

2. Substitute Items

a. If in Engineer’s sole discretion an item of

material or equipment proposed by Contractor

does not qualify as an “or-equal” item under

Paragraph 6.05.A.1, it will be considered a

proposed substitute item.

b. Contractor shall submit sufficient information

as provided below to allow Engineer to

determine that the item of material or equipment

proposed is essentially equivalent to that named

and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests

for review of proposed substitute items of

material or equipment will not be accepted by

Engineer from anyone other than Contractor.

c. The requirements for review by Engineer will

be as set forth in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.d, as

supplemented in the General Requirements and

as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the

circumstances.

d. Contractor shall make written application to

Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item

of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to

furnish or use. The application:

1) shall certify that the proposed substi-

tute item will:

a) perform adequately the functions and

achieve the results called for by the

general design,

b) be similar in substance to that

specified, and

c) be suited to the same use as that

specified;

2) will state:

a) the extent, if any, to which the use of

the proposed substitute item will preju-

dice Contractor’s achievement of

Substantial Completion on time;

b) whether or not use of the proposed

substitute item in the Work will require

a change in any of the Contract Docu-

ments (or in the provisions of any other

direct contract with Owner for other

work on the Project) to adapt the design

to the proposed substitute item; and



00700 - 20

c) whether or not incorporation or use

of the proposed substitute item in con-

nection with the Work is subject to

payment of any license fee or royalty;

3) will identify:

a) all variations of the proposed

substitute item from that specified , and

b) available engineering, sales,

maintenance, repair, and replacement

services;

4) and shall contain an itemized esti-

mate of all costs or credits that will result

directly or indirectly from use of such substitute

item, including costs of redesign and claims of

other contractors affected by any resulting

change,

B. Substitute Construction Methods or Proce-

dures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence,

or procedure of construction is expressly required by the

Contract Documents, Contractor may furnish or utilize a

substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or

procedure of construction approved by Engineer.

Contractor shall submit sufficient information to allow

Engineer, in Engineer’s sole discretion, to determine that

the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly

called for by the Contract Documents. The requirements

for review by Engineer will be similar to those provided

in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.

C. Engineer’s Evaluation: Engineer will be

allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each

proposal or submittal made pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A

and 6.05.B. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish

additional data about the proposed substitute item.

Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or

equal” or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized

until Engineer’s review is complete, which will be

evidenced by either a Change Order for a substitute or an

approved Shop Drawing for an “or equal.” Engineer will

advise Contractor in writing of any negative

determination.

D. Special Guarantee: Owner may require

Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special

performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any

substitute.

E. Engineer’s Cost Reimbursement: Engineer

will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a substitute

proposed or submitted by Contractor pursuant to

Paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.B Whether or not Engineer

approves a substitute item so proposed or submitted by

Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the

charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed

substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the

charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract

Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct

contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of

each proposed substitute.

F. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall

provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or

“or-equal” at Contractor’s expense.

6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and

Others

A. Contractor shall not employ any Subcon-

tractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity (including

those acceptable to Owner as indicated in Paragraph

6.06.B), whether initially or as a replacement, against

whom Owner may have reasonable objection. Contractor

shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor,

Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or

perform any of the Work against whom Contractor has

reasonable objection.

B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the

identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other

individuals or entities to be submitted to Owner in

advance for acceptance by Owner by a specified date

prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, and if

Contractor has submitted a list thereof in accordance with

the Supplementary Conditions, Owner’s acceptance

(either in writing or by failing to make written objection

thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection

in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of

any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or

entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reason-

able objection after due investigation. Contractor shall

submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected

Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and

the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in the

cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate

Change Order will be issued . No acceptance by Owner of

any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or

entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall consti-

tute a waiver of any right of Owner or Engineer to reject

defective Work.

C. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner

and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the

Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or

entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as

Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and

omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents:

1. shall create for the benefit of any such

Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any

contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and

any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or

entity, nor

2. shall anything in the Contract Documents

create any obligation on the part of Owner or

Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys

due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual



00700 - 21

or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws

and Regulations.

D. Contractor shall be solely responsible for

scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors,

Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or

furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect

contract with Contractor.

E. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors,

Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities per-

forming or furnishing any of the Work to communicate

with Engineer through Contractor.

F. The divisions and sections of the Specifica-

tions and the identifications of any Drawings shall not

control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcon-

tractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be

performed by any specific trade.

G. All Work performed for Contractor by a

Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appro-

priate agreement between Contractor and the

Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the

Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and

conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of

Owner and Engineer. Whenever any such agreement is

with a Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as an

additional insured on the property insurance provided in

Paragraph 5.06, the agreement between the Contractor

and the Subcontractor or Supplier will contain provisions

whereby the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights

against Owner, Contractor, and Engineer,, and all other

individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary

Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds

(and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents,

consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them)

for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of,

relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of

loss covered by such policies and any other property

insurance applicable to the Work. If the insurers on any

such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed

by any Subcontractor or Supplier, Contractor will obtain

the same.

6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties

A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and

royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the

performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work

of any invention, design, process, product, or device

which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by

others. If a particular invention, design, process, product,

or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use

in the performance of the Work and if to the actual

knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to

patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any

license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such

rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract

Documents.

B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and









or relating to any infringement of patent rights or

copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the

Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of

any invention, design, process, product, or device not

specified in the Contract Documents.

6.08 Permits

A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supple-

mentary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for

all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist

Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and

licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges

and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the

Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids,

or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the

Agreement. Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners

for connections for providing permanent service to the

Work.

6.09 Laws and Regulations

A. Contractor shall give all notices required by

and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applica-

ble to the performance of the Work. Except where

otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and

Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be

responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with

any Laws or Regulations.

B. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or

having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or

Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses,

and damages (including but not limited to all fees and

charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other

professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute

resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work.

However, it shall not be Contractor’s primary

responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and

Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations,

but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor’s

obligations under Paragraph 3.03.

C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at

the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of

the Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on

the cost or time of performance of the Work shall be the

subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract

Times. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on

entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any

such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as




00700 - 22

6.10 Taxes

A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use,

and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor

in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place

of the Project which are applicable during the

performance of the Work.

6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas

A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas

1. Contractor shall confine construction equip-

ment, the storage of materials and equipment, and the

operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted

by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably

encumber the Site and other areas with construction

equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor

shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any

such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof, or

of any adjacent land or areas resulting from the


2. Should any claim be made by any such owner

or occupant because of the performance of the Work,

Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by

negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration

or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law.

3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and









or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable,

brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner,

Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the

extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance

of the Work.

B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the

Work: During the progress of the Work Contractor shall

keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of

waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and

disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris

shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations.

C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of

the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work

and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the com-

pletion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site

all tools, appliances, construction equipment and

machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to

original condition all property not designated for

alteration by the Contract Documents.

D. Loading Structures: Contractor shall not load

nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any

manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall

Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent

property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it.

6.12 Record Documents

A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the

Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications,

Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field

Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in

good order and annotated to show changes made during

construction. These record documents together with all

approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop

Drawings will be available to Engineer for reference.

Upon completion of the Work, these record documents,

Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to Engi-

neer for Owner.

6.13 Safety and Protection

A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for

initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precau-

tions and programs in connection with the Work.

Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the

safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to

prevent damage, injury or loss to:

1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected

by the Work;

2. all the Work and materials and equipment to

be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the

Site; and

3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto,

including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,

roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities

not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in

the course of construction.

B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable

Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or

property, or to the protection of persons or property from

damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all

necessary safeguards for such safety and protection.

Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of

Underground Facilities and other utility owners when

prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall

cooperate with them in the protection, removal,

relocation, and replacement of their property.

C. All damage, injury, or loss to any property

referred to in Paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 caused,

directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor,

any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or

entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to

perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of

them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor

(except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Draw-



00700 - 23

ings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of

Owner or Engineer or , or anyone employed by any of

them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable,

and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in

part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any

Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity

directly or indirectly employed by any of them).

D. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for

safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until

such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has

issued a notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance

with Paragraph 14.07.B that the Work is acceptable

(except as otherwise expressly provided in connection

with Substantial Completion).

6.14 Safety Representative

A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and

experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties

and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents

and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions

and programs.

6.15 Hazard Communication Programs

A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordi-

nating any exchange of material safety data sheets or

other hazard communication information required to be

made available to or exchanged between or among

employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or

Regulations.

6.16 Emergencies

A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protec-

tion of persons or the Work or property at the Site or

adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent

threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give

Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that

any significant changes in the Work or variations from the

Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are

required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a

change in the Contract Documents is required because of

the action taken by Contractor in response to such an

emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order

will be issued.

6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples

A. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and

Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accor-

dance with the acceptable Schedule of Submittals (as

required by Paragraph 2.07). Each submittal will be

identified as Engineer may require.

1. Shop Drawings

a. Submit number of copies specified in the

General Requirements.

b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be

complete with respect to quantities, dimensions,

specified performance and design criteria,

materials, and similar data to show Engineer the

services, materials, and equipment Contractor

proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to

review the information for the limited purposes

required by Paragraph 6.17.D.

2. Samples: Contractor shall also submit Samples

to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with

the acceptable schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample

submittals.

a. Submit number of Samples specified in the

Specifications.

b. Clearly identify each Sample as to material,

Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers,

the use for which intended and other data as

Engineer may require to enable Engineer to

review the submittal for the limited purposes

required by Paragraph 6.17.D.

B. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required

by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals

, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review

and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole

expense and responsibility of Contractor.

C. Submittal Procedures

1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or

Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified:

a. all field measurements, quantities, dimensions,

specified performance and design criteria,

installation requirements, materials, catalog

numbers, and similar information with respect

thereto;

b. the suitability of all materials with respect to

intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling,

storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to

the performance of the Work;

c. all information relative to Contractor’s

responsibilities for means, methods, techniques,

sequences, and procedures of construction, and

safety precautions and programs incident thereto;

and

d. shall also have reviewed and coordinated each

Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop

Drawings and Samples and with the

requirements of the Work and the Contract

Documents.

2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific

written certification that Contractor has satisfied

Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents



00700 - 24

with respect to Contractor’s review and approval of that

submittal.

3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give

Engineer specific written notice of any variations, that the

Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements

of the Contract Documents. This notice shall be both a

written communication separate from the Shop Drawing’s

or Sample Submittal; and, in addition, by a specific

notation made on each Shop Drawing or Sample submit-

ted to Engineer for review and approval of each such

variation.

D. Engineer’s Review

1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop

Drawings and Samples in accordance with the Schedule

of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer’s review

and approval will be only to determine if the items

covered by the submittals will, after installation or

incorporation in the Work, conform to the information

given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with

the design concept of the completed Project as a

functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Docu-

ments.

2. Engineer’s review and approval will not

extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or

procedures of construction (except where a particular

means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of con-

struction is specifically and expressly called for by the

Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs

incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate

item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in

which the item functions.

3. Engineer’s review and approval shall not

relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation

from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless

Contractor has complied with the requirements of

Paragraph 6.17.C.3 and Engineer has given written

approval of each such variation by specific written

notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the

Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer’s review and approval

shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for

complying with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.1.

E. Resubmittal Procedures

1. Contractor shall make corrections required by

Engineer and shall return the required number of cor-

rected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required,

new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall

direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than

the corrections called for by Engineer on previous

submittals.

6.18 Continuing the Work

A. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere

to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or

disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or

postponed pending resolution of any disputes or

disagreements, except as permitted by Paragraph 15.04 or

as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.

6.19 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee

A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner

that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract

Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its

Related Entities shall be entitled to rely on representation

of Contractor’s warranty and guarantee.

B. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee

hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by:

1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance

or operation by persons other than Contractor, Sub-

contractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for

whom Contractor is responsible; or

2. normal wear and tear under normal usage.

C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and

complete the Work in accordance with the Contract

Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will

constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance

with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s

obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the

Contract Documents:

1. observations by Engineer;

2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by

Owner of any progress or final payment;

3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial

Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto

by Owner;

4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part

thereof by Owner;

5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or

Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of acceptabil-

ity by Engineer;

6. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or

7. any correction of defective Work by Owner.

6.20 Indemnification

A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and










00700 - 25


or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that

any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to

bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or

destruction of tangible property (other than the Work

itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but

only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission

of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any

individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any

of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose

acts any of them may be liable .

B. In any and all claims against Owner or

Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents,

officers, directors, partners, or employees by any employ-

ee (or the survivor or personal representative of such

employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any

Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly

employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or

anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the

indemnification obligation under Paragraph 6.20.A shall

not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount

or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by

or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or

other individual or entity under workers’ compensation

acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit

acts.

C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor

under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the liability of

Engineer and Engineer’s officers, directors, partners,

employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors arising

out of:

1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to

prepare or approve, maps, Drawings, opinions, reports,

surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or

2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to

give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or

damage.

6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services

A. Contractor will not be required to provide

professional design services unless such services are

specifically required by the Contract Documents for a

portion of the Work or unless such services are required

to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction

means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures.

Contractor shall not be required to provide professional

services in violation of applicable law.

B. If professional design services or

certifications by a design professional related to systems,

materials or equipment are specifically required of

Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner and

Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria

that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause

such services or certifications to be provided by a

properly licensed professional, whose signature and seal

shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications,

certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals

prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other

submittals related to the Work designed or certified by

such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such

professional’s written approval when submitted to

Engineer.

C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely

upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the

services, certifications or approvals performed by such

design professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have

specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria

that such services must satisfy.

D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 6.21, Engineer’s

review and approval of design calculations and design

drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking

for conformance with performance and design criteria

given and the design concept expressed in the Contract

Documents. Engineer’s review and approval of Shop

Drawings and other submittals (except design calculations

and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated

in Paragraph 6.17.D.1.

E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the

adequacy of the performance or design criteria required

by the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK AT THE SITE

7.01 Related Work at Site

A. Owner may perform other work related to the

Project at the Site with Owner’s employees, or via other

direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by

utility owners. If such other work is not noted in the Con-

tract Documents, then:

1. written notice thereof will be given to

Contractor prior to starting any such other work; and

2. if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree

on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of

any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times

that should be allowed as a result of such other work, a

Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph

10.05.

B. Contractor shall afford each other contractor

who is a party to such a direct contract, each utility owner

and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with

Owner’s employees, proper and safe access to the Site, a

reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of

materials and equipment and the execution of such other

work, and shall properly coordinate the Work with theirs.

Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the

Work that may be required to properly connect or

otherwise make its several parts come together and



00700 - 26

properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall

not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or

otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter

their work with the written consent of Engineer and the

others whose work will be affected. The duties and

responsibilities of Contractor under this Paragraph are for

the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to

the extent that there are comparable provisions for the

benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between

Owner and such utility owners and other contractors.

C. If the proper execution or results of any part

of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by

others under this Article 7, Contractor shall inspect such

other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any

delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that

render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper

execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s

failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such

other work as fit and proper for integration with

Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and

deficiencies in such other work.

7.02 Coordination

A. If Owner intends to contract with others for

the performance of other work on the Project at the Site,

the following will be set forth in Supplementary Condi-

tions:

1. the individual or entity who will have

authority and responsibility for coordination of the

activities among the various contractors will be identified;

2. the specific matters to be covered by such

authority and responsibility will be itemized; and

3. the extent of such authority and responsibili-

ties will be provided.

B. Unless otherwise provided in the

Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole

authority and responsibility for such coordination.

7.03 Legal Relationships

A. Paragraphs 7.01.A and 7.02 are not applicable

for utilities not under the control of Owner.

B. Each other direct contract of Owner under

Paragraph 7.01.A shall provide that the other contractor is

liable to Owner and Contractor for the reasonable direct

delay and disruption costs incurred by Contractor as a

result of the other contractor’s actions or inactions.

C. Contractor shall be liable to Owner and any

other contractor for the reasonable direct delay and

disruption costs incurred by such other contractor as a

result of Contractor’s action or inactions.

ARTICLE 8 - OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES

8.01 Communications to Contractor

A. Except as otherwise provided in these General

Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to

Contractor through Engineer.

8.02 Replacement of Engineer

A. In case of termination of the employment of

Engineer, Owner shall appoint an engineer to whom

Contractor makes no reasonable objection, whose status

under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former

Engineer.

8.03 Furnish Data

A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data

required of Owner under the Contract Documents.

8.04 Pay When Due

A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor

when they are due as provided in Paragraphs 14.02.C and

14.07.C.

8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests

A. Owner’s duties in respect of providing lands

and easements and providing engineering surveys to

establish reference points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01

and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to Owner’s identifying

and making available to Contractor copies of reports of

explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and

drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing

surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the

Site that have been utilized by Engineer in preparing the

Contract Documents.

8.06 Insurance

A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, in respect to

purchasing and maintaining liability and property insur-

ance are set forth in Article 5.

8.07 Change Orders

A. Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders

as indicated in Paragraph 10.03.

8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals

A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to certain

inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph

13.03.B.



00700 - 27

8.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities

A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have

control or authority over, nor be responsible for,

Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or

procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and

programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor

to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the

performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible

for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in

accordance with the Contract Documents.

8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental

Condition

A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undis-

closed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in

Paragraph 4.06.

8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements

A. If and to the extent Owner has agreed to

furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial

arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s

obligations under the Contract Documents, Owner’s

responsibility in respect thereof will be as set forth in the

Supplementary Conditions.

ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING

CONSTRUCTION

9.01 Owner’s Representative

A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative

during the construction period. The duties and responsi-

bilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as

Owner’s representative during construction are set forth in

the Contract Documents and will not be changed without

written consent of Owner and Engineer.

9.02 Visits to Site

A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at inter-

vals appropriate to the various stages of construction as

Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an

experienced and qualified design professional the

progress that has been made and the quality of the various

aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on

information obtained during such visits and observations,

Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in

general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the

Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to

make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to

check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer’s

efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a

greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will

conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the

basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep

Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will

endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work.

B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject

to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority and

responsibility set forth in Paragraph 9.09. Particularly, but

without limitation, during or as a result of Engineer's

visits or observations of Contractor's Work Engineer will

not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be

responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques,

sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety

precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any

failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and

Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work.

9.03 Project Representative

A. If Owner and Engineer agree, Engineer will

furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist

Engineer in providing more extensive observation of the

Work. The authority and responsibilities of any such

Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as

provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and

limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as

provided in Paragraph 9.09. If Owner designates another

representative or agent to represent Owner at the Site who

is not Engineer’s consultant, agent or employee, the

responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of

such other individual or entity will be as provided in the

Supplementary Conditions.

9.04 Authorized Variations in Work

A. Engineer may authorize minor variations in

the Work from the requirements of the Contract

Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the

Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible

with the design concept of the completed Project as a

functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Docu-

ments. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and

will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, who

shall perform the Work involved promptly. If Owner or

Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an

adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or

both, and the parties are unable to agree on entitlement to

or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment

, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph

10.05.

9.05 Rejecting Defective Work

A. Engineer will have authority to reject Work

which Engineer believes to be defective, or that Engineer

believes will not produce a completed Project that

conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice

the integrity of the design concept of the completed

Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the

Contract Documents. Engineer will also have authority to

require special inspection or testing of the Work as

provided in Paragraph 13.04, whether or not the Work is

fabricated, installed, or completed.



00700 - 28

9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments

A. In connection with Engineer’s authority, and

limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see

Paragraph 6.17.

B. In connection with Engineer’s authority, and

limitations thereof, as to design calculations and design

drawings submitted in response to a delegation of

professional design services, if any, see Paragraph 6.21.

C. In connection with Engineer’s authority as to

Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12.

D. In connection with Engineer’s authority as to

Applications for Payment, see Article 14.

9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work

A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities

and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by

Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the

Engineer’s preliminary determinations on such matters

before rendering a written decision thereon (by

recommendation of an Application for Payment or

otherwise). Engineer’s written decision thereon will be

final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to

reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data)

upon Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of

Paragraph 10.05.

9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract

Documents and Acceptability of Work

A. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the

requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the

acceptability of the Work thereunder. All matters in

question and other matters between Owner and Contractor

arising prior to the date final payment is due relating to

the acceptability of the Work, and the interpretation of the

requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the

performance of the Work, will be referred initially to

Engineer in writing within 30 days of the event giving rise

to the question

B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness,

render a written decision on the issue referred. If Owner

or Contractor believe that any such decision entitles them

to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times

or both, a Claim may be made under Paragraph 10.05.

The date of Engineer’s decision shall be the date of the

event giving rise to the issues referenced for the purposes

of Paragraph 10.05.B.

C. Engineer’s written decision on the issue

referred will be final and binding on Owner and

Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05.

D. When functioning as interpreter and judge

under this Paragraph 9.08, Engineer will not show

partiality to Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in

connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in

good faith in such capacity.

9.09 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and

Responsibilities

A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility

under this Article 9 or under any other provision of the

Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer

in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such

authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or

performance of any authority or responsibility by

Engineer shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in

contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to

Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other

individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or

agent of any of them.

B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or

have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s

means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of

construction, or the safety precautions and programs

incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to

comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the

performance of the Work. Engineer will not be respon-

sible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in


C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts

or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any

Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing

any of the Work.

D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for

Payment and accompanying documentation and all

maintenance and operating instructions, schedules,

guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and

approvals, and other documentation required to be

delivered by Paragraph 14.07.A will only be to determine

generally that their content complies with the require-

ments of, and in the case of certificates of inspections,

tests, and approvals that the results certified indicate

compliance with the Contract Documents.

E. The limitations upon authority and responsi-

bility set forth in this Paragraph 9.09 shall also apply to,

the Resident Project Representative, if any, and assistants,

if any.

ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS

10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work

A. Without invalidating the Contract and without

notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time

to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the

Work by a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive.

Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall



00700 - 29

promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be

performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract

Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided).

B. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree

on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any, of an

adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or

both, that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change

Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in

Paragraph 10.05.

10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work

A.Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase

in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract

Times with respect to any work performed that is not

required by the Contract Documents as amended,

modified, or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04,

except in the case of an emergency as provided in

Paragraph 6.16 or in the case of uncovering Work as

provided in Paragraph 13.04.B.

10.03 Execution of Change Orders

A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropri-

ate Change Orders recommended by Engineer covering:

1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by

Owner pursuant to Paragraph 10.01.A, (ii) required

because of acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph

13.08.A or Owner’s correction of defective Work under

Paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties;

2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract

Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any

undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually

performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive;

and

3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract

Times which embody the substance of any written

decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to Paragraph

10.05; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change

Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in

accordance with the provisions of the Contract

Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but

during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the

Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule as provided in

Paragraph 6.18.A.

10.04 Notification to Surety

A. If notice of any change affecting the general

scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract

Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price

or Contract Times) is required by the provisions of any

bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice

will be Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each

applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of

any such change.

10.05 Claims

A. Engineer’s Decision Required: All Claims,

except those waived pursuant to Paragraph 14.09, shall be

referred to the Engineer for decision. A decision by

Engineer shall be required as a condition precedent to any

exercise by Owner or Contractor of any rights or remedies

either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents

or by Laws and Regulations in respect of such Claims.

B. Notice: Written notice stating the general

nature of each Claim, shall be delivered by the claimant to

Engineer and the other party to the Contract promptly (but

in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event

giving rise thereto. The responsibility to substantiate a

Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. Notice

of the amount or extent of the Claim, with supporting data

shall be delivered to the Engineer and the other party to

the Contract within 60 days after the start of such event

(unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to

submit additional or more accurate data in support of such

Claim). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall

be prepared in accordance with the provisions of

Paragraph 12.01.B. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract

Time shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions

of Paragraph 12.02.B. Each Claim shall be accompanied

by claimant's written statement that the adjustment

claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant

believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The

opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and

the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the claimant’s

last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time).

C. Engineer’s Action: Engineer will review each

Claim and, within 30 days after receipt of the last

submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the

opposing party, if any, take one of the following actions

in writing:

1. deny the Claim in whole or in part,

2. approve the Claim, or

3. notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to

resolve the Claim if, in the Engineer’s sole discretion, it

would be inappropriate for the Engineer to do so. For

purposes of further resolution of the Claim, such notice

shall be deemed a denial.

D. In the event that Engineer does not take action

on a Claim within said 30 days, the Claim shall be

deemed denied.

E. Engineer’s written action under Paragraph

10.05.C or denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or

10.05.D will be final and binding upon Owner and

Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor invoke the

dispute resolution procedure set forth in Article 16 within

30 days of such action or denial.



00700 - 30

F. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price

or Contract Times will be valid if not submitted in

accordance with this Paragraph 10.05.

ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES;

UNIT PRICE WORK

11.01 Cost of the Work

A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work

means the sum of all costs, except those excluded in

Paragraph 11.01.B, necessarily incurred and paid by

Contractor in the proper performance of the Work. When

the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or

when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is

determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to

be reimbursed to Contractor will be only those additional

or incremental costs required because of the change in the

Work or because of the event giving rise to the Claim.

Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by

Owner, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than

those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include

only the following items, and shall not include any of the

costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01.B.

1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct

employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work

under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by

Owner and Contractor. Such employees shall include,

without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other

personnel employed full time at the Site. Payroll costs for

employees not employed full time on the Work shall be

apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work.

Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries

and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall

include social security contributions, unemployment,

excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health

and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and

holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of

performing Work outside of regular working hours, on

Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in

the above to the extent authorized by Owner.

2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished

and incorporated in the Work, including costs of

transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field

services required in connection therewith. All cash

discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner

deposits funds with Contractor with which to make pay-

ments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to

Owner. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and

returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall

accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so

that they may be obtained.

3. Payments made by Contractor to

Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If

required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive

bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and

Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will

then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids,

if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that

the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the

Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work

and fee shall be determined in the same manner as

Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this

Paragraph 11.01.

4. Costs of special consultants (including but not

limited to Engineers, architects, testing laboratories,

surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for

services specifically related to the Work.

5. Supplemental costs including the following:

a. The proportion of necessary transportation,

travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor’s

employees incurred in discharge of duties

connected with the Work.

b. Cost, including transportation and mainte-

nance, of all materials, supplies, equipment,

machinery, appliances, office, and temporary

facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by

the workers, which are consumed in the perfor-

mance of the Work, and cost, less market value,

of such items used but not consumed which

remain the property of Contractor.

c. Rentals of all construction equipment and

machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented

from Contractor or others in accordance with

rental agreements approved by Owner with the

advice of Engineer, and the costs of

transportation, loading, unloading, assembly,

dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs

shall be in accordance with the terms of said

rental agreements. The rental of any such equip-

ment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the

use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work.

d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes

related to the Work, and for which Contractor is

liable, imposed by Laws and Regulations.

e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence

of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone

directly or indirectly employed by any of them or

for whose acts any of them may be liable, and

royalty payments and fees for permits and

licenses.

f. Losses and damages (and related expenses)

caused by damage to the Work, not compensated

by insurance or otherwise, sustained by

Contractor in connection with the performance of

the Work (except losses and damages within the

deductible amounts of property insurance

established in accordance with Paragraph

5.06.D), provided such losses and damages have



00700 - 31

resulted from causes other than the negligence of

Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone

directly or indirectly employed by any of them or

for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such

losses shall include settlements made with the

written consent and approval of Owner. No such

losses, damages, and expenses shall be included

in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of

determining Contractor’s fee.

g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary

facilities at the Site.

h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long

distance telephone calls, telephone service at the

Site, expresses, and similar petty cash items in

connection with the Work.

i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and

insurance Contractor is required by the Contract

Documents to purchase and maintain.

B. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work

shall not include any of the following items:

1. Payroll costs and other compensation of

Contractor’s officers, executives, principals (of

partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers,

safety managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attor-

neys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting

agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other

personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or

in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general

administration of the Work and not specifically included

in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred

to in Paragraph 11.01.A.1 or specifically covered by

Paragraph 11.01.A.4, all of which are to be considered

administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee.

2. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch

offices other than Contractor’s office at the Site.

3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses,

including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for

the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent

payments.

4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any

Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed

by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be

liable, including but not limited to, the correction of

defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment

wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to

property.

5. Other overhead or general expense costs of

any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and

expressly included in Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B.

C. Contractor’s Fee: When all the Work is

performed on the basis of cost-plus, Contractor’s fee shall

be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the

value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a

Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined

on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee shall be

determined as set forth in Paragraph 12.01.C.

D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the

Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to

Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B, Contractor will establish

and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally

accepted accounting practices and submit in a form

acceptable to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown

together with supporting data.

11.02 Allowances

A. It is understood that Contractor has included

in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the

Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered

to be performed for such sums and by such persons or

entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.

B. Cash Allowances

1. Contractor agrees that:

a. the cash allowances include the cost to

Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts)

of materials and equipment required by the

allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all

applicable taxes; and

b. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling

on the Site, labor, installation , overhead, profit,

and other expenses contemplated for the cash

allowances have been included in the Contract

Price and not in the allowances, and no demand

for additional payment on account of any of the

foregoing will be valid.

C. Contingency Allowance

1. Contractor agrees that a contingency

allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover

unanticipated costs.

D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change

Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to

reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work

covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be

correspondingly adjusted.

11.03 Unit Price Work

A. Where the Contract Documents provide that

all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially

the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit

Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price

for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work

times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in

the Agreement.



00700 - 32

B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit

Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the

purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial

Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities

and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by

Contractor will be made by Engineer subject to the

provisions of Paragraph 9.07.

C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an

amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover

Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately

identified item.

D. Owner or Contractor may make a Claim for

an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with

Paragraph 10.05 if:

1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work

performed by Contractor differs materially and signifi-

cantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated

in the Agreement; and

2. there is no corresponding adjustment with

respect any other item of Work; and

3. Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled

to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having

incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner

is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties

are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase

or decrease.

ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE;

CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES

12.01 Change of Contract Price

A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a

Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the

Contract Price shall be based on written notice submitted

by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the

other party to the Contract in accordance with the


B. The value of any Work covered by a Change

Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract

Price will be determined as follows:

1. where the Work involved is covered by unit

prices contained in the Contract Documents, by applica-

tion of such unit prices to the quantities of the items

involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03); or

2. where the Work involved is not covered by

unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a

mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an

allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in

accordance with Paragraph 12.01.C.2); or

3. where the Work involved is not covered by

unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and

agreement to a lump sum is not reached under Paragraph

12.01.B.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work

(determined as provided in Paragraph 11.01) plus a

Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as

provided in Paragraph 12.01.C).

C. Contractor’s Fee: The Contractor’s fee for

overhead and profit shall be determined as follows:

1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or

2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee

based on the following percentages of the various portions

of the Cost of the Work:

a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1

and 11.01.A.2, the Contractor’s fee shall be 15

percent;

b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 11.01.A.3,

the Contractor’s fee shall be five percent;

c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on

the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no

fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraph

12.01.C.2.a is that the Subcontractor who

actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will

be paid a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred

by such Subcontractor under Paragraphs

11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier

Subcontractor and Contractor will each be paid a

fee of five percent of the amount paid to the next

lower tier Subcontractor;

d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs

itemized under Paragraphs 11.01.A.4, 11.01.A.5,

and 11.01.B;

e. the amount of credit to be allowed by

Contractor to Owner for any change which

results in a net decrease in cost will be the

amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a

deduction in Contractor’s fee by an amount equal

to five percent of such net decrease; and

f. when both additions and credits are involved in

any one change, the adjustment in Contractor’s

fee shall be computed on the basis of the net

change in accordance with Paragraphs

12.01.C.2.a through 12.01.C.2.e, inclusive.



00700 - 33

12.02 Change of Contract Times

A. The Contract Times may only be changed by

a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the

Contract Times shall be based on written notice submitted

by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the

other party to the Contract in accordance with the


B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times

covered by a Change Order or any Claim for an

adjustment in the Contract Times will be determined in

accordance with the provisions of this Article 12.

12.03 Delays

A. Where Contractor is prevented from

completing any part of the Work within the Contract

Times due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the

Contract Times will be extended in an amount equal to

the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is made therefor

as provided in Paragraph 12.02.A. Delays beyond the

control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to,

acts or neglect by Owner, acts or neglect of utility owners

or other contractors performing other work as contemplat-

ed by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal

weather conditions, or acts of God.

B. If Owner, Engineer, or other contractors or

utility owners performing other work for Owner as

contemplated by Article 7, or anyone for whom Owner is

responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the

performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor

shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract

Price or the Contract Times , or both. Contractor’s

entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is

conditioned on such adjustment being essential to

Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the

Contract Times.

C If Contractor is delayed in the performance or

progress of the Work by fire, flood, epidemic, abnormal

weather conditions, acts of God, acts or failures to act of

utility owners not under the control of Owner, or other

causes not the fault of and beyond control of Owner and

Contractor, then Contractor shall be entitled to an

equitable adjustment in Contract Times, if such

adjustment is essential to Contractor’s ability to complete

the Work within the Contract Times. Such an adjustment

shall be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the

delays described in this Paragraph 12.03.C.

D. Owner, Engineer and the Related Entities of

each of them shall not be liable to Contractor for any

claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not

limited to all fees and charges of Engineers, architects,


arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by

Contractor on or in connection with any other project or

anticipated project.

E. Contractor shall not be entitled to an

adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays

within the control of Contractor. Delays attributable to

and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall

be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor.

ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;

CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF

DEFECTIVE WORK

13.01 Notice of Defects

A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which

Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to

Contractor. All defective Work may be rejected,

corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13.

13.02 Access to Work

A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other

representatives and personnel of Owner, independent

testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with

jurisdictional interests will have access to the Site and the

Work at reasonable times for their observation,

inspecting, and testing. Contractor shall provide them

proper and safe conditions for such access and advise

them of Contractor’s Site safety procedures and programs

so that they may comply therewith as applicable.

13.03 Tests and Inspections

A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice

of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests,

or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and

testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests.

B. Owner shall employ and pay for the services

of an independent testing laboratory to perform all

inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract

Documents except:

1. for inspections, tests, or approvals covered by

Paragraphs 13.03.C and 13.03.D below;

2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or

inspections conducted pursuant to Paragraph 13.04.B

shall be paid as provided in said Paragraph 13.04.C; and

3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Con-

tract Documents.

C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body

having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof)

specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an

employee or other representative of such public body,

Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging

and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all

costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the

required certificates of inspection or approval.



00700 - 34

D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging

and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with

any inspections, tests, or approvals required for Owner’s

and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to

be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials,

mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to

Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the

Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be

performed by organizations acceptable to Owner and

Engineer.

E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to

be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor

without written concurrence of Engineer, it must, if

requested by Engineer, be uncovered for observation.

F. Uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph

13.03.E shall be at Contractor’s expense unless Contractor

has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention

to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with

reasonable promptness in response to such notice.

13.04 Uncovering Work

A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written

request of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be

uncovered for Engineer’s observation and replaced at

Contractor’s expense.

B. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable

that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected

or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer’s request,

shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for

observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may

require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing

all necessary labor, material, and equipment.

C. If it is found that the uncovered Work is

defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses,

and damages (including but not limited to all fees and

charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other

professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute

resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such

uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and

testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction

(including but not limited to all costs of repair or

replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be

entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If

the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof,

Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in

Paragraph 10.05.

D. If, the uncovered Work is not found to be

defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the

Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or

both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure,

observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and

reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the

amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a Claim

therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

13.05 Owner May Stop the Work

A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to

supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or

equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way

that the completed Work will conform to the Contract

Documents, Owner may order Contractor to stop the

Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such

order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner

to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part

of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of

Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other

individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or

agent of any of them.

13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work

A. Promptly after receipt of notice, Contractor

shall correct all defective Work, whether or not

fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has

been rejected by Engineer, remove it from the Project and

replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall

pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but




or relating to such correction or removal (including but

not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of

others).

B. When correcting defective Work under the

terms of this Paragraph 13.06 or Paragraph 13.07,

Contractor shall take no action that would void or

otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee,

if any, on said Work.

13.07 Correction Period

A. If within one year after the date of Substantial

Completion (or such longer period of time as may be

prescribed by the terms of any applicable special

guarantee required by the Contract Documents) or by any

specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work

is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to

the land or areas made available for Contractor’s use by

Owner or permitted by Laws and Regulations as

contemplated in Paragraph 6.11.A is found to be

defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to

Owner and in accordance with Owner’s written

instructions:

1. repair such defective land or areas; or

2. correct such defective Work; or

3. if the defective Work has been rejected by

Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it with

Work that is not defective, and



00700 - 35

4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and

replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others

or other land or areas resulting therefrom.

B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with

the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or in an

emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss

or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected

or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and

replaced. All claims, costs, losses, and damages




costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair

or such removal and replacement (including but not

limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of

others) will be paid by Contractor.

C. In special circumstances where a particular

item of equipment is placed in continuous service before

Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction

period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if

so provided in the Specifications .

D. Where defective Work (and damage to other

Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed

and replaced under this Paragraph 13.07, the correction

period hereunder with respect to such Work will be

extended for an additional period of one year after such

correction or removal and replacement has been

satisfactorily completed.

E. Contractor’s obligations under this Paragraph

13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty.

The provisions of this Paragraph 13.07 shall not be

construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions

of any applicable statute of limitation or repose.

13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work

A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal

and replacement of defective Work, Owner (and, prior to

Engineer’s recommendation of final payment, Engineer)

prefers to accept it, Owner may do so. Contractor shall

pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but



arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to

Owner’s evaluation of and determination to accept such

defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as

to reasonableness) and the diminished value of the Work

to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor pursuant to

this sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to

Engineer’s recommendation of final payment, a Change

Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions

in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and

Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the

Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so

accepted. If the parties are unable to agree as to the

amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as

provided in Paragraph 10.05. If the acceptance occurs

after such recommendation, an appropriate amount will be

paid by Contractor to Owner.

13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work

A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time

after written notice from Engineer to correct defective

Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required

by Engineer in accordance with Paragraph 13.06.A, or if

Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with

the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply

with any other provision of the Contract Documents,

Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contractor,

correct or remedy any such deficiency.

B. In exercising the rights and remedies under

this Paragraph 13.09, Owner shall proceed expeditiously.

In connection with such corrective or remedial action,

Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the

Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and

suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, take posses-

sion of Contractor’s tools, appliances, construction

equipment and machinery at the Site, and incorporate in

the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or

for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored

elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s

representatives, agents and employees, Owner’s other

contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants

access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights

and remedies under this Paragraph.

C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages




costs) incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the

rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09 will be

charged against Contractor, and a Change Order will be

issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the

Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner

shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract

Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of

the adjustment, Owner may make a Claim therefor as

provided in Paragraph 10.05. Such claims, costs, losses

and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of

repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or

damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of

Contractor’s defective Work.

D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension

of the Contract Times because of any delay in the

performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by

Owner of Owner’s rights and remedies under this

Paragraph 13.09.



00700 - 36

ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND

COMPLETION

14.01 Schedule of Values

A. The Schedule of Values established as provid-

ed in Paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for progress

payments and will be incorporated into a form of Applica-

tion for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress

payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on

the number of units completed.

14.02 Progress Payments

A. Applications for Payments

1. At least 20 days before the date established in

the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more

often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to

Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out

and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as

of the date of the Application and accompanied by such

supporting documentation as is required by the Contract

Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of

materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but

delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another

location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment

shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or

other documentation warranting that Owner has received

the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens

and evidence that the materials and equipment are

covered by appropriate property insurance or other

arrangements to protect Owner’s interest therein, all of

which must be satisfactory to Owner.

2. Beginning with the second Application for

Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of

Contractor stating that all previous progress payments

received on account of the Work have been applied on

account to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations

associated with prior Applications for Payment.

3. The amount of retainage with respect to

progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement.

B. Review of Applications

1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of

each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a

recommendation of payment and present the Application

to Owner or return the Application to Contractor

indicating in writing Engineer’s reasons for refusing to

recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may

make the necessary corrections and resubmit the

Application.

2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment

requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a

representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s

observations on the Site of the executed Work as an

experienced and qualified design professional and on

Engineer's review of the Application for Payment and the

accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of

Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief:

a. the Work has progressed to the point indicat-

ed;

b. the quality of the Work is generally in accor-

dance with the Contract Documents (subject to

an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole

prior to or upon Substantial Completion, to the

results of any subsequent tests called for in the

Contract Documents, to a final determination of

quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work

under Paragraph 9.07, and to any other

qualifications stated in the recommendation); and

c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being

entitled to such payment appear to have been

fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility

to observe the Work.

3. By recommending any such payment Engineer

will not thereby be deemed to have represented that:

a. inspections made to check the quality or the

quantity of the Work as it has been performed

have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect

of the Work in progress, or involved detailed

inspections of the Work beyond the responsi-

bilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the

Contract Documents; or

b. that there may not be other matters or issues

between the parties that might entitle Contractor

to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle

Owner to withhold payment to Contractor.

4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s

Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor

Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including

final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer:

a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or

b. for the means, methods, techniques,

sequences, or procedures of construction, or the

safety precautions and programs incident thereto,

or

c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws

and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s

performance of the Work, or

d. to make any examination to ascertain how or

for what purposes Contractor has used the

moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or



00700 - 37

e. to determine that title to any of the Work,

materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free

and clear of any Liens.

5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole

or any part of any payment if, in Engineer’s opinion, it

would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner

stated in Paragraph 14.02.B.2. Engineer may also refuse

to recommend any such payment or, because of subse-

quently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent

inspections or tests, revise or revoke any such payment

recommendation previously made, to such extent as may

be necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from

loss because:

a. the Work is defective, or completed Work has

been damaged, requiring correction or replace-

ment;

b. the Contract Price has been reduced by

Change Orders;

c. Owner has been required to correct defective

Work or complete Work in accordance with

Paragraph 13.09; or

d. Engineer has actual knowledge of the

occurrence of any of the events enumerated in

Paragraph 15.02.A.

C. Payment Becomes Due

1. Ten days after presentation of the Application

for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s recommendation,

the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions

of Paragraph 14.02.D) become due, and when due will be

paid by Owner to Contractor.

D. Reduction in Payment

1. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full

amount recommended by Engineer because:

a. claims have been made against Owner on

account of Contractor’s performance or furnish-

ing of the Work;

b. Liens have been filed in connection with the

Work, except where Contractor has delivered a

specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the

satisfaction and discharge of such Liens;

c. there are other items entitling Owner to a

set-off against the amount recommended; or

d. Owner has actual knowledge of the occurrence

of any of the events enumerated in Paragraphs

14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or Paragraph

15.02.A.

2. If Owner refuses to make payment of the full

amount recommended by Engineer, Owner will give

Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to

Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and promptly

pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of

the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay

Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment

thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when

Contractor corrects to Owner’s satisfaction the reasons for

such action.

3. If it is subsequently determined that Owner’s

refusal of payment was not justified, the amount

wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as

determined by Paragraph 14.02.C.1.

14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title

A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title

to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any

Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the

Project or not, will pass to Owner no later than the time of

payment free and clear of all Liens.

14.04 Substantial Completion

A. When Contractor considers the entire Work

ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner

and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is

substantially complete (except for items specifically listed

by Contractor as incomplete) and request that Engineer

issue a certificate of Substantial Completion.

B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, ,

Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection

of the Work to determine the status of completion. If

Engineer does not consider the Work substantially

complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing

giving the reasons therefor.

C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially

complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a tentative

certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the

date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to

the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or

corrected before final payment. Owner shall have seven

days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which

to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions

of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such

objections, Engineer concludes that the Work is not

substantially complete, Engineer will within 14 days after

submission of the tentative certificate to Owner notify

Contractor in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after

consideration of Owner’s objections, Engineer considers

the Work substantially complete, Engineer will within

said 14 days execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor

a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a

revised tentative list of items to be completed or correct-

ed) reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate

as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any

objections from Owner.



00700 - 38

D. At the time of delivery of the tentative

certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer will

deliver to Owner and Contractor a written recommen-

dation as to division of responsibilities pending final

payment between Owner and Contractor with respect to

security, operation, safety, and protection of the Work,

maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties and

guarantees. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise

in writing and so inform Engineer in writing prior to

Engineer’s issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial

Completion, Engineer’s aforesaid recommendation will

be binding on Owner and Contractor until final payment.

E. Owner shall have the right to exclude

Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial

Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable

access to complete or correct items on the tentative list.

14.05 Partial Utilization

A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the

Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially

completed part of the Work which has specifically been

identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner,

Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately

functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used

by Owner for its intended purpose without significant

interference with Contractor’s performance of the

remainder of the Work, subject to the following condi-

tions.

1. Owner at any time may request Contractor in

writing to permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of

the Work which Owner believes to be ready for its

intended use and substantially complete. If and when

Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is

substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner

and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially

complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of

Substantial Completion for that part of the Work.

2. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and

Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such

part of the Work ready for its intended use and substan-

tially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate

of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work.

3. Within a reasonable time after either such

request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an

inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status

of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of

the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will

notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons

therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be

substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 14.04

will apply with respect to certification of Substantial

Completion of that part of the Work and the division of

responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto.

4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of

part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the

requirements of Paragraph 5.10 regarding property

insurance.

14.06 Final Inspection

A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the

entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete,

Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with

Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in

writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals

that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall

immediately take such measures as are necessary to

complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.

14.07 Final Payment

A. Application for Payment

1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of

Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections

identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in

accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance

and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds,

certificates or other evidence of insurance certificates of

inspection, marked-up record documents (as provided in

Paragraph 6.12), and other documents, Contractor may

make application for final payment following the

procedure for progress payments.

2. The final Application for Payment shall be

accompanied (except as previously delivered) by:

a. all documentation called for in the Contract

Documents, including but not limited to the

evidence of insurance required by Paragraph

5.04.B.7;

b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment;

c. a list of all Claims against Owner that

Contractor believes are unsettled; and

d. complete and legally effective releases or

waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights

arising out of or Liens filed in connection with

the Work.

3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens

specified in Paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved by

Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full

and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and

receipts include all labor, services, material, and

equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (ii) all

payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other

indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner

or Owner's property might in any way be responsible have

been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or

Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full,

Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral



00700 - 39

satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any

Lien.

B. Engineer’s Review of Application and

Acceptance

1. If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of

the Work during construction and final inspection, and

Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment

and accompanying documentation as required by the

Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work

has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations

under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled,

Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final

Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s

recommendation of payment and present the Application

for Payment to Owner for payment. At the same time

Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and

Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the

provisions of Paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, Engineer will

return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicat-

ing in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final

payment, in which case Contractor shall make the

necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for

Payment.

C. Payment Becomes Due

1. Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of

the Application for Payment and accompanying docu-

mentation, the amount recommended by Engineer, less

any sum Owner is entitled to set off against Engineer’s

recommendation, including but not limited to liquidated

damages, will become due and , will be paid by Owner to

Contractor.

14.08 Final Completion Delayed

A. If, through no fault of Contractor, final

completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if

Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of

Contractor’s final Application for Payment (for Work

fully completed and accepted) and recommendation of

Engineer, and without terminating the Contract, make

payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work

fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to

be held by Owner for Work not fully completed or

corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the

Agreement, and if bonds have been furnished as required

in Paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the surety to the

payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work

fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by

Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such

payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms

and conditions governing final payment, except that it

shall not constitute a waiver of Claims.

14.09 Waiver of Claims

A. The making and acceptance of final payment

will constitute:

1. a waiver of all Claims by Owner against

Contractor, except Claims arising from unsettled Liens,

from defective Work appearing after final inspection

pursuant to Paragraph 14.06, from failure to comply with

the Contract Documents or the terms of any special

guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor’s

continuing obligations under the Contract Documents;

and

2. a waiver of all Claims by Contractor against

Owner other than those previously made in accordance

with the requirements herein and expressly acknowledged

by Owner in writing as still unsettled.

ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND

TERMINATION

15.01 Owner May Suspend Work

A. At any time and without cause, Owner may

suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of

not more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to

Contractor and Engineer which will fix the date on which

Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work

on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be granted an adjust-

ment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract

Times, or both, directly attributable to any such

suspension if Contractor makes a Claim therefor as


15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause

A. The occurrence of any one or more of the

following events will justify termination for cause:

1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the

Work in accordance with the Contract Documents

(including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient

skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or

failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule established

under Paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time

pursuant to Paragraph 6.04);

2. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations

of any public body having jurisdiction;

3. Contractor’s disregard of the authority of

Engineer; or

4. Contractor’s violation in any substantial way

of any provisions of the Contract Documents.

B. If one or more of the events identified in

Paragraph 15.02.A occur, Owner may, after giving

Contractor (and surety ) seven days written notice of its

intent to terminate the services of Contractor:



00700 - 40

1. exclude Contractor from the Site, and take

possession of the Work and of all Contractor’s tools,

appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the

Site, and use the same to the full extent they could be used

by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass

or conversion),

2. incorporate in the Work all materials and

equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid

Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and

3. complete the Work as Owner may deem

expedient.

C. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph

15.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any

further payment until the Work is completed. If the

unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims,

costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all

fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and

other professionals and all court or arbitration or other

dispute resolution costs) sustained by Owner arising out

of or relating to completing the Work, such excess will be

paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses, and

damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall

pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses,

and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by

Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when so

approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order.

When exercising any rights or remedies under this

Paragraph Owner shall not be required to obtain the

lowest price for the Work performed.

D. Notwithstanding Paragraphs 15.02.B and

15.02.C, Contractor’s services will not be terminated if

Contractor begins within seven days of receipt of notice

of intent to terminate to correct its failure to perform and

proceeds diligently to cure such failure within no more

than 30 days of receipt of said notice.

E. Where Contractor’s services have been so

terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any

rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then

existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or

payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not

release Contractor from liability.

F. If and to the extent that Contractor has

provided a performance bond under the provisions of

Paragraph 5.01.A, the termination procedures of that bond

shall supersede the provisions of Paragraphs 15.02.B, and

15.02.C.

15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience

A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor

and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without

prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner,

terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be

paid for (without duplication of any items):

1. completed and acceptable Work executed in

accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the

effective date of termination, including fair and

reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work;

2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date

of termination in performing services and furnishing

labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract

Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus

fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such

expenses;

3. all claims, costs, losses, and damages




costs) incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with

Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others; and

4. reasonable expenses directly attributable to

termination.

B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss

of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss

arising out of or resulting from such termination.

15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate

A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (i)

the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days

by Owner or under an order of court or other public

authority, or (ii) Engineer fails to act on any Application

for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (iii)

Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally

determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven

days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided

Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or

failure within that time, terminate the Contract and

recover from Owner payment on the same terms as


B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and

without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if

Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment

within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed

for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined

to be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice

to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is

made of all such amounts due Contractor, including

interest thereon. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.04

are not intended to preclude Contractor from making a

Claim under Paragraph 10.05 for an adjustment in

Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for

expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s

stopping the Work as permitted by this Paragraph.



00700 - 41

ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION

16.01 Methods and Procedures

A. Either Owner or Contractor may request

mediation of any Claim submitted to Engineer for a

decision under Paragraph 10.05 before such decision

becomes final and binding. The mediation will be

governed by the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of

the American Arbitration Association in effect as of the

Effective Date of the Agreement. The request for

mediation shall be submitted in writing to the American

Arbitration Association and the other party to the

Contract. Timely submission of the request shall stay the

effect of Paragraph 10.05.E.

B. Owner and Contractor shall participate in the

mediation process in good faith. The process shall be

concluded within 60 days of filing of the request. The date

of termination of the mediation shall be determined by

application of the mediation rules referenced above.

C. If the Claim is not resolved by mediation,

Engineer’s action under Paragraph 10.05.C or a denial

pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D shall become

final and binding 30 days after termination of the

mediation unless, within that time period, Owner or

Contractor:

1. elects in writing to invoke any dispute

resolution process provided for in the Supplementary

Conditions, or

2. agrees with the other party to submit the Claim

to another dispute resolution process, or

3. gives written notice to the other party of their

intent to submit the Claim to a court of competent

jurisdiction.

ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS

17.01 Giving Notice

A. Whenever any provision of the Contract

Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be

deemed to have been validly given if:

1. delivered in person to the individual or to a

member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for

whom it is intended, or

2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified

mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known

to the giver of the notice.

17.02 Computation of Times

A. When any period of time is referred to in the

Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to

exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If

the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or

Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the

applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the

computation.

17.03 Cumulative Remedies

A. The duties and obligations imposed by these

General Conditions and the rights and remedies available

hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are

not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any

rights and remedies available to any or all of them which

are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regula-

tions, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other

provisions of the Contract Documents. The provisions of

this Paragraph will be as effective as if repeated

specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with

each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to

which they apply.

17.04 Survival of Obligations

A. All representations, indemnifications, warran-

ties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in

accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all

continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Docu-

ments, will survive final payment, completion, and

acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of

the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor.

17.05 Controlling Law

A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of

the state in which the Project is located.

17.06 Headings

A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted

for convenience only and do not constitute parts

of these General Conditions



00700 - 42

.

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

END OF SECTION

00800-1

SECTION 00800


TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART I – AMENDMENTS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS

Article

Number Title

1 DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY

2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS

3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE

4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;

REFERENCE POINTS

5 BONDS AND INSURANCE

6 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

7 OTHER WORK

8 OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES

9 ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION

10 COST OF THE WORK; CASH ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK

11 CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES

12 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION; REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF

DEFECTIVE WORK

13 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION

14 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION

15 DISPUTE RESOLUTION

16 MISCELLANEOUS

PART II – STATE GOVERNMENT PROVISIONS

1 STATE OF ARKANSAS PROVISIONS

00800-2


PART I – AMENDMENTS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS

These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of the

Construction Contract (EJCDC Document No. 1910-8, 1996 edition) and other provisions of the Contract

Documents as indicated below. All provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full

force and effect.

ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY

SC-1.01A.12.

In the third line after the word “Agreement,” insert “the Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders.”

SC-1.01A.19.

Delete Paragraph 1.01.A.19 in its entirety and replace with the following:

19. ENGINEER shall mean Brown Engineers, LLC, 17200 Chenal Pkwy. Ste. 300 PMB 324, Little Rock,

AR 72223 or its designated representative.

SC-1.01A.27.

Insert the following in Paragraph 1.01A. as definition number 27. Renumber the remaining definitions to

reflect the change.

27. MODIFICATION – (a) Written Amendment; (b) Change Order; (c) Field Order; (d) Work Change

Directive

SC-1.01A.45.

Insert the following at the beginning of the definition.

“The Work required by the Contract has been completed except for work having a Contract Price of less

than one percent of the then adjusted total contract price, or…”

SC-1.01A.53.

Add the following new definitions after Paragraph 1.01A.52 of the General Conditions:

53. Conditions of the Contract – The combined General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions.

54. Design Engineer – Same as Item 19, Engineer.

55. General Contractor – Same as Item 15, Contractor.

56. Supply Contractor – The individual or entity with whom General Contractor has entered into an

agreement to furnish, or to furnish and install, the new equipment as specified herein.

SC-1.02B.

00800-3

Delete Paragraph 1.02B of the General Conditions and replace with the following:

B. Day

1. A “calendar day” shall be a day of twenty-four hours measured from midnight to the next

midnight, and is any day of the year, no days being exempted.

2. A “working day” shall be a day, not including Saturdays, Sundays or any of the following holidays:

New year’s Day, Presidents’ Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving

Day. And Christmas Day, in which weather or other conditions not under the control of the

CONTRACTOR will permit construction of the principal units of the work for a period of not less

than seven hours between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m.

ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS

SC-2.05A.

Delete Paragraph 2.05A. of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:

A. CONTRACTOR’S Review of Construction Documents: Before undertaking each part of the Work,

CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent

figures therein and all applicable field measurements. CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in writing to

ENGINEER any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy which CONTRACTOR may discover and shall

obtain a written interpretation or clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding with any work affected

thereby. In the event of a conflict in the Drawings, Specifications, or other portions of the Contract

Documents which were not reported prior to the Bidding of the Contract, the CONTRACTOR shall be

deemed to have included the most expensive in his Bid.

SC-2.05C.

Delete Paragraph 2.05C of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:

C. Evidence of Insurance: Before any Work at the site is started, CONTRACTOR shall deliver to

OWNER, with copies to ENGINEER and each additional insured identified in the Supplementary

Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance which OWNER or any additional

insured may reasonable request) which CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and maintain in accordance

with Article 5.

SC-2.07A.

Amend Paragraph 2.07A. by adding the following:

Such acceptance of the contract completion schedule in no way affects the Contract Times.

ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE

SC-3.01A.

Amend Paragraph 3.01A by adding the following:

00800-4

The titles and headings contained in the contract documents and the subject organization are used only to

facilitate reference, and in no way define or limit the scope or intent of any of the provisions of this contract.

SC-3.01C.

Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 3.01C. of the General Conditions which is to read as

follows:

D. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract Documents

shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as though it were included herein,

and is through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then

upon the application of wither party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to

make such insertion.

E. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. The

Contract Documents may be altered only by a Modification.

SC – 3.03A.

Delete 3.03A. in its entirety and replace with the following:

In the event of a conflict in the Drawings, Specifications, or other portions of the Contract Documents which

were not reported prior to the Bidding of the Contract, the CONTRACTOR shall be deemed to have

included the most expensive in his Bid.

ARTICLE 4 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;

REFERENCE POINTS

SC-4.01.

Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 4.01A of the General Conditions which is to read as

follows:

1. If all lands and rights-of-way are not obtained as herein contemplated before construction begins.

CONTRACTOR shall begin the Work upon such land and rights-of-way as OWNER has previously

acquired.

SC-4.02.

Delete Paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:

4.02 Examination of Plans, Specifications and Site of the Work

A. Bidders are advised that the plans, specifications and other documents listed in Paragraph 4.02C.

shall constitute all the information which the OWNER shall furnish. Bidders are required, prior to

submitting any proposal, to review the plans and read the specifications, proposal, contract and bond forms

carefully; to visit the site of the work; to examine carefully local conditions; to inform themselves by their

independent research, tests and investigations of the difficulties to be encountered and judge for themselves

the accessibility of the work and all attending circumstances affecting the cost of doing the work or time

required for its completion; and to obtain all information required to make an intelligent proposal.

00800-5

B. No information given by the OWNER or any official thereof, other than that shown on the plans and

contained in the specifications, proposals, and other contract documents, shall be binding upon the

OWNER. Bidders shall rely exclusively upon their own estimates, investigations, tests and other data which

are necessary for full and complete information upon which the proposal is based. Any bidder, by

submitting his bid, represent and warrants: that he has prepared his bid in accordance with the specifications,

with full knowledge and understanding of the terms and provisions thereof; that he has reviewed, studied

and examined the bid prior to the signing and submission of same; and that he was cognizant of the terms of

his proposal, verified his calculations and found them to correct and agrees to be bound thereby.

SC-4.05A.

Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 4.05A of the General Conditions which is to read as

follows:

B. ENGINEER may check the lines, elevations, reference marks, batter boards, etc., set by

CONTRACTOR, and CONTRACTOR shall correct any errors disclosed by such check. Such a check shall

not be considered as approval of CONTRACTOR’s work and shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of the

responsibility for accurate construction of the entire Work. CONTRACTOR shall furnish personnel to assist

ENGINEER in checking lines and grades.

ARTICLE 5 – BONDS AND INSURANCE

SC-5.02A.

Delete Paragraph 5.02A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:

A. All Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by

CONTRACTOR shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized

in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue Bonds or insurance policies for the limits and

coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements

and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions.

SC-5.03A.

Delete the following from Paragraph 5.03A.:

OWNER shall deliver to CONTRACTOR, with copies to each additional insured identified in the

Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by

CONTRACTOR or any other additional insured) which OWNER is required to purchase and maintain.

Replace with:

Insurance certificates must be submitted and issued with the “Owner” listed as the certificate holder.

Add a new paragraph at the end of Paragraph 5.03A which reads as follows:

B. All policies shall be endorsed to read: “Said policy shall not be cancelled, nonrenewed or materially

changes without thirty (30) days advance written notice begin given to the Owner

Except when the policy is being cancelled for nonpayment of premium in which case ten (10 ) days advance

written notice is required.”

00800-6

SC-5.04B.1.

Add the following at the end of Paragraph 5.04B.1:

The following are to be listed as additional insured on all insurance policies:


Brown Engineers, LLC

SC-5.04.

Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 5.04B.7 of the General Conditions which is to read as

follows:

8. CONTRACTOR may purchase and maintain excess liability insurance in the umbrella form in order to

satisfy the limits of liability required for the insurance to be purchased and maintained in accordance with

Paragraph 5.04. Evidence of such excess liability shall be delivered to OWNER in accordance with

Paragraph 2.05 in the form of a certificate indicating the policy numbers and limits of liability of all

underlying insurance. The umbrella liability insurance shall have a combined single limit of not less than

$5,000,000.

SC-5.05A.

Delete Paragraph 5.05A of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in its place:

A. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain a separate Owner’s Protective Liability policy, issued

to OWNER at the expense of CONTRACTOR, including OWNER and ENGINEER as named insured. This

insurance shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts:

5.05A.1 Bodily Injury $1,000,000 Each Occurrence

5.05.A.2 Property Damage $1,000,000 Each Occurrence

$2,000,000 Annual Aggregate

SC-5.06A.


A. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the site on a

replacement cost basis with a limit not less than 100% of the Project’s replacement value thereof (subject to

such deductible amounts as may be provided in these Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and

Regulations). This limit should include “soft cost,” or expenses relating to the construction project(s) over

and above those costs which would have been incurred if there has been no loss. These soft costs should

include, but not be limited to, interest, additional taxes, advertising/promotional expenses, additional

commissions, loss of rents, architects or engineering fees. This insurance shall:

1. Include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER’s

Consultants and any other persons or entities identified in Paragraph 5.04B.1 of these

Supplementary Conditions, each of whom shall have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an

additional insured.

2. be written on a Builder’s Risk “all risk” or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall

at least include insurance for physical loss and damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false

work, and Work in transit and shall insure against at least the following perils: fire, lightning,

00800-7

extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal,

demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage, and such other

causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplemental Conditions;

3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not

limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects);

4. cover materials and equipment in transit to the Project site, and materials that the CONTRACTOR

has taken possession of whether stored at the Project site;

5. allow for Partial Utilization of the Work by OWNER;

6. include testing and startup; and,

7. Be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the

OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER with thirty (30) days’ written notice to each other

additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued.

The policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained by CONTRACTOR in accordance with

Paragraph 5.06A shall comply with the requirements of Paragraph 5.06C.

SC-5.06B.

Delete Paragraph 5.06B of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:

B. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance or additional

property insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and Regulations which

will include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER’S

Consultants and any other persons or entities identified in Paragraph 5.04B.1 of these Supplementary

Conditions, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or

additional insured.

SC-5.06C.

Amend Paragraph 5.06C by adding the following to the end of the sentence:

and will contain a waiver of subrogation by the insurance company against the OWNER and each additional

insured.

SC-5.06D.

Delete Paragraph 5.06D of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:

D. OWNER shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the

interest of the CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance may be

basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, CONTRACTOR is

fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from or connected with operations under this contract

whether or not said losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of certificates or other evidence of

insurance by the OWNER, ENGINEER, and/or other listed as additional insured in Paragraph 5.04B.1 that

in any respect do not comply with the Contract requirements does not release the CONTRACTOR from

compliance herewith.

SC-5.06E.

Delete Paragraph 5.06E of the General Conditions in its entirety.

SC-5.07.

00800-8

Delete Paragraph 5.07 of the General Conditions in its entirety.

SC-5.08A.

Delete Paragraph 5.08A of the General Conditions in its entirety.

SC-5.08B

Delete Paragraph 5.08B of the General Conditions in its entirety.

SC-5.09A.

Delete Paragraph 5.09A of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in its place:

A. If OWNER has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the insurance

required to be purchased and maintained by CONTRACTOR in accordance with this Article 5 on the

basis of its not complying with the Contract Documents, OWNER will notify CONTRACTOR in writing

thereof within ten days of the date of delivery of such certificates to OWNER in accordance with

Paragraph 2.05. CONTRACTOR will provide such additional information in respect of insurance

provided by CONTRACTOR as OWNER may reasonably request.

ARTICLE 6 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

SC-6.02.

Add the new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.02B of the General Conditions which is to read as

follows:

C. Regular working hours are defined as 8 hours per day, Monday through Friday, excluding

holidays, between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Requests to work other than regular working

hours shall be submitted to ENGINEER not less than 48 hours prior to any proposed weekend work or

scheduled extended work weeks. Occasional unscheduled overtime on weekdays may be permitted

provided two hours’ notice is given to ENGINEER.

D. CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for additional engineering and/or inspection costs

incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours stipulated in Article SC-

6.02.C. At OWNER’s option, overtime costs may either be deducted from the CONTRACTOR’s monthly

payment request or deducted from the CONTRACTOR’s retention prior to release of final payment.

Overtime costs for the OWNER’s personnel shall be based on the individual’s current overtime wage rate.

Overtime costs for personnel employed by the ENGINEER or OWNER’s independent testing laboratory

shall be calculated in accordance with the terms of their respective contracts with the OWNER.

SC-6.03.

Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.03B of the General Conditions.

C. This agreement is subject to the applicable provisions of the Contract Work Hours and Safety

Standards Act, Public Law 87-581, 87th Congress. No Contractor or Subcontractor contracting for any

part of the Work shall require or permit any laborer or mechanic to be employed on the Work in excess of

forty hours in any work week unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less

00800-9

than one and one-half times that person’s basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in

such work week.

D. CONTRACTOR shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever OWNER

shall notify CONTRACTOR in writing that any person on the Work appears to be incompetent,

disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed from the Project and shall not again

be employed on it except with the consent of OWNER.

E. CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors shall, insofar as practicable, give preference in the hiring of

workers for the Project to qualified local residents with first preferences being given to citizens of the

United States who have served in the armed forces of the United States and have been honorably

discharged therefrom or released from active duty therein.

SC-6.05A.


6.05 Substitutes and “Or Equals”

A. Where equipment and products are specified by name, no substitutions or “or-equals” will be

considered or approved unless the term “or-equal” is included in the acceptable manufacturer section of

the Specifications.

1. If substitutions or “or-equals” are specifically permitted for consideration by the

individual Specifications, they must be submitted and will be reviewed and evaluated in

accordance with the provisions established in General Condition Paragraph 6.05 and in

Division 1 of the Specifications.

SC-6.05C.

Amend Paragraph 6.05C by deleting the third sentence and replacing it with the following:

No “or-equals” or substitutes will be ordered, installed or utilized until ENGINEER’s review is complete,

which will be evidenced by either a Change Order or Field Order.

SC-6.06.

Delete Paragraphs 6.06A and 6.06B of the General Conditions in their entirety and insert therefore the

following:

A. CONTRACTOR shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization

(including those who are to furnish the principal items of materials or equipment), whether initially or as a

substitute, against whom OWNER may have reasonable objection. Acceptance of any Subcontractor,

other person or organization by OWNER shall not constitute a waiver of any right of OWNER to reject

defective Work. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, other person or

organization against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection unless called for in the Contract

Documents.

B. Not Used.

SC-6.06G.

00800-10

Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.06G of the General Conditions which is to read as

follows:

H. OWNER or ENGINEER may furnish to any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or

organization, to the extent practicable, information about amounts paid to CONTRACTOR in accordance

with CONTRACTOR’s Applications for Payment on account of the particular Subcontractor’s,

Supplier’s, or other organization’s Work.

SC-6.08A.

Delete Paragraphs 6.08A of the General Conditions in their entirety and insert therefore the following:

A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for

all construction permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees

necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or, if there

are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement.

SC-6.10A.

Add the following language at the end of Paragraph 6.10A of the General Conditions:

The OWNER qualifies as an exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Arkansas. The

CONTRACTOR shall comply with all statutes and ruling of the State Comptroller.

SC-6.16A.

Amend Paragraph 6.16A by revising the last sentence to read:

If ENGINEER determines that the incident giving rise to the emergency action was not the responsibility

of the CONTRACTOR and that a change to the Contract Documents is required because of the action

taken by CONTRACTOR in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order

will be issued.

SC-6.17E.1.

Add a new sentence at the end of Paragraph 6.17.E.1 to read as follows:

Approval of Shop Drawings for equipment requiring Efficiency Guarantee Bonds will be withheld until

the receipt of such Bonds.

SC-6.17E.1.

Delete the last sentence in Paragraph 6.17E.1 and replace with the following:

All resubmittals shall be in strict compliance with the Drawings, Specifications and Contract Documents,

and only the changes permitted from the prior submittal shall be modifications of additional information

addressing specifically the ENGINEER’s previous comments.

SC-6.18A.

00800-11

Amend Paragraph 6.18A of the General Conditions by adding the following at the end of the second

sentence:

CONTRACTOR assumes and bears responsibility for all costs and time delays associated with any

variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents.

SC-6.19D.

Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.19C which is to read as follows:

Manufacturer’s Guaranty/Warranty

The CONTRACTOR shall obtain the following guarantee/warranty from the manufacturer of all

major pieces of equipment furnished and installed on this Project. Such guaranty/warranty shall be for the

benefit of OWNER and shall be furnished in writing by the manufacturer. The CONTRACTOR’s and

manufacturer’s obligations under this provision are in addition to other express or implied warranties

under the Contract Documents and under the law and in no way diminish any other right that the OWNER

may have against the CONTRACTOR or manufacturer for faulty material, equipment or work. The

warranty period shall not be interpreted as a limitation on the time in which the OWNER can enforce such

other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.

The manufacturer warrants and guarantees for a period of one year from the date of Substantial

Completion, or such longer period that may be specified in the Contract Documents, that all materials

equipment furnished shall be free from flaws, defects in material and workmanship and shall be in

conformance with the Contract Documents.

SC-6.20A.2.

Delete Paragraph 6.20A.2 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:

2. IS CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART BY ANY NEGLIGENT ACT OR OMISSION

OF CONTRACTOR, ANY SUBCONTRACTOR, ANY SUPPLIER, OR ANY INDIVIDUAL OR

ENTITY DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY EMPLOYED BY ANY OF THEM TO PERFORM ANY

OF THE WORK OR ANYONE FOR WHOSE ACTS ANY OF THEM MAY BE LIABLE.

REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT CAUSED BY ANY NEGLIGENCE OR OMISSION

OF AN INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY INDEMNIFIED HEREUNDER OR WHETHER LIABILITY

IS IMPOSED UPON SUCH INDEMNIFIED PARTY BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS

REGARDLESS OF THE NEGLIGENCE OF ANY SUCH INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY. If through

the acts of neglect on the part of CONTRACTOR, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor shall

suffer loss or damage on the Work, CONTRACTOR shall settle with such other Contractor or

Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so settle. If

such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against OWNER on account of any

damage alleged to have been sustained, OWNER shall notify CONTRACTOR, who shall

indemnify and save harmless OWNER against any such claims.

Article 8. OWNER’s RESPONSIBILITIES

SC-8.01.

Delete Paragraph 8.01 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace it with the following:

00800-12

8.01 Communications to Contractor

A. OWNER will issue project communications related to the administration of the Construction

Contract through the ENGINEER.

SC-8.02A.

Delete Paragraph 8.02A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace it with the following:

A. In the case of termination of the employment of the ENGINEER, OWNER will notify the

CONTRACTOR of their intent to appoint a different engineer to the Project. CONTRACTOR may voice

any objections with regard to the OWNER’s replacement engineer within a reasonable time set by the

OWNER and OWNER will take these objections (if any) into consideration before appointing the new

engineer.

SC-8.06.


SC-8.09A.

Amend Paragraph 8.09A of the General Conditions by adding the following at the end of the second

sentence:

Any failure or neglect on the part of OWNER or ENGINEER to enforce provisions herein dealing with

supervision, control, inspection, testing or acceptance and approval of the Work shall never operate to

relieve CONTRACTOR from full compliance with the Contract Documents nor render OWNER liable to

CONTRACTOR for money damages, extensions of time or increased compensation of any kind.

SC-8.10.

Delete Paragraph 8.10 in its entirety.

ARTICLE 9 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION

SC-9.01.


9.01 Authority of ENGINEER

A. ENGINEER is the OWNER’s representative during the construction period. However, any

determination made by the ENGINEER is subject to the review and approval of the OWNER and the

OWNER’s determination shall be final.

SC-9.04.


9.04 Clarifications and Interpretations

00800-13

A. ENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations

of the requirements of the Contract Documents as ENGINEER may determine necessary, which shall be

consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents.

SC-9.05.


9.05 Authorized Variations in Work

A. ENGINEER may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract

Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are

compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the

Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the

ENGINEER in writing prior to beginning any Work addressed in a Field Order if the CONTRACOTR

does not agree that the Work involved represents no additional cost and/or time change in the Contract

Documents.

SC-9.08.


9.08 Determination for Unit Price Work

A. ENGINEER will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work

performed by CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER will review with CONTRACTOR the ENGINEER’s

preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by

recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). ENGINEER’s written decision thereon is

subject to the review and approval of the OWNER and the OWNER’s determination shall be final as

provided in 9.01A.

SC-9.09


9.09 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work

A. ENGINEER will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and

judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the

acceptability of the Work, the quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work, the interpretation of the

requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance of the Work, and Claims seeking

changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times will be referred initially to ENGINEER in writing, in

accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05, with a request for a forma decision. ENGINEER’s

formal decision thereon is subject to the review and approval of the OWNER and the OWNER’s

determination shall be final as provided by Paragraph 9.01A.

B. The rendering of a decision by ENGINEER pursuant to this Paragraph 9.09 and the review and

final decision by OWNER thereof, with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter (except any

which have been waived by the acceptance of final payment as provided in Paragraph 14.07) will be a

condition precedent to any exercise by CONTRACOTR of any rights or remedies it may otherwise have

00800-14

under the Contract Documents or by Laws and Regulations in respect to any such claim, dispute or other

matter.

SC-10.05.


10.05 Claims and Disputes

A. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of each Claim, dispute, or other matter shall be

delivered by the claimant to ENGINEER promptly (but in no event later than 7 days) after the start of the

event giving rise thereto. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, dispute, or other matter with

supporting data shall be delivered to ENGINEER within 30 days after the start of such event (unless

ENGINEER allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of

such Claim, dispute, or other matter). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in

accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.01B. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Time shall

be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.02B. Each Claim shall be accompanied by

claimant’s written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant

believes it is entitled as a result of said event.

B. ENGINEER will issue a written recommendation to the Owner in writing within 30 days after

receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any.

C. If ENGINEER does not issue a written recommendation within the time stated in Paragraph

10.05.B, a decision denying the Claim in its entirety shall be deemed to have been issued 31 days after

receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any.

D. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times (or Milestones) will be valid if

not submitted in accordance with this Paragraph 10.05.

ARTICLE 11 – COST OF THE WORK; CASH ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK

SC-11.01A.

Amend Paragraph 11.01A of the General Conditions by striking out the following words in the third

sentence: “those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include only the following items, and shall

not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01B.” and adding the following:

“those paid for the Work included in the Contract Price, shall include only the following items, and

shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01B. CONTRACTOR shall provide certified

payroll records listing personnel classifications and salaries for all individuals involved in additional

Work. Salaries for those not included in the certified payroll will be considered as being compensated

under Paragraph 11.01B.”

SC-11.01A.1.

Amend Paragraph 11.01A.1 of the General Conditions by striking out the following words in the second

sentence: “without limitation superintendents, foreman” and adding the following:

“one foreman (unless agreed upon prior to beginning Work).”

00800-15

Amend Paragraph 11.01A of the General Conditions by striking out the following words in the last

sentence: “Be included in the above” and adding the following:

“not exceed 1.5 times regular pay and shall be included in the above”

SC-11.01B.1.

Amend Paragraph 11.01.B.1 by adding the following to the list of excluded personnel in the first

sentence:

Superintendents

SC-11.01D.

Amend Paragraph 11.01D by modifying the sentence to read as follows:

“…and submit in a form and at intervals acceptable to ENGINEER…”

SC-11.02.

Delete Paragraphs 11.02A and 11.02B of the General Conditions in their entirety.

SC-11.03.


C. The unit price of an item of Unit Price Work shall be subject to reevaluation and adjustment in

accordance with Paragraph 10.05 under the following conditions:

1. If the total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 20 percent or more of the

Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work

performed by the Contractor differs by more than 20 percent from the estimated quantity of such

item indicated in the Agreement; and,

2. If there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and,

3. If CONTRACTOR believes that CONTRACTOR has incurred additional expense as a result

thereof; or if OWNER believes that the quantity variation entitles OWNER to an adjustment in

the unit price, either OWNER or CONTRACTOR may make a claim for an adjustment in the

Contract Price in accordance with Paragraph 11.01 if the parties are unable to agree as to the

effect of any such variation in the quantity of the Unit Price Work.

SC-11.03

Add new paragraph following Paragraph 11.03 of the General Conditions which is to read as follows:

11.04 No Claims for Delays

A. The CONTRACTOR agrees to make no claims for damage for delay in the performance of the

Contract occasioned by any act or omission to act of the OWNER, ENGINEER, or any of the

ENGINEER’s or OWNER’s a gents, and agrees that any such claim shall be fully compensated by an

00800-16

extension of time, as set forth in a Change Order, to complete performance of the Work as provided

herein.

ARTICLE 12 – CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME

SC-12.01A.


A. The Contract Price may only be changes by a Change Order or Written Amendment. Any

claim by CONTRACTOR for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be in writing to the ENGINEER

and will be processed in accordance with Article 10 hereof.

SC-12.01B.2.

Delete Paragraph 12.01B.2 of the General Conditions in its entirety.

SC-12.02A.


A. The Contract Times (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or Written

Amendment which shall be processed in accordance with Article 10 hereof.

ARTICLE 13 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF

DEFECTIVE WORK

13.04 Uncovering Work

A. If any Work in covered contrary to the request of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by

ENGINEER, be uncovered for ENGINEER’s observation and replaced at Contractor’s expense.

B. In circumstances different from 13.04A above, if ENGINEER considers it necessary or

advisable that covered Work be observed by the ENGINEER or inspected or tested by others,

CONTRACTOR at ENGINEER’s request shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for

observation, inspection, or testing as ENGINEER may require, that portion of the Work in question,

furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective,

CONTRACTOR shall pay all Claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and

charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other

dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection,

and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of

repair or replacement of work of others); and OWNER shall be entitles to an appropriate decrease in the

Contract Price.

SC-13.05.

Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 13.05A of the General Conditions to read as follows:

1. If OWNER stops Work under Paragraph 13.05A, CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to no extension of

Contract Time or increase in Contract Price.

00800-17

SC-13.07A.

Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 13.07A of the General Conditions to read as follows:

When early acceptance of a Substantially Completed portion of Work is accomplished in the manner

indicated, the correction period for that portion of the Work shall commence at the time of substantial

completion of that Work.

SC-13.08A.


A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work,

OWNER (and, prior to ENGINEER’s recommendation of final payment, ENGINEER) prefers to accept

it, OWNER may do so. CONTRACTOR shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but

not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court

or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to OWNER’s evaluation of an determination

to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by ENGINEER as to reasonableness) and the

diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by CONTRACTOR pursuant to this

sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to ENGINEER’s recommendation of final payment, a

Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with

respect to the Work, and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price,

reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted.

SC-13.09C.


C. All Claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of

engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professional and all court or arbitration of other dispute

resolution costs) incurred or sustained by OWNER in exercising the rights and remedies under this

Paragraph 13.09 will be charged against CONTRACTOR, and a Change Order will be issued

incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and OWNER

shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages

will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work by others destroyed or

damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of CONTRACTOR’s defective Work.

ARTICLE 14 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION

SC-14.02A.3.

Delete Paragraph 14.02A.3 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:

3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be five percent (5%) of

the total amount of completed Work and properly stored materials on hand. In addition to the amount

retained above, the OWNER may retain additional amounts as set forth elsewhere in the Contract

Documents.

Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 14.02A.3 of the General Conditions which is to read as

follows:

00800-18

4. CONTRACTOR shall furnish evidence that payment received on the basis of materials

and equipment not incorporated and suitably stored has in fact been paid to the respective supplier(s)

within sixty days of payment by OWNER. Failure to provide such evidence of payment may result in the

withdrawal of previous approval(s) and removal of the cost of related materials and equipment from the

next submitted Application of Payment.

SC-14.02C.1.

Amend Paragraph 14.02C.1 of the General Conditions by striking out the word “Ten” and inserting the

word “thirty” in its place, and as so amended, Paragraph 14.02C.1 remains in effect.

Add four new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 14.02C.1 of the General Conditions which are to

read as follows:

2. Should Contractor neglect to pay any undisputed claims made in writing to OWNER

within thirty days after completion of the Work, but continuing unsatisfied for a period of ninety days,

OWNER may pay such claim and deduct the amount thereof from the balance due CONTRACTOR.

OWNER may also, with the written consent of CONTRACTOR, use any monies retained, due, or to

become due under this Contract for the purpose of paying for both labor and materials for the Work, for

which claims have not been filed.

3. Security is provided both by the Payment Bond and the power of OWNER to retain any

monies for its claims, but payment by one shall in no way impair or discharge the liability of the other.

4. Any and all items for work and materials may be paid off by OWNER within a

reasonable time after filing for record in accordance with State and local laws, a notice of such liens

except where the claim on which the lien is filed is being litigated by CONTRACTOR, and in such case

OWNER may pay the amount of any final judgment or decree or any such claim within a reasonable time

after such final judgment or decree shall be rendered.

5. All monies paid by OWNER in settlement of liens as aforesaid, with the costs and

expenses incurred by OWNER in connection therewith, shall be charged to CONTRACTOR, shall bear

interest at the rate of three percentage points above the rediscount rate then charged by the Federal

Reserve Bank, and shall be deducted from the next payment due CONTRACTOR under the terms of this

Contract.

SC-14.02D.1.

Delete Paragraph 14.02D.1. d. Add new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 14.02D.1.C of the

General Conditions which are to read as follows:

d. Owner has been notified of CONTRACTOR’s failure to make payments to

Subcontractors or Suppliers or for labor;

e. CONTRACTOR’s failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required by

GC-6.12;

f. CONTRACTOR’s failure to submit monthly progress schedule updates or

revised schedules as requested by the OWNER or ENGINEER;

g. CONTRACTOR’s failure to provide Project photographs required by

Specifications;

00800-19

h. Unsatisfactory progress of the Work not caused by conditions beyond the

CONTRACTOR’s control;

i. CONTRACTOR’s failure to carry out instructions of the OWNER or his

representative;

j. OWNER has a reasonable doubt that the contract can be completed for the

balance then unpaid;

k. Damage to another contractor;

l. Claim filed by or against CONTRACTOR or reasonable evidence indicating

probable filing of claims;

m. OWNER has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events

enumerated in Paragraphs 14.02B.5.a through 14.02B.5.l or Paragraph 15.02A.

SC-14.02D.3.

Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 14.02D.3 of the General Conditions which is

to read as follows:

4. OWNER may permanently withhold payment from Contract Price for

a. liquidated damages incurred by CONTRACTOR, or

b. Compensation for ENGINEER for overtime charges of Residential Project

Representative, third and subsequent reviews of submittals, review of substitutions, reinspection

fees, inspections or designs related to correction of defective Work, or other Services identified as

requiring payment by the CONTRACTOR. Compensation will be based on the following rates:

Position Hourly Rate

Principal in Charge/Project Manager $227.00

Project Engineer $190.00

Resident Project Representative $125.00

Design Engineer $125.00

Technician $120.00

Clerk $91.00

Other Direct Costs will be billed at the actual cost multiplied by 1.5

c. Costs for tests performed by the OWNER to verify that work previously tested and found

to be defective has been corrected. Verification testing is to be provided at the CONTRACTOR’s

expense to verify products or constructed works are in compliance after corrections have been

made.

SC-14.03A.

Add two new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 14.03A of the General Conditions which are to

read as follows:

B. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by CONTRACTOR or

Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contract or other agreement by

which an interest is retained by the seller. CONTRACTOR warrants that CONTRACTOR has good title

00800-20

to all materials and supplies used by CONTRACTOR in the Work, free from all liens, claims or

encumbrances.

C. CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and save OWNER harmless from all claims growing

out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnishers

of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies, including commissary, incurred

in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract.

CONTRACTOR shall at OWNER’s request furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligation of the nature

hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If CONTRACTOR fails to do so, the

OWNER may, after having served written notice to the said CONTRACTOR, either pay unpaid bills, of

which OWNER has written notice, direct, or withhold from the CONTRACTOR’s unpaid compensation a

sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory

evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to

CONTRACTOR shall be resumed, in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the

provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon OWNER to either

CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR’s Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the CONTRACTOR,

OWNER shall be deemed the agent of CONTRACTOR and any payment so made by OWNER shall be

considered as payment made under the Contract by OWNER to CONTRACTOR and OWNER shall not

be liable to CONTRACTOR for any such payment made in good faith.

SC-14.04.


14.04 Substantial Completion

A. When CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work ready for its intended use,

CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that the entire Work is substantially

complete (except for items specifically listed by CONTRACTOR as incomplete) and request that

ENGINEER issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Promptly thereafter, OWNER, CONTRACTOR,

and ENGINEER shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If ENGINEER

does not consider the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will notify CONTRACTOR in writing

giving the reasons therefore. If ENGINEER considers the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will

prepare and deliver to OWNER a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of

Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or

corrected before final payment. OWNER sill thereafter review the tentative certificate of Substantial

Completion and make a final determination as to substantial completion which will be communicated to the

CONTRACTOR in writing within 20 days after receipt of the tentative certificate.

SC-14.07B.1

Delete Paragraph 14.07B.1 from the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:

1. If, on the basis of ENGINEER’s observation of the Work during construction and final

inspection, and ENGINEER’s review of final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation,

all as required by the Contract Documents, ENGINEER is satisfied that the Work has been completed and

CONTRACTOR’s other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, ENGINEER will

indicate in writing ENGINEER’s recommendation of payment and present the Application to OWNER

for payment. Thereupon ENGINEER will give written notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR that the

Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, ENGINEER will return the

Application to CONTRACTOR, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final

00800-21

payment, in which case CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the

Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and

substance, OWNER shall in accordance with the applicable State or local General Law, pay

CONTRACTOR the amount recommended the ENGINEER.

SC-14.07C.

Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 14.07C of the General Conditions which is to read as

follows:

D. In the event the CONTRACTOR fails to attain Substantial Completion of the entire

Project (all bid items) within the Contract Time, the OWNER may withhold money permanently from the

CONTRACTOR’s total compensation a sum of $500 per day as liquidated damages and for added

expenses including engineering services, etc. The OWNER will be the sole judge as to whether the work

has been completed within the allotted time. Accordingly, it is agreed and understood that said amount is

to be assessed by the OWNER, not as a penalty, but as a predetermined and agreed upon liquidated

damage. Additionally, assessment of liquidated damages by the OWNER shall not constitute a waiver of

the OWNER’s right to sue and collect additional damages which OWNER may sustain by the failure of

the CONTRACTOR to perform in accordance with the terms of its Contract.

SC-14.08A.


A. If after Substantial Completion of the Work final completion thereof is materially delayed

through no fault of the CONTRACTOR, and the ENGINEER so confirms, OWNER, upon certification

by ENGINEER, and without terminating the Agreement, may make payment of all or a portion of the

balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for the

Work not fully completed or corrected is less that the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds

have been furnished as required in Paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the Surety to payment of the

balance due to that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the

CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER prior to certifications of such payment. Such payment, if approved, shall

be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a

waiver of claims.

SC-14.09.


14.09 Waiver of Claims

A. The acceptance of final payment by the CONTRACTOR shall constitute a waiver of all

claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER.

ARTICLE 15 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION

SC-15.01.

Delete Paragraph 15.,02 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:

15.01 Owner’s Right to Temporarily Suspend Work

00800-22

A. Reasons for Suspension. The OWNER shall have the right by written order to

temporarily suspend the Work, in whole or in part, whenever, in the judgment of the OWNER, such

temporary suspension is required:

1. in the interest of the OWNER generally;

2. due to government or judicial controls or orders which make performance of this

Contract temporarily impossible or illegal;

3. to coordinate the work of separate contractors at the job site;

4. to expedite the completion of a separate contract even thought the completion of

this particular contract may be thereby delayed;

5. because of weather conditions unsuitable for performance of the work; or

6. because the CONTRACTOR is proceeding contrary to contract provisions or has

failed to correct conditions considered unsafe for workmen.

B. The written order of the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR shall state the reasons for

suspending the Work and the anticipated periods for such suspension. Upon receipt of the OWNER’s

written order, the CONTRACTOR shall suspend the work covered by the order and shall take such means

and precautions as may be necessary to properly protect the finished and partially finished work, the

unused materials and uninstalled equipment, including the providing of suitable drainage about the work

without written direction from the ENGINEER and shall proceed with the work promptly when notified

by the ENGINEER to resume operations.

C. No additional compensation shall be paid to the CONTRACTOR for such suspension

under Paragraph 15.01A.6 above or otherwise where same is caused by the fault of the CONTRACTOR.

Where such temporary suspension is not due to the fault of the CONTRACTOR, he shall be entitled to:

1. An equitable extension of working time for the completion of the Work, not to

exceed the delay caused by such temporary suspension, as determined by the OWNER; and,

2. The actual and necessary costs of properly protecting the finished and partially

finished Work, unused materials and uninstalled equipment during the period of the ordered suspension as

determined by the OWNER as being beyond the contract requirements, such costs, is any, to be determined

on the basis set forth in Article 12 of the General Conditions; and,

3. Where the CONTRACTOR elects to move equipment from the jobsite and then

return it to the site when the Work is ordered resumed, the actual and necessary costs of these moves, in

an amount determined by the OWNER under the provisions of Article 12 of the General Conditions.

SC-15.02.


15.02 Contractor Default: Owner’s Right to Suspend Work and Annul Contract

A. The Work or any portion of the Work under contract shall be suspended immediately on

written order of the OWNER declaring the CONTRACTOR to be in default. A copy of such notice shall

be served on the CONTRACTOR’s Surety. The contract may be annulled by the OWNER for any good

cause or causes, among others of which special reference is made to the following:

1. failure of the CONTRACTOR to start the Work within 10 days from the date

specified in the written work order issued by OWNER to begin the Work;

00800-23

2. substantial evidence that the progress of the work is being made by the

CONTRACTOR is insufficient to complete the Work within the specified working time;

3. failure of the CONTRACTOR to provide sufficient and proper equipment,

materials or construction forces for properly executing the Work;

4. substantial evidence that the CONTRACTOR has abandoned the work or

discontinuance of the performance of the Work or any part thereof and failure to resume performance

within a reasonable time after notice to do so;

5. substantial evidence that the CONTRACTOR has become insolvent or bankrupt,

or otherwise financially unable to carry on the Work;

6. deliberate failure on the part of the CONTRACTOR to observe any requirements

of these specifications or to comply with any orders given by ENGINEER as provided for in these

specifications;

7. failure of the CONTRACTOR to promptly make good any defects in materials or

workmanship, or any defects of any nature, the correction of which has been directed in writing by the

OWNER;

8. substantial evidence of collusion or the purpose of illegally procuring a contract

or perpetrating fraud on the OWNER in the construction of Work under contract;

9. repeated and flagrant violations of safe working procedures;

10. the filing by the CONTRACTOR of litigation against the OWNER prior to final

completion of the Work.

B. When the work is suspended for any of the causes itemized above, or for any other cause

or causes, the CONTRACTOR shall discontinue the Work r such part thereof as the OWNER shall

designate, whereupon the Surety may either at its option assume the contract or that portion thereof which

the OWNER has ordered the CONTRACTOR to discontinue and perform the same or, with the written

consent of the OWNER, sublet the same, provided, however, that the Surety shall exercise its option

within two weeks after written notice to discontinue the work has been served upon the Contractor and

upon the surety or its authorized agents. The Surety in such event shall assume the CONTRACTOR’s

place in all respects and shall be paid by the OWNER for all work performed by it in accordance with the

terms of the contract, but in no event shall such payments exceed the contract amount, regardless of the

cost to the Surety to complete the Work

All monies remaining due to the CONTRACTOR at the time of his default shall thereupon become due

and payable to the Surety as the Work progresses, subject to all terms of the Contract. In case the Surety

does not, within the hereinabove specified time, exercise its obligation to assume the contract or that

portion thereof which the OWNER has ordered the CONTRACTOR to discontinue, then OWNER shall

have the power to complete by contract or otherwise, as it may determine, the Work herein described or

such part thereof as it may deem necessary, and the CONTRACTOR hereto agrees that the OWNER shall

have the right to take possession of or use any or all of the materials, plant, tools, equipment, supplies and

property of every kind provided by the CONTRACTOR for the purpose of his Work and to procure other

tools, equipment and materials for the completion of the same and to charge the account of the

CONTRACTOR the expense of said contract for labor, materials, tools, equipment and expenses incident

thereto.

C. The OWNER shall not be required to obtain the lowest bid for the work of completing

the contract, but the expenses to be deducted shall be the actual cost of such work. In case such expense is

less than the sum which would have been payable under the contract if the same had been completed by

CONTRACTOR, then in such case the OWNER may pay the CONTRACTOR the difference in the cost,

provided that the CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any claim for damages or for loss of anticipated

profits.

00800-24

D. In case such expense shall exceed the amount which would have been payable under the

contract if the same had been completed by the CONTRACTOR, the CONTRACTOR and his surety

shall pay the amount of the excess to the OWNER on notice from the OWNER for excess due including

any costs incurred by the OWNER, such as inspection, legal fees and liquidated damages. When any

particular part of the work is being carried on by the OWNER by contract or otherwise under the

provisions of this section, the CONTRACTOR shall continue the remainder of the work in conformity

with the terms of the contract and in such a manner as not to hinder or interfere with the performance of

workmen employed as above provided by the Owner or surety.

SC-15.03.


15.03 Termination for Convenience of the Owner

A. The performance of the work under this contract may be terminated by the OWNER in

while or from time to time in part, in accordance with this section, whenever the OWNER shall determine

that such termination is in the best interest of the OWNER. Any such termination shall be effected by

mailing a notice of termination to the CONTRACTOR specifying the extent to which performance of

work under the contract is terminated, and the date upon which such termination becomes effective.

Receipt of the notice shall be deemed conclusively presumed and established when the letter is placed in

the United States Mail by the OWNER. Further, it shall be deemed conclusively presumed and

established that such termination is made with just cause as therein stated, and no proof in any claim,

demand, or suit shall be required of the OWNER regarding such discretionary action.

B. After receipt of a notice of termination, and except as otherwise directed by the

ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall:

1. stop work under the contract on the date and to the extent specified in the notice of

termination;

2. place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, services or facilities except as may

be necessary for completion of such portion of the work under contract as is not terminated;

3. terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of

work terminated by the notice of termination;

4. transfer title to the OWNER and deliver in the manner, at the times, and to the extent, if

any, directed by the ENGINEER:

a. the fabricated or unfabricated parts, work in progress, completed work, supplies

and other material produced as a part of, or acquired in connection with the performance of, the

work terminated by the notice of termination; and,

b. the completed or partially completed plans, drawings, information and other

property which, if the contract had been completed, would have been required to be furnished

to the OWNER.

5. complete performance of such part of the work as shall not have been terminated by the

notice of termination; and

6. take such action as may be necessary, or as ENGINEER may direct, for the protection

and preservation of the property related to its contract which is in the possession of the

CONTRACTOR and in which the OWNER has or may acquire an interest. At a time not later

than 30 days after the termination date specified in the notice of termination, the

CONTRACTOR may submit to the ENGINEER a list, certified as to the quantity and quality,

of any or all items of termination inventory not previously disposed of, exclusively of items the

disposition of which has been directed or authorized by the ENGINEER. Not later than 15

00800-25

days thereafter, the OWNER shall accept title to such items and remove them or enter into a

storage agreement covering the same, provided that the list submitted shall be subject to

verification by the ENGINEER upon removal of the items, or, if the items are stored, within 45

days from the date of submission of the list, and provided that any necessary adjustment to

correct the list as submitted shall be made prior to final settlement.

C. Within 60 days after written notice of termination, the CONTRACTOR shall submit his

termination claim to the ENGINEER in the form and with the certification prescribed by the ENGINEER.

Unless one or more extensions in writing are granted by the ENGINEER upon request of the

CONTRACTOR, made in writing within such 60-day period or authorized extension thereof, any and all

such claims shall be conclusively deemed waived.

D. Subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03C, the CONTRACTOR and OWNER may agree

upon the whole or any part pf the amount or amounts to be paid to the CONTRACTOR by reason of the

total or partial termination of work pursuant thereto, provided that such agreed amount or amounts shall

never exceed the total contract price as reduced by the amount of payments otherwise made and as further

reduced by the contract price of work not terminated. The contract shall be amended accordingly, and the

CONTRACTOR shall be paid the agreed amount. No amount shall be due for lost or anticipated profits.

Nothing in Paragraph 15.03E, hereunder, prescribing the amount to be paid to the CONTRACTOR in the

event of failure of the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER to agree upon the whole amount to be paid to

the CONTRACTOR by reason of the termination of work pursuant to this section, shall be deemed to

limit, restrict or otherwise determine or affect the amount or amounts which may be agreed upon to be

paid to the CONTRACTOR pursuant to this paragraph.

E. In the event of the failure of the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER to agree, as provided in

Paragraph 15.03D, upon the whole amount to be paid to the CONTRACTOR by reason of the termination

of work pursuant to this section, the OWNER shall determine, on the basis of information available to it,

the amount, if any, due the CONTRACTOR by reason of the termination and shall pay to the

CONTRACTOR the amounts determined. No amount shall be due for lost or anticipated profits.

F. In arriving at the amount due the CONTRACTOR under this section, there shall be deducted:

1. all unliquidated advance or other payments on account theretofore made to the

CONTRACTOR, applicable to the terminated portion of this contract;

2. any claim which the OWNER may have against the CONTRACTOR in connection with

this contract; and

3. the agreed price for or the proceeds of sale of any materials, supplies or other things kept

by the CONTRACTOR or sold, pursuant to the provisions of this clause, and not otherwise recovered by

or credited to the OWNER.

G. If the termination hereunder may be partial prior to the settlement of the terminated portion of

this contract, the CONTRACTOR may file with the ENGINEER a request in writing for an equitable

adjustment of the price or prices specified in the contract relating to the continued portion of the contract

(the portion not terminated by the notice of termination), and such equitable adjustment as may be agreed

upon shall be made in such price or prices; nothing contained herein, however, shall limit the right of the

OWNER and the CONTRACTOR to agree upon the amount or amounts to be paid to the

CONTRACTOR for the completion of the continued portion of the contract when said contract does not

contain an established contract price for such continued portion.

H. Nothing contained in this section shall limit or alter the rights which the OWNER may have

for termination of this contract under Paragraph 15.02 hereof entitled “CONTRACTOR default”

00800-26

OWNER’s Right to Suspend Work and Annul Contract” or any other right which OWNER may have for

default or breach of contract by CONTRACTOR.

SC-15.04.


ARTICLE 16 – DISPUTE RESOLUTION

SC-16.01.


ARTICLE 17 – MISCELLANEOUS

SC-17.01A.

Amend Paragraph 17.01A by inserting the words “return receipt requested” after the words “certified

mail” in line 6.

SC-17.02A.

Amend Paragraph 17.02A by removing “such day will be omitted from the computation” in line 6 and

replace it with “then the last day of such period shall be the next working day.”

SC-17.05.

Add a new paragraph after Paragraph 17.05 in the General Conditions which reads as follows:

B. Exclusive venue for any action under this Contract shall be a court of competent jurisdiction in

__________Pope________County, Arkansas.

Add the new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 17.05 of the General Conditions which is to read as

follows:

17.06 Addresses

A. Both the address given in the Bid Forma upon which this Agreement is founded, and

CONTRACTOR’s office at or near the site of the Work are hereby designated as places to either of which

notices, letters, and other communications to CONTRACTOR shall be certified, mailed, or delivered. The

delivering at the above named place, or depositing in a postpaid wrapper directed to the first-named place,

in any post office box regularly maintained by the post office e department, of any notice, letter or other

communication to CONTRACTOR shall be deemed sufficient service thereof upon CONTRACTOR, and

the date of said service shall be the date of such delivery or mailing. The first-named address may be

changed at any time by an instrument in writing, executed and acknowledge by CONTRACTOR, and

delivered to OWNER and ENGINEER. Nothing herein contained shall be deemed to preclude or render

inoperative the service of any notice, letter, or other communication upon CONTRACTOR personally.

17.07 Wage Rates

00800-27

A. The requirements and provisions of all applicable laws and any amendments thereof or

additions thereto as to the employment of labor, and to the schedule of minimum wage rates established in

compliance with laws, shall be a part of these Contract Documents. Copies of the wage schedules are

included in PART II of these Supplementary Conditions. If, after the Notice of Award, it becomes

necessary to employ any person in a trade or occupation not classified in the wage determinations, such

person shall be paid at not less than such rates as shall be determined by the officials administrating the

laws mentioned above. Such approved minimum rate shall be retroactive to the time of the initial

employment of such person in such trade or occupation. CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER of

CONTRACTOR’s intent to employ persons in trades or occupations not classified in sufficient time for

OWNER to obtain approved rates for such trades or occupations.

B. The schedules of wages referred to above are minimum rates only, and OWNER will not

consider any claims for additional compensation made by CONTRACTOR because of payment by

CONTRACTOR o f any wage rate in excess of the applicable rate contained in these Contract

Documents. All disputes in regard to the payment of wages in excess of these specified in the Schedules

shall be resolved by CONTRACTOR.

C. The said schedules of wages shall continue to be the minimum rates to be paid during the life of

the Agreement and a legible copy of said schedules shall be kept posted in a conspicuous place at the site

of the Work.

17.08 No Waiver of Legal Rights

A. Inspection by the ENGINEER; any order, measurement, quantity or certificate by the

ENGINEER; any order by the OWNER for payment of money; any payment for or acceptance of any

work; or any extension of time or any possession taken by the OWNER shall not operate as a waiver of

any provisions of the contract or any power therein reserved to the OWNER of any rights or damages

therein provided. Any waiver of any breach of contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or

subsequent breach. The OWNER reserves the right to correct any error that may be discovered in any

estimate that may have been paid and to adjust the same to meet the requirements of the contract

documents. The OWNER reserves the right to recover by process of law sums as may be sufficient to

correct any error or make good any deficiency in the work resulting from such error, dishonesty or

collusion by the CONTRACTOR or his agents and the ENGINEER or his assistants, discovered in the

work after the final payment has been made. Neither final acceptance of the work nor final payment shall

relieve the CONTRACTOR of responsibility fort faulty materials or workmanship, and the

CONTRACTOR shall promptly remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work

resulting therefrom. Likewise, neither final acceptance nor final payment, nor partial or entire use of

occupancy of the work by the OWNER shall constitute acceptance of work not done in accordance with

the contract documents or relieve CONTRACTOR of liability with respect to any expressed or implied

warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, whether same be patently or latently

defective.

17.09 Equal Employment Opportunity

A. During the performance of this contract the CONTRACTOR agrees as follows:

1. CONTRACTOR shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for

employment because of race, color, religion, sex, age, or national origin. The CONTRACTOR shall take

affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during

employment without regard to their race, color, sex, religion, age or national origin. Such action shall

include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or

recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection

00800-28

for training, including apprenticeship. The CONTRACTOR agrees to post in conspicuous places,

available to employees or applicants for employment, notices to be provided setting forth the provisions

of this nondiscrimination clause.

2. CONTRACTOR shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or

on behalf of the CONTRACTOR, state that all qualified applicants shall received consideration for

employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, national origin or age.

3. CONTRACTOR shall send to each labor union or representative of workers with which

he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contact or understanding a notice to be provided,

advising the said labor union or worker’s representatives of the CONTRACTOR’s commitments under

this section, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and

applicants for employment.

4. CONTRACTOR shall include the provisions of this section in all subcontracts pertaining

to the work.

5. During the course of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER, on a

monthly basis, a breakdown by minority group of all employees at the site of the work.

17.10 Loss of Anticipated Profits

A. Contractor will not be entitle d to loss of anticipated profits pursuant to any claim under this

Agreement.

17.11 Obligation to Perform Functions

A. Any failure or neglect on the part of OWNER, ENGINEER or inspectors to enforce provisions

herein dealing with supervision, control, inspection, testing or acceptance and approval of the work shall

never operate to relieve CONTRACTOR from full compliance with the contract documents nor render

OWNER liable to CONTRACTOR for money damages, extensions of time or increased compensation of

any kind.

PART II – STATE GOVERNMENT PROVISIONS

State Government Provisions included herein have been selected from those to which specific references

have been made elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Each and every other provision of law or clause

required by law to be inserted in this Contract shall be deemed to be also inserted herein in accordance

with Paragraph 3.01D of the Supplementary Conditions.

1.0 STATE OF ARKANSAS PROVISIONS

1.1 Prevailing Wage Rates (attached to end of this Section)

"General Decision Number: AR20210011 09/03/2021

Superseded General Decision Number: AR20200011

State: Arkansas

Construction Type: BuildingBUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories).

County: Pope County in Arkansas.

Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wageof $10.95 for calendar year 2021 applies to all contractssubject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract isawarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractormust pay all workers in any classification listed on this wagedetermination at least $10.95 per hour (or the applicable wagerate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) forall hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year2021. If this contract is covered by the EO and aclassification considered necessary for performance of work onthe contract does not appear on this wage determination, thecontractor must pay workers in that classification at least thewage rate determined through the conformance process set forthin 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii) (or the EO minimum wage rate,if it ishigher than the conformed wage rate). The EO minimum wage ratewill be adjusted annually. Please note that this EO applies tothe above-mentioned types of contracts entered into by thefederal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Actitself, but it does not apply to contracts subject only to theDavis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR5.1(a)(2)-(60). Additional information on contractorrequirements and worker protections under the EO is availableat www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts.

Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/01/2021 1 03/12/2021 2 04/02/2021 3 07/16/2021 4 08/13/2021 5 09/03/2021

CARP0216-003 07/01/2021

Rates Fringes

SECTION 00800ADAVIS-BACON WAGE RATE DETERMINATION

00800-29

MILLWRIGHT.......................$ 27.25 11.23---------------------------------------------------------------- ELEC0295-010 01/01/2017

Rates Fringes

ELECTRICIAN (Includes Low Voltage Wiring)..................$ 24.55 12.23---------------------------------------------------------------- ENGI0624-006 01/01/2017

Rates Fringes

POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR Crane.......................$ 26.20 12.30 Forklift....................$ 26.20 12.30----------------------------------------------------------------* IRON0321-010 08/01/2021

Rates Fringes

IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL...........$ 23.00 19.61---------------------------------------------------------------- PAIN0424-008 07/01/2019

Rates Fringes

PAINTER (Spray)..................$ 16.10 6.97---------------------------------------------------------------- SUAR2015-008 01/09/2017

Rates Fringes

BRICKLAYER.......................$ 20.00 0.00 CARPENTER, Includes Drywall Hanging, and Metal Stud Installation.....................$ 15.21 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 15.62 0.00 HVAC MECHANIC: HVAC Duct Installation.....................$ 17.27 5.03 LABORER: Common or General......$ 12.28 2.26 LABORER: Mason Tender - Brick...$ 10.00 0.00 OPERATOR:

00800-30

Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe.......$ 23.08 0.00 OPERATOR: Bulldozer.............$ 18.14 0.00 PAINTER (Brush and Roller).......$ 17.78 0.00 PLUMBER..........................$ 14.54 1.08 TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck........$ 15.00 0.00----------------------------------------------------------------

WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performingoperation to which welding is incidental.

================================================================ Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leavefor Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to theDavis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and anysolicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If thiscontract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provideemployees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hoursthey work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year.Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for theirown illness, injury or other health-related needs, includingpreventive care; to assist a family member (or person who islike family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has otherhealth-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasonsresulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who islike family to the employee) who is a victim of, domesticviolence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional informationon contractor requirements and worker protections under the EOis available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts.

Unlisted classifications needed for work not included withinthe scope of the classifications listed may be added afteraward only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses(29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)).

----------------------------------------------------------------

The body of each wage determination lists the classificationand wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for thecited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wagedetermination. The classifications are listed in alphabeticalorder of ""identifiers"" that indicate whether the particularrate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local),a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate

00800-31

(weighted union average rate).

Union Rate Identifiers

A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosedin dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate wereprevailing for that classification in the survey. Example:PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier ofthe union which prevailed in the survey for thisclassification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198indicates the local union number or district council numberwhere applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number,005 in the example, is an internal number used in processingthe wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of themost current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1,2014.

Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all ratechanges in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governingthis classification and rate.

Survey Rate Identifiers

Classifications listed under the ""SU"" identifier indicate thatno one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey andthe published rate is derived by computing a weighted averagerate based on all the rates reported in the survey for thatclassification. As this weighted average rate includes allrates reported in the survey, it may include both union andnon-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicatesthe rates are survey rates based on a weighted averagecalculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicatesthe State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on whichthese classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007in the example, is an internal number used in producing thewage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completiondate for the classifications and rates under that identifier.

Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until anew survey is conducted.

Union Average Rate Identifiers

Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicatethat no single majority rate prevailed for thoseclassifications; however, 100% of the data reported for theclassifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-001008/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted unionaverage rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in

00800-32

the example, is an internal number used in producing the wagedetermination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion datefor the classifications and rates under that identifier.

A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January ofeach year, to reflect a weighted average of the currentnegotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate isbased.

----------------------------------------------------------------

WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS

1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This canbe:

* an existing published wage determination* a survey underlying a wage determination* a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter* a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling

On survey related matters, initial contact, including requestsfor summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and HourRegional Office for the area in which the survey was conductedbecause those Regional Offices have responsibility for theDavis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initialcontact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.)and 3.) should be followed.

With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formalprocess described here, initial contact should be with theBranch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to:

Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210

2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then aninterested party (those affected by the action) can requestreview and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator(See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to:

Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.

00800-33

Washington, DC 20210

The request should be accompanied by a full statement of theinterested party's position and by any information (wagepayment data, project description, area practice material,etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue.

3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, aninterested party may appeal directly to the AdministrativeReview Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to:

Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210

4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final.

================================================================

END OF GENERAL DECISION"

00800-34

END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

00840-1

SECTION 00840

NOTICE OF AWARD

Dated: , 20

TO: (Bidder)

ADDRESS:

OWNER’S PROJECT NO.:

PROJECT:

You are notified that your Bid dated , 20 for the above Project has

been accepted. You are the apparent successful Bidder and have been awarded a contract for

The Contract Price of your Contract is

Dollars

($ ).

Three (3) copies of each of the proposed Contract Documents (except Drawings) accompany this Notice

of Award. Three (3) sets of the Drawings will be delivered separately or otherwise made available to you

immediately.

00840-2

You must comply with the following conditions precedent within ten (10) days of the date of this Notice

of Award, that is by:

, 20 .

1. You must deliver to the OWNER three (3) fully executed counterparts of the Agreement.

2. You must deliver with the executed Agreement three (3) fully executed copies of the Performance

and Payment Bonds.

Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle Owner to consider

your bid abandoned, to annul this Notice of Award and to declare your Bid Security forfeited.

Within ten (10) days after you comply with those conditions, Owner will return to you one sully

signed counterpart of the Agreement with the Contract Documents attached.

(Owner)

BY:

(Authorized Signature)

(Title)


00845-1

SECTION 00845

NOTICE TO PROCEED

Dated: , 20

TO: (Bidder)

ADDRESS:

OWNER’S PROJECT NO.:

PROJECT:

OWNER’s CONTRACT NO.:

CONTRACT FOR:

You are notified that the Contract Time under the above Contract will commence to run on

, 20 . By that date, you are to start performing your

obligations under the Contract Documents. In accordance with Article 3 of the Agreement, the dates of

Substantial Completion and Final Completion are , 20

and , 20 , respectively.

Before you start any Work at the site, Paragraph 2.7 of the General Conditions provides that you must

deliver to the Owner Certificates of Insurance which you are required to purchase and maintain in


ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT

(Contractor) (Owner)

BY:

(Authorized Signature) (Authorized Signature)

(Title) (Title)


01000-1

SECTION 01000

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. These Specifications are written in imperative and abbreviated form. The

imperative language is directed at the Contractor, unless specifically noted

otherwise. Incomplete sentences shall be completed by inserting “shall”, the

“Contractor shall”, “shall be” and similarly mandatory phrases by inference in the

same manner as they are applied to noted on the Drawings. The words “shall be:”

shall be supplied by inference where a colon (:) is used within sentences or

phrases. Except as worded to the contrary, all indicated requirements shall be

performed whether stated imperatively or otherwise.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Engineer: Brown Engineers, LLC, 17200 Chenal Pkwy. Suite 300 PMB 324,

Little Rock, AR 72223.

B. Provide: Furnish and install, complete in place, operating, testing and approved.

C. Products: The materials, systems, and equipment provided by the Contractor.

1.03 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Prebid: Refer to Section 00100.

B. Postbid: Refer to Section 00700.


01045-1

SECTION 01045

DEMOLITION, CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section includes the removal of existing construction to the limits as indicated

and specified. It also includes relocating existing construction as indicated and

specified. Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Section 01310 in

scheduling and completing all demolition Work.

B. Demolition includes the complete or partial removal and turnover to Owner, salvage

or disposal of equipment and materials as indicated or specified.

C. Relocation of existing construction includes isolation, draining, cutting, joining, new

piping, new fittings, new junction boxes, new conduit, new wiring, etc. as required to

reinstall a fully functional system as indicated, as specified or as required to complete

the new Work.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for all demolition cutting, core drilling, fitting and

patching, including attendant excavation and backfill, required to complete the Work to:

1. Make its several parts fit together properly.

2. Uncover portions of the work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.

3. Remove and replace defective Work.

4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract

Documents.

5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.

6. Provide penetrations of structural and nonstructural surfaces for installation of

piping and electrical conduit.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule: Submit proposed methods and operations of demolition, cutting and

patching in accordance with Section 01300 and Section 01310.

B. The schedule shall include:

1. Identification of the Project.

2. Description of the affected Work.

3. The necessity for cutting, alteration or excavation, when applicable.

01045-2

4. The effect on the Work of the Owner or any separate contractor, or on the

structural or weatherproof integrity of the Project.

5. Coordination schedule for shut-off, capping and continuation of utility services as

required.

6. Description of the proposed Work:

a. The scope and detailed sequence of cutting, patching, alteration or excavation.

b. The trades who will execute the Work.

c. Products proposed to be used.

d. The extent of refinishing to be done.

e. Sequence and methods of removal and disposal of demolished materials.

7. Alternatives to cutting and patching, when applicable.

8. Written permission of any separate contractor whose Work will be affected.

C. Submit a written notice to the Owner designating the date and time the Work will

begin.

1.03 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of

equipment and portions of structure s to be demolished. Conditions existing at time of

inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable.

B. Explosives: Use of explosives will not be permitted.

C. Protections: Ensure safe passage of persons around area of demolition. Conduct

operations to prevent injury to adjacent buildings, structures, other facilities, and

persons.

1. The interior of the building and all materials and equipment shall be protected

from the weather at all times.

2. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement or

collapse of facilities adjacent to structures to be demolished.

3. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement or

collapse of structures to be demolished.

D. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition

operations at no cost to Owner.

E. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities required to remain, keep in service, and

protect against damage during demolition operations.

01045-3

1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when

authorized in writing by the Owner. Provide temporary services during

interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to the Owner.

2. When utility lines are encountered which are not indicated in the Drawings, the

Owner shall be notified.

F. Operating Facilities

1. Perform Work in a manner which will not disrupt the operation of existing

utilities.

2. Provide temporary services to assure uninterrupted operation of existing facilities,

except where service disruption is allowed for as specifically specified in Section

01310 or specifically noted on the Drawings.

3. Stage materials, equipment and Work in a manner which will not obstruct Owner

access to operate and maintain existing operating facility components.

4. Sequence and perform Work to minimize disruption of existing facilities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

A. Comply with Specifications and standards for each specific product involved.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Inspect existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to damage or to

movement during demolition, cutting, patching, splicing or relocation.

B. After uncovering Work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products or


C. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to the Owner in writing; do not

proceed with the Work until the Owner has provided further instructions.

D. Conditions which are visible without uncovering Work shall be reported to the Owner

in writing no later than 2 weeks after site mobilization.

E. Test equipment for proper function after relocation.

F. The Contractor shall be liable for any lost or damaged items which are to be reused.

Any lost or damaged items shall be replaced with products identical to the existing

items or equivalent as determined by the Owner. The Owner shall have sole discretion

in determining what product is equivalent.

01045-4

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure the structural value or

integrity of the affected portion of the Work.

B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage.

C. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the Project which may be

exposed by demolition, cutting and patching work, and maintain excavations free from

water.

3.03 PERFORMANCE

A. Pollution Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable

methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level.

Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection.

1. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such

as ice, flooding, and pollution.

2. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by

demolition operations, as directed by the Owner or governing authorities. Return

adjacent areas to condition existing prior to start of Work as soon as practical.

3. Prior to demolition inside existing structures, provide covers consisting of plastic

sheeting and framing over existing equipment, motors, switchgear and control

panels. Maintain covers during demolition operations.

B. Structure demolition: Demolish as required and remove from Site. Use such methods as

required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations.

1. Proceed with demolition in a systematic manner, from top to ground.

2. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and remove materials so as to

not expose excessive loads to supporting walls, floors or framing.

3. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other

Work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs. Torch

cutting will not be permitted.

4. Where physical cutting is required, cut Work with sawing and grinding tools, not

with hammering and chopping tools. Unless otherwise specified, core drill or saw

cut openings through all concrete work. Core drilling shall be done utilizing

diamond bits. Corners shall not be over cut without prior written approval from

the Owner.

5. Torch cutting of steel members is not allowed.

01045-5

C. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will prevent settlement or

damage to other Work.

D. Execute filling and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply

with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes.

E. Fit work watertight and airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations

through surfaces.

F. Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Restore exposed

finishes of patched areas and, where necessary, extend finish restoration onto retained

Work, adjoining in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching.

G. Take care in the removal of equipment and materials to be salvaged to prevent damage

to such.

H. The Owner is responsible for asbestos abatement. Contractor shall notify the Owner

immediately upon encountering asbestos during demolition Work.

3.04 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. The Owner will retain salvage rights to all material and equipment. All materials and

equipment retained by the Owner shall be transported and delivered to a point

designated by the Owner. All equipment to be salvaged by the Owner shall receive a

general cleaning to rid all excessive and foreign materials that may have grown

attached to the equipment.

B. Any material or equipment not retained by the Owner shall be removed from the Site

and disposed of by the Contractor in accordance with applicable regulations and laws.

END OF SECTION

01150-1

SECTION 01150

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 PROPOSAL

A. The Bid Form is a part of these Contract Documents and lists each item of Work for

which payment will be made. No payment will be made for items other than those

listed in the Bid Form.

B. Required items of Work and incidentals necessary for the satisfactory completion of the

Contract which are not specifically listed in the Bid Form and which are not specified

in this Section to be measured or to be included in one of the items listed in the Bid

Form shall be considered as incidental to the Work required under this Contract, and all

costs thereof, including Contractor’s overhead costs and profit, shall be considered as

included in the prices bid for the various bid items. The Contractor shall prepare his

proposal accordingly.

C. Work includes furnishing all labor, equipment, tools, and materials, and performing all

operations required to complete the Work of this Contract satisfactorily, in place, as

specified and as indicated on the Drawings.

1.02 UNIT PRICES

A. Unit prices are requested in the Bid Form for certain items. The estimated quantities set

forth in the Bid Form for these items have been fixed for the purpose of comparison of

bids.

1.03 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. Measurement of an item of Work will be by the unit indicated in the Bid Form. On

lump sum items, monthly progress pay quantities will be based on percentage of

acceptable project in place.

B. Unless otherwise stated in individual sections of the Specifications or on the Bid Form,

no separate payment will be made for any incidental items of Work, materials, parts,

equipment, supplies, or related items required to perform and complete the

requirements of any Bid Item. The costs for such incidentals required shall be included

in the Contract price bid for each Bid Item.

C. Payment will be made at the Contract price per unit as indicated in the Bid Form with

total price of the Contract being equal to the Total Bid, as specified and as modified, by

extending unit prices multiplied by quantities, as appropriate to reflect actual Work

01150-2

included in the Contract. Such price and payment shall constitute full compensation to

the Contractor for furnishing all plant, labor, equipment, tools, and materials, and for

performing all operations required to furnish to the Owner the entire Work of this

Contract, complete in place, as specified and as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Measurement for payment does not signify acceptance of Work.

1.04 BID ITEMS

A. Each bid item shall be as follows:

1. Bid Item 1 – All supervision, labor, materials, tools, equipment, incidentals and

related items required for construction of the Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

01200-1

SECTION 01200

PROJECT MEETINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Schedule, attend, and administer as specified, preconstruction conference, periodic

progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the process of the Work.

B. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings shall be

qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.

C. Meetings administered by Owner may be tape recorded. If recorded, tapes will be used

to prepare minutes and retained by Owner for future reference.

D. Meetings, in addition to those specified in this Section, may be held when requested by

the Owner, Engineer or Contractor.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. A preconstruction conference will be held within ten days after award of Contract and

before Work is started. The conference will be scheduled and administered by the

Construction Manager.

B. The Construction Manager will preside at the conference, prepare the minutes of the

meeting and distribute copies of same to all participant who so request by fully

completing the attendance forms to be circulated at the beginning of the conference.

C. Attendance:

1. Contractor’s project manager.

2. Contractor’s superintendent.

3. Any subcontractor or supplier representatives whom the Contractor may desire to

invite or the Owner may request.

4. Construction Manager.

5. Engineer’s representatives.

6. Owner’s representatives.

7. Others as appropriate.

01200-2

D. Preliminary Agenda:

Introductions

1. Schedule completion dates and Liquidated Damages.

2. Construction Scheduling, including critical path.

3. Designation of responsible personnel.

4. Authority of Contractor.

5. Authority of Construction Manager and Engineer.

6. Submittals.

7. Procedures for Change Orders, CMRs, PCMs, Field Orders, RFIs, etc.

8. Record Drawings.

9. Quality Control.

10. Safety Procedures.

11. Temporary construction facilities.

12. Use of City facilities.

13. Security and Work after Normal Hours.

14. Measurement and payment.

15. City administrative procedures, including M/WBE procedures.

16. Project Work Summary.

17. Correspondence Routing.

18. Pay Request procedures.

1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Formal project coordination meetings will be held periodically (not more than once

weekly, nor less than once monthly). Meetings will be scheduled and administered by

Construction Manager. Additional progress meetings to discuss specific topics will be

conducted on an as-needed basis. Such additional meetings shall include, but not be

limited to:

1. Coordinating plant/.equipment shutdowns.

2. Installation of equipment.

01200-3

3. Start-up of equipment or plant.

4. Problem Area Resolutions.

5. Equipment approval.

B. The Construction Manager will preside at progress meetings, prepare the minutes of the

meeting and distribute copies of same to all participants who so request by fully

completing the attendance form to be circulated at the beginning of each meeting.

C. Attendance: Same as preconstruction conference.

D. Preliminary Agenda:

1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting.

2. Review of work progress since previous meeting.

3. Field observations, problems, conflicts.

4. Problems which impede construction schedule.

5. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules.

6. Review of construction interfacing and sequencing requirements with other

construction contracts.

7. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule.

8. Revisions to construction schedule.

9. Progress, schedule, during succeeding work period.

10. Coordination of schedules.

11. Review submittal schedules.

12. Maintenance of quality standards.

13. Pending changes and substitutions.

14. Review proposed changes for:

a. Effect on construction schedule and on completion date.

b. Effect on other contracts of the Project.

15. Review Record Documents.

16. Review monthly pay request.

17. Review status of RFIs.

01200-4



END OF SECTION

01300-1

SECTION 01300

SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS

A. This Section specifies the general methods and requirements of submissions applicable

to Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and Construction or Submittal Schedules.

Additional general submission requirements are contained in Article 6.17 of the General

Conditions. Detailed submittal requirements are specified in the technical sections.

B. All submittals shall be clearly identified by reference to Section Number, Paragraph,

Drawing Number or Detail as applicable. Submittals shall be clear and legible and of

sufficient size for presentation of data.

1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES

A. Shop Drawings

1. Shop drawings as specified in individual Sections include, custom-prepared data

such as fabrication and erection/installation (working) drawings, scheduled

information, setting diagrams, actual shop work manufacturing instructions, custom

templates, special wiring diagrams, coordination drawings, individual system or

equipment inspection and test reports including performance curves and

certifications, as applicable to the work.

2. All shop drawings submitted by subcontractors shall be sent directly to the

Contractor for checking. The Contractor shall be responsible for their submission

at the proper time so as to prevent delays in delivery of materials.

3. Check all subcontractor's shop drawings regarding measurements, size of members,

materials and details to make sure that they conform to the intent of the Drawings

and related Sections. Return shop drawings found to be inaccurate or otherwise in

error to the subcontractors for correction before submission thereof.

4. All details on shop drawings shall show clearly the relation of the various parts to

the main members and lines of the structure and where correct fabrication of the

work depends upon field measurements, such measurements shall be made and

noted on the drawings before being submitted.

5. Submittals for equipment specified under Divisions 11, and 16 shall include a

listing of all installations where identical or similar equipment has been installed

and been in operation for a period of at least one year.

01300-2

B. Product Data

1. Product data as specified in individual Sections include, standard prepared data for

manufactured products (sometimes referred to as catalog data), such as the

manufacturer's product specification and installation instructions, availability of

colors and patterns, manufacturer's printed statements of compliances and

applicability, roughing-in diagrams and templates, catalog cuts, product

photographs, standard wiring diagrams, printed performance curves and

operational-range diagrams, production or quality control inspection and test reports

and certifications, mill reports, product operating and maintenance instructions and

recommended spare-parts listing and printed product warranties, as applicable to

the work.

C. Samples

1. Samples specified in individual Sections include, physical examples of the work

such as sections of manufactured or fabricated work, small cuts or containers of

materials, complete units of repetitively-used products, color/texture/pattern

swatches and range sets, specimens for coordination of visual effect, graphic

symbols and units of work to be used by the Engineer or Owner for independent

inspection and testing, as applicable to the work.

1.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Review shop drawings, product data and samples, including those by subcontractors,

prior to submission to determine and verify the following:

1. Equipment (or field) measurements

2. Equipment (or field) construction criteria

3. Catalog numbers and similar data

4. Conformance with related Sections

B. Each shop drawing, sample and product data submitted by the Contractor shall have

affixed to it the following Certification Statement including the Contractor's Company

name and signed by the Contractor: "Certification Statement: by this submittal, I hereby

represent that I have determined and verified all equipment (or field) measurements,

equipment (or field) construction criteria, materials, dimensions, catalog numbers and

similar data and I have checked and coordinated each item with other applicable

approved shop drawings and all Contract requirements." Shop drawings and product

data sheets 11-in x 17-in and smaller shall be bound together in an orderly fashion and

bear the above Certification Statement on the cover sheet. The cover sheet shall fully

describe the packaged data and include a listing of all items within the package. Provide

01300-3

to the Resident Project Representative a copy of each transmittal sheet for shop

drawings, product data and samples at the time of submittal to the Engineer.

C. The Contractor shall utilize a 10-character submittal identification numbering system in

the following manner:

1. The first character shall be a D, S, P or M which represents Shop/Working Drawing

and other Product Data (D), Sample (S), Preliminary Submittal (P) or Operating/

Maintenance Manual (M).

2. The next five digits shall be the applicable Section Number.

3. The next three digits shall be the numbers 001 to 999 to sequentially number each

initial separate item or drawing submitted under each specific Section Number.

4. The last character shall be a letter, A to Z, indicating the submission, or

resubmission of the same Drawing, i.e., "A=1st submission, B=2nd submission,

C=3rd submission, etc. A typical submittal number would be as follows:

D-03300-008-B

D. = Shop Drawing

03300 = Section for Concrete

008 = The eighth initial submittal under this section

B. = The second submission (first resubmission) of that particular shop

drawing]

D. Notify the Engineer in writing, at the time of submittal, of any deviations in the

submittals from the requirements of the Contract Documents.

E. The review and approval of shop drawings, samples or product data by the Engineer

shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for the fulfillment of the terms of

the Contract. All risks of error and omission are assumed by the Contractor and the

Engineer will have no responsibility therefor.

F. No portion of the work requiring a shop drawing, sample, or product data shall be

started nor shall any materials be fabricated prior to the approval or qualified approval

of such item. Fabrication performed or materials purchased accomplished which does

not conform to approved shop drawings and data shall be at the Contractor's risk. The

Owner will not be liable for any expense or delay due to corrections or remedies

required to accomplish conformity.

G. Project work, materials, and fabrication shall conform with approved shop drawings,

applicable samples, and product data.

1.04 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

01300-4

A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule and in such sequence

as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of any other contractor.

B. Each submittal, appropriately coded, will be returned within 15 calendar days following

receipt of submittal by the Engineer. Except as noted below:

1. Contractor shall allow 30 calendar days following receipt of submittal by the

Engineer for Section 11093 and Section 16450.

C. Number of submittals required:

1. Shop Drawings: Six copies.

2. Product Data: Three copies.

3. Samples: Submit the number stated in the respective Sections.

D. Submittals shall contain:

1. The date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions.

2. The Project title and number.

3. Contractor identification.

4. The names of:

a. Contractor

b. Supplier

c. Manufacturer

5. Identification of the product, with the section number, page and paragraph(s).

6. Equipment (or field) dimensions, clearly identified as such.

7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials.

8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Standards numbers.

9. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents.

10. Identification of revisions on resubmittals.

11. A 8-in by 3-in blank space for Contractor and Engineer stamps.

01300-5

12. Where calculations are required to be submitted by the Contractor, the calculations

shall have been checked by a qualified individual other than the preparer. The

submitted calculations shall clearly show the names of the preparer and of the

checker.

1.05 REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND

SAMPLES

A. The review of shop drawings, data and samples will be for general conformance with

the design concept and Contract Documents. They shall not be construed:

1. as permitting any departure from the Contract requirements;

2. as relieving the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, including details,

dimensions, and materials;

3. as approving departures from details furnished by the Engineer, except as otherwise

provided herein.

B. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy, for coordinating the work

with all other associated work and trades, for selecting fabrication processes, for

techniques of assembly, and for performing work in a safe manner.

C. If the shop drawings, data or samples as submitted describe variations and show a

departure from the Contract requirements which Engineer finds to be in the interest of

the Owner and to be so minor as not to involve a change in Contract Price or Contract

Time, the Engineer may return the reviewed drawings without noting an exception.

D. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor under one of the following codes.

Code 1 - "APPROVED" is assigned when there are no notations or comments on the

submittal. When returned under this code the Contractor may release the

equipment and/or material for manufacture.

Code 2 - "APPROVED AS NOTED" - This code is assigned when a confirmation of

the notations and comments IS NOT required by the Contractor. The

Contractor may release the equipment or material for manufacture; however,

all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final product.

Code 3 - "APPROVED AS NOTED/CONFIRM" - This combination of codes is

assigned when a confirmation of the notations and comments IS required by

the Contractor. The Contractor may, at his own risk, release the equipment

or material for manufacture; however, all notations and comments must be

incorporated into the final product. This confirmation shall specifically

address each omission and nonconforming item that was noted.

01300-6

Confirmation is to be received by the Engineer within 10 calendar days of the

date of the Engineer's transmittal requiring the confirmation.

Code 4 - "APPROVED AS NOTED/RESUBMIT" - This combination of codes is

assigned when notations and comments are extensive enough to require a

resubmittal of the package. This resubmittal is to address all comments,

omissions and non-conforming items that were noted. Resubmittal is to be

received by the Engineer within 15 calendar days of the date of the

Engineer's transmittal requiring the resubmittal.

Code 5 - "NOT APPROVED" is assigned when the submittal does not meet the intent

of the Contract Documents. The Contractor must resubmit the entire package

revised to bring the submittal into conformance. It may be necessary to

resubmit using a different manufacturer/vendor to meet the Contract

Documents.

Code 6 - "COMMENTS ATTACHED" is assigned where there are comments attached

to the returned submittal which provide additional data to aid the Contractor.

Code 7 - "RECEIPT ACKNOWLEDGED" - This code is assigned to acknowledge

receipt of a submittal that is not subject to the Engineer’s review and

approval; and, is being filed for informational purposes only. This code is

generally used in acknowledging receipt of means and methods of

construction work plan, field conformance test reports, and Health and Safety

plans.

Codes 1 through 5 designate the status of the reviewed submittal with Code 6 showing

there has been an attachment of additional data.

E. Resubmittals will be handled in the same manner as first submittals. On resubmittals

the Contractor shall identify all revisions made to the submittals, either in writing on the

letter of transmittal or on the shop drawings by use of revision triangles or other similar

methods. The resubmittal shall clearly respond to each comment made by the Engineer

on the previous submission. Additionally, the Contractor shall direct specific attention

to any revisions made other than the corrections requested by the Engineer on previous

submissions.

F. Partial submittals may not be reviewed. The Engineer will be the only judge as to the

completeness of a submittal. Submittals not complete will be returned to the Contractor

and will be considered "Not Approved" until resubmitted. The Engineer may at his

option provide a list or mark the submittal directing the Contractor to the areas that are

incomplete.

G. Repetitive Review

01300-7

1. Shop drawings and other submittals will be reviewed no more than twice at the

Owner's expense. All subsequent reviews will be performed at times convenient to

the Engineer and at the Contractor's expense, based on the Engineer's then

prevailing rates. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all such fees

invoiced to the Owner by the Engineer. Submittals are required until approved.

2. Any need for more than one resubmission, or any other delay in obtaining

Engineer's review of submittals, will not entitle Contractor to extension of the

Contract Time.

H. If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the shop drawings to constitute a

change to the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall give written notice thereof to

the Engineer at least 7 working days prior to release for manufacture.

I. When the shop drawings have been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the

Contractor shall carry out the manufacture of products in accordance therewith and shall

make no further changes therein except upon written instructions from the Engineer.

1.06 DISTRIBUTION

A. Distribute reproductions of approved shop drawings and copies of approved product

data and samples, where required, to the job site file and elsewhere as directed by the

Engineer. Number of copies shall be as directed by the Engineer but shall not exceed

six.

1.07 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. The Contractor shall, within 15 days after the Notice to Proceed to provide and submit

to the Engineer for approval, the Schedule he plans to maintain in order to successfully

construct the work within the time allotted. The Contractor shall coordinate that

products are manufactured and delivered to the construction site so that work can be

constructed within the time allotted. The Contractor’s Schedule shall include a Critical

Path Network and a Computer generated print-out. The Schedule shall account for all

Installation Contract work in addition to the work of the Contractor. In addition to all

reasonably important construction activities, the Schedule shall provide for the proper

sequence of construction considering the various crafts, purchasing time, submittal

approval, material delivery, equipment fabrication, and similar time consuming factors.

B. The Schedule shall include as a minimum, the earliest starting and finish dates, latest

starting and finish dates, and the total float for each task or item. The Contractor shall

update (monitor) and rerun the Schedule at least monthly and shall submit to the

Engineer the Network and Computer print-out, both in duplicate, at the same time the

pay estimate is prepared. The Schedule shall contain all of the items of the Periodic

Estimate and Pay Schedule. The Contractor shall prepare schedule updates for products

specified and supplied in the Contract such that the

01300-8

C. The monthly Schedule update (monitoring) shall include the following items:

1. Network

a. Identify activities that are completed or in process by contrasting heavy lines.

Each activity worked on should be proportional to the percentage of progress

achieved to date.

b. Identify restraints imposed by material deliveries, precedent activity durations

or schedule adjustments on the monthly update of the Network.

2. Computer Print-out

a. Show the percentage progress status of each activity. The percentage progress

status will be used to support each Contractor's periodic pay estimate.

b. Show actual start and completion dates.

c. Flag all activities started and in progress.

D. Supplemental to the Critical Path Schedule, the Contractor shall provide a detailed work

schedule, projected at least a month in advance. The implementation of the work

schedule and the coordination required will constitute the basic agenda of the

coordination and planning meetings.

1.08 PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER (P.E.) CERTIFICATION FORM

A. If specifically required in other related Sections, submit a State of Arkansas P.E.

Certification for each item required, in the form attached to this Section, completely

filled in and stamped.

1.09 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination of Submittal Times: Prepare and transmit each submittal sufficiently in

advance of performing the related work or other applicable activities, or within the time

specified in the individual work of other related Sections, so that the installation will not

be delayed by processing times including disapproval and resubmittal (if required),

coordination with other submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery and similar

sequenced activities. No extension of time will be authorized because of the

Contractor's failure to transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of the Work.



END OF SECTION

01300-9

P.E. CERTIFICATION FORM

The undersigned hereby certifies that he/she is a professional engineer registered in the State of

Arkansas and that he/she has been employed by

______________________________________________________________________ to design

(Name of Contractor)

_____________________________________________________________________________

(Insert P.E. Responsibilities)

in accordance with Section __________________________________________________ for the

____________________________________________________________________________.

(Name of Project)

The undersigned further certifies that he/she has performed the design of the

_________________

____________________________________________________, that said design is in

conformance

Name of Project)

with all applicable local, state and federal codes, rules, and regulations, and that his/her signature

and P.E. stamp have been affixed to all calculations and drawings used in, and resulting from, the

design.

The undersigned hereby agrees to make all original design drawings and calculations available to

the

______________________________________________________________________________

(Insert Name of Owner)

or Owner's representative within seven days following written request therefor by the Owner.

___________________________________ ___________________________________

P.E. Name Contractor's Name

___________________________________ ___________________________________

Signature Signature

___________________________________ ___________________________________

Address Title

___________________________________

Address

01370-1

SECTION 01370

SCHEDULE OF VALUES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Within 10 days of the date of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the

Owner or Owner’s Designated Agent in triplicate a tentative schedule of values (a

breakdown of the bid) for the purpose of developing a Schedule of Values, which in

turn shall be used to determine partial pay estimates and may be used to verify costs of

credits, change orders, etc.

1. The tentative schedule of values will be reviewed by the Owner or Owner’s

Designated Agent to determine whether, in his judgment, it is sufficiently detailed

for the purpose intended. The Owner or Owner’s Designated Agent will also

evaluate the schedule to determine whether, in his judgment, the prices included

are “unbalanced” or “front-end loaded,” in an effort to inflate the prices of those

items of Work to be completed in the early stages of the Work.

2. The Owner or Owner’s Designated Agent will provide the Contractor with his

comments and may request additional information from the Contractor to justify

certain item quantities and prices. On the basis of the comments by the Owner or

Owner’s Designated Agent, the Contractor shall revise and resubmit the tentative

schedule of values for further review and approval.

3. Once the tentative schedule is approved by the Owner or Owner’s Designated

Agent, it shall become the Schedule of Values to be used in determining partial

payment estimates. Twenty copies of this Schedule of Values shall be submitted

to the Owner or Owner’ Designated Agent for distribution and his use.

4. No partial payment request (including the first) will be approved until the

Schedule of Values has been approved by the Owner or Owner’s Designated

Agent.

B. In so far as possible, total quantities and unit prices shall be shown for all items of

Work, separating for each item the materials and labor and such other sub-items as the

Contractor may desire. “Lump sum,” “miscellaneous,” and other such general entries in

the schedule shall be avoided whenever possible.

C. Such items as Bond premiums, insurance, temporary facilities, and equipment storage

may be listed separately in the Schedule of Values, provided the costs can be

substantiated. Overhead and profit shall not be listed as separate items.

D. Each item of Work that has an installed value of more than $5,000 shall be listed in the

Schedule of Values.

01370-2

E. The value for mobilization shall not exceed 3 percent of the Contract Price.

F. The sum of the prices of the items listed in the Schedule of Values shall equal the

Contract Price. No additional payment will be allowed if the quantities shown on the

Schedule of Values are less than those actually required to accomplish the Work, unless

the quantities are altered by a Change Order.

G. Each partial payment request by the Contractor shall include the approved Schedule of

Values, modified to indicate the total quantity and price of Work completed to the date

of the request.

H. The approved Schedule of Values will also be used as a guide in determining the value

of work involved in change orders.

I. It is the Owner’s intent that the Schedule of Values can also be used as a fair and

expedient method of deleting items from the Work, should the Owner so desire.

Therefore, it is the Contractor’s responsibility, as well as to his advantage, to make the

schedule as detailed and the items and their corresponding values as equitably

determined and presented as possible.

1.02 FORECASTS OF PAYMENTS

A. Within 30 days of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner of

Owner’ Designated Agent a chart forecasting the monthly partial payment amounts that

are anticipated for the Project. During progress of the job, mark this chart to show

actual payments to date, revise the forecast of payments as necessary, and submit the

revised chart to the Owner or Owner’s Designated Agent monthly.



END OF SECTION

01700-1

SECTION 01700

CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section outlines the procedure to be followed in closing out the Contract.

1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. The Substantial Completion dates shall be established as stated in the Contract.

1.03 FINAL CLEANING

A. At the completion of work and immediately prior to final inspection, cleaning of the

entire project shall be accomplished according to the following provisions:

1. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean, sweep, wash, and polish all work and

equipment provided under the Contract, including finishes. The cleaning shall

leave the structures and site in a complete and finished condition to the

satisfaction of the Engineer.

2. All Subcontractors shall similarly perform, at the same time, an equivalent

thorough cleaning of all work and equipment provided under their contracts.

3. The Contractor shall remove all temporary structures and debris, including all

dirt, sand, gravel, rubbish and waste material. See Section 01500, Temporary

Facilities.

4. Should the Contractor not remove rubbish or debris, or not clean the buildings

and site as specified above, the Owner reserves the right to have the cleaning

done at the expense of the Contractor.

B. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned.

C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material

manufacturers.

D. In preparation for substantial completion or occupancy, conduct final inspection of

sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces, and of concealed spaces.

E. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from

sight-exposed interior and exterior finished surfaces. Polish surfaces so designated to

shine finish.

01700-2

F. Repair, patch, and touch up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent

surfaces.

G. Replace air-handling filters if units were operated during construction.

H. Vacuum clean all interior spaces, including inside cabinets. Broom clean paved

surfaces, rake clean other surfaces of grounds.

I. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible. Do not drop

or throw materials from heights.

J. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from

cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

1.04 FINAL INSPECTION

A. After final cleaning and restoration and upon written notice from the Contractor that the

work is completed, the Engineer will make a preliminary inspection with the Owner

and the Contractor present. Upon completion of this preliminary inspection, the

Engineer will notify the Contractor, in writing, of any particulars in which this

inspection reveals that the work is defective or incomplete.

B. Upon receiving written notice from the Engineer, the Contractor shall immediately

undertake the work required to remedy deficiencies and complete the work to the

satisfaction of the Engineer.

C. When the Contractor has corrected or completed the items as listed in the Engineer’s

written notice, he shall inform the Engineer, in writing, that the required work has been

completed. Upon receipt of this notice, the Engineer, in the presence of the Owner and

the Contractor, will make his final inspection of the project.

D. Should the Engineer find all work satisfactory at the time of his inspection, the

Contractor will be allowed to make application for final payment. Should the Engineer

still find deficiencies in the work, the Engineer will inform the Contractor of the

deficiencies and will deny the Contractor’s request for final payment until such time as

the Contractor has satisfactorily completed the required work.

1.05 FINAL SUBMITTALS

A. No application for final payment will be accepted until all submittals have been made

and approved by the Engineer, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Final shop drawings.

01700-3

2. Project Record Documents.

3. All interface information.

4. All Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

5. All required indices and schedules.

6. All Manufacturers’ Certificates of Proper Installation.

7. All construction photographs, including those of the completed project.

8. All State required submittals.

9. Certificate that all outstanding debts are paid and that there are no liens on the

Project.

1.06 ACCESSORY ITEMS

A. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner, upon acceptance of the equipment, all

special accessories required to place each item of equipment in full operation. These

special accessory items include, but are not limited to, the specified spare parts,

adequate oil and grease as required for the first lubrication of the equipment, initial fill-

up of all chemical tanks and fuel tanks, light bulbs, fuses, hydrant wrenches, valve

wrenches, valve keys, handwheels, and other expendable items as required for initial

start-up and operation of all equipment.

1.07 GUARANTEES, BONDS, AND AFFIDAVITS

A. No application for final payment will be accepted until all guarantees, bonds,

certificates, licenses, and affidavits required for work or equipment as specified are

satisfactorily filed with the Engineer.

1.08 RELEASE OF LIENS OR CLAIMS

A. No application for final payment will be accepted until satisfactory evidence of release

of liens has been submitted to the Owner as required by the General Condition.

1.09 FINAL PAYMENT

A. Final payment will be made to the Contractor in accordance with the Agreement.



01700-4

END OF SECTION

NATURAL GAS SYSTEM 220160-1

SECTION 220160 - NATURAL GAS SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section covers the complete natural gas system installation, within and to five (5) feet

beyond building perimeter unless noted otherwise on Contract Drawings, including but not

limited to piping, regulators, unions, valves, installation, testing and other normal parts that

make the systems complete, operable, code compliant and acceptable to the authorities

having jurisdiction.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless

identified by a specific edition date.

B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be

applicable to this Project.

C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements

and standards addressed within the following references:

D. 2015 Edition of the International Fuel Gas Code.

E. Latest Edition of NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All materials, equipment and Work shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and

local requirements and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Valves: Manufacturer’s name, size, standards compliance and pressure rating clearly

marked on outside of valve body.

C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable state labor

regulations.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

B. Provide code and standards compliance verification, manufacturer's product data and

ratings on pipe materials, pipe fittings, regulators, valves and accessories.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE and HANDLING

A. Accept valves on Site in shipping containers with labeling in place, inspect for damage and

store with a minimum of handling. Store plastic piping under cover out of direct sunlight.

Do not store materials directly on the ground.

B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.


C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until

installation.

D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing

sections of the work and isolating parts of completed system.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide one (1) plug valve wrench for every ten (10) plug valves sized 2 inches and

smaller, minimum of one. Provide each plug valve sized 2-1/2 inches and larger with a

wrench incorporating a setscrew.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and

local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Natural gas pressures shall not exceed five (5) pounds per square inch gauge on Owner’s

side of the meter.

C. Pipe joint compound shall be lead-free, non-toxic, non-hardening, insoluble in the presence

of natural gas and compliant with ANSI/NSF 61 and Federal Specification TT-S-1732.

Temperature service range of -15 degrees F to +400 degrees F, manufactured by Hercules

“MegaLoc” or approved equal by Rectorseal, La-Co or Oatey.

2.2 PIPING

A. Buried Piping Outside of Building:

1. Polyethylene, SDR-11, ASTM D2513 pipe and fittings with heat fusion socket

joints.

2. Polyethylene pipe and fitting materials shall be compatible and by same

manufacturer to ensure uniform melting and a proper bond. Fabricated fittings shall

not be used.

3. Provide connection between buried plastic gas service piping and metallic riser in

accordance with the gas code. Provide metallic riser consisting of HDPE fused

coating on steel pipe for connection to above ground building distribution piping.

Underground horizontal metallic portion of riser shall be at least twenty four inches

in length before connecting to the plastic service pipe. An approved transition

fitting or adaptor meeting design pressure rating and plastic pipe manufacturers

recommendations shall be used where the plastic joins the metallic riser.

B. Above Ground Piping Outside of Building (Including roof):

1. Piping 2 inches and smaller shall be seamless Schedule 40 black steel, ASTM

A106 or ASTM A53 Type "S", Grade A or B, with Class 150 black malleable iron

threaded fittings conforming to ASME B16.3.


2. Piping 2½ inches and larger shall be Type "S" seamless or Type "E" electric

resistance welded Schedule 40 black steel, ASTM A53, Grade A or B, with

Schedule 40 wrought carbon steel fittings, ASTM A 234 and butt weld joints.

3. Provide factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE or field

applied primer and epoxy paint coating on all pipe and fittings. Field applied

coating is restricted to fittings and short sections of pipe necessarily stripped for

threading or welding. Field coating shall be manufactured by Amercoat Type 240

or approved equal and applied in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations. Galvanizing shall not be considered adequate protection.

2.3 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Minimum 3 inch wide polyethylene detectable type marking tape. The tape shall be

resistant to alkalis, acids and other destructive agents found in soil and impregnated with

metal so that it can be readily recognized after burial by standard locating equipment.

B. Lamination bond of one (1) layer of Minimum 0.35 mils thick aluminum foil between two

(2) layers of minimum 4.3 mils thick inert plastic film.

C. Minimum tensile strength: 63 LBS per 3 IN width.

D. Minimum elongation: 500 percent.

E. Provide continuous yellow with black letter printed message repeated every 16 to 36 inches

warning of pipe buried below (e.g.: "CAUTION GAS LINE BURIED BELOW").

F. Manufactured by Reef Industries “Terra Tape” or approved equal.

2.4 VALVES

A. All valves shall be designed, manufactured and approved for natural gas service.

B. Line Shut-off Valves sizes 2 inches and smaller shall be iron body lubricated plug valve

conforming to ASTM-A-126, U.L. Listed and A.G.A. Approved for natural gas service

with threaded ends, wrench operation, rated for 200 WOG service pressure and –20 to 200

degrees F., manufactured by Resun Model R-1430, Nordstrom Model 142, or approved

equal.

C. Line Shut-off Valves sizes 2½ inches and larger shall be iron body lubricated plug valve

conforming to ASTM-A-126, U.L. Listed and A.G.A. Approved for natural gas service

with flanged ends, wrench operation, rated for 200 WOG service pressure and –20 to 200

degrees F., manufactured by Resun Model R-143, Nordstrom Model 143, or approved

equal.

D. Appliance/Equipment Shut-off Valves at local connections sizes 2 inches and smaller shall

be bronze body, full port ball or butterfly type, U.L. Listed and A.G.A. Approved for

natural gas service with threaded ends, quarter turn lever handle operation, rated for 175

W.O.G. service pressure and 30 to 275 degrees F., manufactured by Nibco Model T585-70-

UL, Model T580-70-UL, Milwaukee Model BB2-100, or approved equal.


E. Manual Emergency Shut-off Valves sizes 2 inches and smaller shall be bronze body, full

port ball or butterfly type, U.L. Listed and A.G.A. Approved for natural gas service with

threaded ends, quarter turn lever handle operation, rated for 175 W.O.G. service pressure

and 30 to 275 degrees F., manufactured by Nibco Model T585-70-UL, Model T580-70-UL,

Milwaukee Model BB2-100, or approved equal.

F. Automatic Emergency Shut-off Valves shall be U.L. Listed F.M. Approved for natural gas

service, 2-way electrically tripped solenoid type; fail safe closed; manual reset; Type 1

solenoid enclosure; NBR seals and disc; stainless steel core tube and springs; copper coil;

manufactured by ASCO Red Hat Series 8044, or approved equal.

2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. All pressure regulators shall be designed, manufactured and approved for natural gas

service.

B. Pressure regulators for individual service lines shall be capable of reducing distribution line

pressure to pressures required for users. Pressure relief shall be set at a lower pressure than

would cause unsafe operation of any connected user. Regulator shall have a single port with

orifice diameter no greater than that recommended by manufacturer for the maximum gas

pressure at the regulator inlet. Regulator vent valve shall be of resilient materials designed

to withstand flow conditions when pressed against valve port. Regulator shall be capable of

limiting build-up of pressure under no-flow conditions to 50 percent or less of the discharge

pressure maintained under flow conditions. Commercial grade diaphragm type with internal

relief valve, vent valve, cast iron body, Buna-N diaphragm. Manufactured by Rockwell or

Fisher.

C. Install pressure gauge adjacent to and downstream of each line pressure regulator.

2.6 UNIONS

A. Unions in 2 inches and smaller in ferrous lines shall be right and left hand nipple/coupling

assembly, or ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,

and threaded ends, 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be ground flange unions. Companion

flanges on lines at various items of equipment, machines and pieces of apparatus may serve

as unions to permit disconnection of piping.

B. Unions connecting ferrous pipe to copper or brass pipe shall be dielectric type.

C. Above grade flexible stainless steel appliance/equipment connectors shall conform with

AGA under the ANSI Z21.69 Standard. Hose shall be braided stainless steel with a

polyolefin heat-shrink tubing with high flame-retardant qualities. Hose shall be equipped

with malleable iron unions and spring loaded brass quick-link couplings. An easily

accessible manual shut-off valve shall be installed ahead of all hose connections. Specify

T&S Brass "Safe-T-Link" or approved equal.

2.7 FLANGES


A. All 150 lb. and 300 lb. ANSI flanges shall be domestically manufactured, weld neck forged

carbon steel, conforming to ANSI B16.5 and ASTM A-181 Grade I or II or A-105-71. Slip

on flanges shall not be used. Each fitting shall be stamped as specified by ANSI B16.9 and,

in addition, shall have the laboratory control number stenciled on each fitting for ready

reference as to physical properties and chemical composition of the material. Flanges shall

have the manufacturer’s trademark permanently identified in accordance with MSS SP-25.

Bolts used shall be carbon steel bolts with semi-finished hexagon nuts of American

Standard Heavy dimensions. Bolts shall have a tensile strength of 60,000 psi and an elastic

limit of 30,000 psi. Flat-faced flanges shall be required to match flanges on check valves,

strainers, and other valves and devices. Only one manufacturer of weld flanges will be

approved.

B. All flanges shall be gasketed. Contractor shall place gasket between flanges of flanged

joints. Gaskets shall fit within the bolt circle on raised face flanges and shall be full face on

flat face flanges. Gaskets shall be cut from 1/16 inch thick, non metallic, non asbestos

gasket material suitable for operating temperatures from -150 degrees F to +75 degrees F,

Klingersil C-4400, Manville Style 60 service sheet packing, or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe ends and remove cutting burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove cutting oil, scale and dirt, on inside and outside of piping, before assembly.

3.2 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Provide specified connections, shutoff valves, regulators and unions at each and every

appliance and piece of equipment requiring natural gas.

B. Provide and install union type connections at all equipment to permit removal of service

piping.

C. Gas service connections shall have a diameter at least one pipe size larger than that of the

inlet connection to the equipment as provided by the manufacturer and be of adequate size

to provide the total input demand of the connected equipment.

D. Provide listed and labeled appliance connectors complying with ANSI Z21.69 and listed for

use with food service equipment having casters, or that is otherwise subject to movement

for cleaning, and other large movable equipment. Connectors shall have listed and labeled

quick-disconnect devices and shall have retaining cables attached to structures and

equipment. Connectors shall not be concealed within or extended through wall, floor or

partition and shall be located entirely in the same room as the connected equipment.

Provide an accessible shut-off valve not less than the nominal size of the equipment

connector, immediately ahead of the connector.

E. Rigid metallic pipe and fittings shall be used at service connections to all stationary

equipment.

3.3 INSTALLATION


A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements,

referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations.

C. Provide support for and connections to natural gas service meter in accordance with

requirements of the utility company, when so indicated on the Drawings.

D. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations.

E. Distribution piping shall be as short and as direct as practicable between the point of

delivery and the outlets.

F. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.

G. Bury all underground piping at least 3 feet below finished grade. Provide a continuous

detectable warning tape on tamped backfill, 12 inches above all buried non-metallic gas

lines.

H. Do not install gas piping in the same trench with other utilities. The minimum horizontal

clearance between gas pipe and parallel utility pipe shall be 2 feet. Do not install gas pipe

through catch basins, vaults, manholes or similar underground structures.

I. Install and support all polyethylene piping in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations. All heat fusion welds shall be performed by welders qualified to the

manufacturer’s procedures.

J. Polyethylene piping shall not be installed above ground.

K. Provide connection between buried plastic gas piping and metallic riser in accordance with

the gas code.

L. All above ground gas piping shall be electrically continuous and bonded to electrical

system ground conductor in accordance with NFPA 70.

M. Provide and install union type fittings at proper points to permit dismantling or removal of

pipe. No unions will be required in welded lines except at equipment connections. Where

union type fittings are necessary for piping dismantling purposes, right and left nipples and

couplings shall be used. Flanges, ground-joint unions or approved flexible appliance

connectors may be used at exposed fixture, appliance or equipment connections.

N. Provide dielectric isolation device where copper lines connect to ferrous lines or

equipment, such as dielectric coupling or dielectric flange fitting.

O. Valves, regulators, flanges, union type fittings and similar appurtenances shall be accessible

for operation and servicing and shall not be located above ceilings, within chases,

walls/partitions, spaces utilized as return air plenums or non-accessible locations.

P. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Install piping to conserve building

space. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

Q. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or

connected equipment.


R. Make service connections at the top of the main, whenever the depth of the main is

sufficient to allow top connections. When service connections cannot be made at the top of

the main, they shall be made on the side of the main no lower than the horizontal midpoint

of the gas main.

S. Close nipples, bushing and cross type fittings shall not be installed in any gas piping

system.

T. Slope piping and arrange to drain at low points. Install drip/sediment traps at points where

condensate and debris may collect. Locate drip/sediment traps where readily accessible for

cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing.

Construct drip/sediment traps using tee fitting with capped nipple connected to bottom

outlet. Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 4 inches long, and

same size as connected pipe. Cap shall be screwed pattern, black, standard weight,

malleable iron. Install with adequate space for removal of cap.

U. Install valves for shut off and to isolate equipment, parts of systems, or vertical risers. All

valves shall be located such that servicing and operation is possible. All flanged valves

shown in horizontal lines with the valve stem shall be positioned so that the valve stem is

inclined one bolt hole above the horizontal position. Screw pattern valves placed in

horizontal lines shall be installed with their valve stems inclined at an angle of a minimum

of 30 degrees above the horizontal position. All valves must be true and straight at the time

the system is tested and inspected for final acceptance.

V. Install line shut-off valve at each branch connection to riser.

W. Provide adequate clearance for access to and operation of all valves.

X. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted unless required otherwise by

the valve manufacturer.

Y. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves and pipe casing sleeves to the exterior of the

building and terminated with outlet turned down and capped with corrosion resistant insect

screen. Vent terminations shall be at least seven feet above grade or pedestrian traffic and a

minimum three (3) feet above or twenty-five (25) feet horizontally from all air intakes or

building openings.

Z. Above ground horizontal natural gas and encasement piping shall be supported at intervals

of no greater than 6 foot for 1/2 inch piping, 8 foot for 3/4 inch and 1 inch piping and 10

foot for 1-1/4 inches and larger piping. Vertical piping shall be supported at each floor level

and at intervals as specified for horizontal piping.

AA. Extension bars shall not be used for supporting gas or encasement piping. Gas or

encasement piping shall not be used to support any other piping or component.

BB. Provide piping and valve identification in accordance with Project Specification Section 20

05 53.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF WELDED PIPING


A. Welding of pipe in normally occupied buildings is prohibited. Off-Site welding is

acceptable. Should welding be required in a normally occupied building for connecting to

an existing welded system, obtain written approval from the Owner and comply with

Owner’s fire and life safety requirements.

B. Piping and fittings shall be welded and fabricated in accordance with ASME/ANSI the

latest editions of Standard B32.1 for all systems from the Code for Pressure Piping.

Machine beveling in shop is preferred. Field beveling may be done by flame cutting to

recognized standards.

C. Ensure complete penetration of deposited metal with base metal. Provide filler metal

suitable for use with base metal. Maintain inside of fittings free from globules of weld

metal. All welded pipe joints shall be made by the fusion welding process, employing a

metallic arc or gas welding process. All pipes shall have the ends beveled 37-½ inch

degrees and all joints shall be aligned true before welding. Except as specified otherwise,

all changes in direction, intersection of lines, reduction in pipe size and the like shall be

made with factory-fabricated welding fittings. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of

straight runs to form tees, or any similar construction will not be permitted.

D. Align piping and equipment so that no part is offset more than 1/16 inch. Set all fittings and

joints square and true and preserve alignment during welding operation. Use of alignment

rods inside pipe is prohibited.

E. Contractor shall not permit any weld to project within the pipe so as to restrict it. Tack

welds, if used, must be of the same material and made by the same procedure as the

completed weld. Otherwise, remove tack welded during welding operation.

F. Do not split, bend, flatten or otherwise damage piping before, during or after installation.

G. Remove dirt, scale and other foreign matter from the inside of piping, by swabbing or

flushing, prior to the connection of other piping sections, fittings, valves or equipment.

H. In no cases shall Schedule 40 pipe be welded with less than three passes including one

stringer/root, one filler and one lacer. Schedule 80 pipe shall be welded with not less than

four passes including one stringer/root, two filler and one lacer. In all cases, however, the

weld must be filled before the cap weld is added.

3.5 TESTING

A. All natural gas systems shall be inspected, tested, purged and placed into operation in

accordance with NFPA 54 and as required herein.

B. All necessary apparatus for conducting tests shall be furnished by the Contractor and

comply with the requirements of NFPA 54.

C. All new rough-in distribution piping and affected portions of existing systems connected to,

shall be subjected to a pneumatic test pressure utilizing clean, dry air and must be

demonstrated to be absolutely tight when subjected to the pressures and time durations

listed herein. All equipment and components designed for operating pressures of less than

the test pressure shall not be connected to the piping system during test.

D. Systems on which the normal operating pressure is less than 0.5 pounds per square inch

gauge (psig), the test pressure shall be 5.0 psig and the time interval shall be 30 minutes.


E. Systems on which the normal operating pressure is between 0.5 psig and 5.0 psig, the test

pressure shall be 1.5 times the normal operating pressure or 5.0 psig, whichever is greater,

and the time interval shall be 30 minutes.

F. Systems on which the normal operating pressure is 5.0 psig or greater, the test pressure

shall be 1.5 times the normal operating pressure, and the time interval shall be one (1) hour.

G. After testing is complete, the entire gas system shall be purged with dry nitrogen to

eliminate all air, debris and moisture from the piping before natural gas is introduced into

the system.

H. After successful results of pressure test and purging have been completed, a leakage test

shall be performed in accordance with NFPA 54 Appendix D.

I. Connect, inspect and purge gas utilization equipment, lab hook-ups and outlets, and place

into operation only after successful results of pressure test, leakage test and purging have

been completed and accepted.

J. Testing operations shall be repeated until gas-piping systems are absolutely tight at the

pneumatic test pressures indicated above.

K. Pressure test gas piping sleeve system with clean, dry compressed air at 15 psig by

temporarily sealing all openings between gas carrier pipe and sleeve and vent openings.

Sleeve systems must be demonstrated to be absolutely tight when subjected to this pressure

for a period of four hours.

END OF SECTION

23 00 10-1

SECTION 23 00 10 - MECHANICAL GENERAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings are diagrammatic, due to scale, and indicate the general arrangements

and geometric relationships of equipment, systems, and services. They are not

intended to show or indicate every offset, sequence, device, option, fitting, valve,

or accessory. Plan work around building details and other crafts. Do not scale

drawings for exact sizes and locations.

B. Contractor shall base all his measurements, both horizontal and vertical, from

established benchmarks. All work shall agree with these established lines and

levels. Contractor shall verify all measurements at site and check correctness as

related to the work.

C. In case of interferences between trades, Engineer will decide which work is to

take precedence regardless of work that might be installed.

1.02. CODES, ORDINANCES, INSPECTIONS AND PERMITS

A. Work is to be executed and inspected in accordance with local and State codes,

laws, ordinances, rules and regulations applicable to particular class of work,

including the State Mechanical Code, State Plumbing Code, State Gas Code, and

State Fire Code. Associated fees shall be paid by the Contractor.

B. Should any part of drawings or specifications be found to be in conflict with

applicable codes or ordinances, notify the Engineer, in writing, within 72 hours

prior to bid deadline for review and/or correction of bid documents. After project

bidding is closed, any discovery of code violations shall be promptly reported to

the Engineer. Any work performed in violation of applicable codes or ordinances

shall be corrected without additional expense to the Owner or his representatives.

C. Pressure and heating vessels, including hot water storage containers, shall be

constructed in compliance with the rules and regulations of the Boiler Inspection

Division of the State. All installations of such equipment shall be made by a firm

licensed and approved by the Boiler Inspection Division of the State.

D. Facilities shall be installed in compliance with the requirements of the current

version of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). Installation of mechanical

and plumbing systems including fixtures and control mounting heights, clear knee

space, and access clearances shall comply with ADA required dimensions, and as

shown on details or schedules when shown.

E. Contractor shall arrange with County, City or State, if City has no ordinances

covering work, for complete inspection, paying all charges required. Give proper

23 00 10-2

authority requisite notice relating the work; afford Engineer and authorized

inspectors adequate access to the Work for inspection; and be responsible for all

violations of law. Upon completion of work, have work inspected, if required,

obtaining certificates of inspection and approval from inspecting agency and

deliver certificates to Engineer and Owner.

1.03. REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE

A. With the submission of his bid, Contractor shall give written notice to the

Engineer of any materials or apparatus believed inadequate or unsuitable, in

violation of laws, ordinances, rules or regulations of Authorities having

jurisdiction, and any necessary items of work omitted. In the absence of such

written notice, it is mutually agreed that the Contractor has included the cost of all

required items in his proposal for a complete project.

B. Contractor shall acknowledge that he has examined the Plans, Specifications, and

Site, and that from his own investigation he has satisfied himself as to the nature

and location of the work; the general and local conditions, particularly those

bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling and storage or materials;

availability of labor, water, electric power, roads and uncertainties of weather; the

confirmation and condition of the ground; the characters, quality and quantity of

subsurface materials to be encountered; the character of equipment and facilities

needed preliminary to and during the execution of the Work, especially the

prohibited use of Owner’s permanent equipment, ductwork, and controls; all

federal, state, county, township and municipal laws, ordinances, and regulations

particularly those relating to employment of labor, wage rates, and construction

methods; and all other matters which can in any way affect the Work or the

associated cost of the Work under this Contract. Any failure by the Contractor to

acquaint himself with the available information concerning these conditions will

not relieve him from the responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty or

cost of successfully performing the work.

C. If, during the performance of the work, the Contractor finds a conflict, error or

discrepancy between or among one or more of the Sections or between or among

one or more Sections and the Drawings, furnish the higher performance

requirements. The higher performance requirement shall be considered the

equipment, material, device or installation method which represents the most

stringent option, the highest quality or the largest quantity.

1.04. USE OF THE OWNER’S EXISITNG AND NEW, PERMANENT HVAC SYSTEM

DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Use of the Owner’s existing and currently being installed, permanent HVAC

system during Construction is prohibited. Provide temporary means for heating

and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying completed

installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of

temperature and humidity. Provide temporary dehumidification systems when

23 00 10-3

required to reduce substrate moisture levels required to accommodate installation

or application of finishes.

B. Maintain a minimum ambient temperature of 50 DEG. F. in areas where

construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in the specifications.

C. Prevent dust, fumes, construction debris, and odors from entering existing and

newly installed HVAC equipment, ductwork, and control system components.

Prior to commencing work, isolate HVAC equipment. Where existing HVAC

systems will be affected, isolate existing supply, return, and exhaust ducts by

disconnecting ductwork at point where existing duct shall remain. Cover ends of

existing ductwork securely with black plastic material.

D. Newly installed ductwork shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation. Each

section that is installed at the end of the day shall have open ends securely

covered with black plastic material.

E. Newly installed HVAC equipment shall be securely covered and protected with

black plastic material or by other approved method. After installation of air

moving equipment, duct connections shall be securely covered with black plastic

material. Connections to duct systems shall not be made until final finishes have

been installed, areas served are clean, and building is ready for HVAC equipment

start-up and use.

F. Securely cover control system components to prevent damage from construction

debris, dust, and dirt. Control systems shall not be energized for testing and

adjusting until HVAC system start-up.

G. HVAC Equipment, Ductwork, and Control Components contaminated by

construction debris, dirt, and construction dust shall not be acceptable and shall be

replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. HVAC Equipment, Ductwork, and

Control components shall be kept clean throughout construction. Cleaning after

an HVAC system has been contaminated shall not be an acceptable alternate to

replacement.

1.05. SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's catalog sheets and/or shop drawings covering all phases of

work included in this Contract.

B. Arrange submittals in sets and bind in PDF format. Loose sheets are not

acceptable. Indicate for each item the location, system, or position where it is to

be used, arrange by equipment type and tab sections.

1. Individual submittal packages may be made for plumbing, HVAC, fire

protection, test and balance, and controls. The Contractor may submit up

to 5 different packages, but where practical provide all submittals in a

single PDF.

23 00 10-4

2. Items which are required to be resubmitted shall come in a single PDF.

Approved equipment is not required to be resubmitted.

3. The Contractor is responsible for verification that all items are submitted.

C. Submittals shall bear written certification to the effect that the Contractor has

examined them and found them to include all items required to be submitted and

to be in accordance with specifications.

D. Submittals are required even though equipment being furnished is exactly as

specified.

E. Submittals shall include all data required in individual sections of these

specifications.

F. Contractor is responsible for making all submittals required by the specifications

for approval. If equipment is delivered or installed without an approved submittal,

Contractor may be required to remove and replace equipment with specified and

approved equipment, as directed by the Engineer, without additional cost to the

project.

G. Exceptions for Submittals

1. Exceptions to the Specifications or Drawings shall be clearly defined in a

separate section of each submittal package. The submittal shall contain

the reason for the exception, the exact nature of the exception and the

proposed substitution so that a proper evaluation may be made by the

Engineer. The acceptability of any device or methodology submitted as an

“or equal” or “exception” to the Specifications shall be at the sole

discretion of the Engineer.

2. By noting the term “compliance”, it shall be understood that the

Contractor is in full compliance with the item specified and will provide

exactly the same with no deviations.

3. By noting the term “deviation”, it shall be understood that the Contractor

prefers to provide a different component in lieu of the one specified and in

so doing, takes full responsibility for making the equipment work as

specified and will provide any and all ancillary components to make the

equipment work at no extra cost to the Owner.

4. By noting the term “alternate”, it shall be understood that the manufacturer

proposes to provide the same operating function but prefers to do it in a

different manner and in so doing, takes full responsibility for making the

equipment work as specified and will provide necessary ancillary

components to make the equipment work at no extra cost to the Owner.

The alternate method shall be fully described with schematic diagrams and

one-line diagrams as applicable.

23 00 10-5

1.06. SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS

A. Final decision as to whether or not a specific piece of equipment meets

specifications shall rest with Engineer.

B. Substitution requests will not be accepted prior to bid.

C. Equipment and material manufacturers are referenced in the Plans and

Specifications to establish the basis of design and required standards.

D. With each Substitution Request, submit technical data that will fully establish the

equality of the proposed substitute product with that listed. Submit completed

Substitution Request Form.

E. Substitution Process

1. The naming of a manufacturer’s product with the words “basis of design”

or the naming of a single manufacturer’s product on a drawing equipment

schedule, on other drawings, or in the specifications, establishes that

specific product as the basis for design. In the absence of any other named

acceptable manufacturer’s product, provide the “basis of design” product.

No substitutions will be accepted.

2. Where other manufacturer’s names are listed on the drawings or in the

specifications as acceptable in addition to the “basis of design” product,

product acceptability for these manufacturers shall be verified via

submittal review after the project has bid. No other substitutions will be

accepted.

3. Where the words “include but shall not be limited to” or “or equal” are

used in addition to a manufacturer’s name or a list of manufacturer’s

names, product acceptability for these manufacturers shall be verified via

submittal review after the project has bid.

4. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all of the data necessary

to establish acceptability of the product.

5. The submittal for the substitution will be reviewed for conformance with

the specifications and equality to the specified products. Full submittals

will be required of all equipment. Substitution submittals will be reviewed

and shall be rejected if the proposed equipment is found to be different

than indicated on the Substitution Request Form, or is found deficient

compared to scheduled performance/or specifications.

F. Any proposed substitutions of equipment shall be accompanied by product

submittal and shop drawings showing revised equipment layouts, piping

diagrams, ductwork drawings and/or wiring diagrams. Where substituted

equipment furnished requires use of larger, more, or differently arranged

23 00 10-6

connections, such connections shall be installed to the complete satisfaction of

Engineer without additional cost to Owner.

G. The Contractor is responsible for full coordination of all changes required by

substituted equipment, including dimensional clearance.

H. The Contractor is responsible for all additional costs of equipment installation,

coordination and engineering which results from his substitution. This includes all

aspects of the work including architectural, structural, civil, electrical, and

mechanical. This also includes costs for the redesign time of Architects and

Engineers.

I. Costs associated with dimensional, performance, or other deviations from the

“basis of design” equipment, including engineering costs to evaluate such

deviations, shall be paid by the Contractor. If a product other than the “basis of

design” product is submitted and subsequently rejected during the submittal

process, Contractor shall provide the “basis of design” product.

J. Should a substitution be accepted and subsequently proven unsatisfactory for the

service intended within the warranty period, the Contractor shall provide the basis

of design, or make corrections as directed by Engineer.

1.07. GUARANTY-WARRANTY

A. Guarantee shall include capacity and integrated performance of component parts

of various systems in strict accord with the intent and purpose of these

specifications. Conduct such tests as herein specified or as may be required by

the Engineer to demonstrate capacity and performance ability of various systems

to maintain specified conditions.

B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in the mechanical division,

tabulated and indexed for easy reference.

C. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or

equipment; date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond;

and names, addresses, telephone numbers, and procedures for filing a claim and

obtaining warranty services.

D. All materials and equipment shall carry a full year's warranty from time Owner

accepts building or the date of substantial completion, whichever is earlier,

regardless of start-up date of equipment, unless a longer warranty period is

specified under other sections. Longer warranty periods for specific items shall

be listed in other sections of these specifications.

PART 2 MATERIAL

2.01. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

23 00 10-7

A. Equipment shall be new, undamaged, and of the same manufacturer except where

indicated otherwise.

B. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types,

grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct

identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during

shipment, storage, and handling.

C. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in

writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage.

D. Protect work and equipment at all times from damage, weather, and entrance of

dirt and water. Close pipe and duct openings with caps or plugs during

installation.

2.02. ELECTRICAL

A. Contractor shall carefully coordinate voltage and amperage requirements of

equipment to be provided. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor prior to

equipment order. Any change to electrical systems required by Contractor’s

substitutions or uncoordinated equipment needs shall be made without cost to the

project.

B. Provide all electrical interlock, control, and other wiring, not covered specifically

under the electrical drawings and specifications, for proper operation and control

of all equipment specified under this Division of the specifications.

C. Supervise and coordinate all electrical work in connection with mechanical

systems.

D. Furnish all motor controllers and contactors, not furnished as part of a motor

control center, or by Electrical Division for proper operation of all motors. Submit

motor data with submittals.

2.03. ROOF AND FLASHINGS

A. A. Special care shall be taken on roofs to prevent damage. Promptly repair

any damage at no additional expense to the Owner. Comply with bonding

requirements of new and existing roofs.

B. B. Flashings are not covered by this section. Refer to Architectural Division.

2.04. ACCESS PANELS

A. Provide access panels in all floors, walls, and plaster and non-lay-in type ceilings

as required or as indicated to service devices in piping requiring access, controls,

devices in ductwork requiring access, and other system components requiring

access for service or regular maintenance. Closely coordinate requirements for

23 00 10-8

access doors before bidding.

B. Access doors shall be "Milcor" type appropriate for the construction involved.

C. Size and type shall be as required for proper service and/or as may be directed by

the Engineer. Minimum size to be 24” x 24”.

2.05. ASBESTOS AND OTHER HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS

A. No Asbestos containing materials shall be used on this project.

B. Contractor is responsible for his own means and methods of safety where

Hazardous or Toxic materials are use for the installation of his work. All work

shall comply with state and federal regulations.

C. Contractor shall protect the Owner's facility and employees from conditions

generated by his work.

D. In the event that a potentially hazardous material is discovered during the course

of the work, Contractor shall stop work immediately, and provide for the safety of

his employees and other occupants. He shall make proper notifications as required

by his contract and by law.

2.06. CONCRETE

A. Concrete materials and installations indicated on the drawings for curbs, pads, and

supports for mechanical equipment shall be provided as part of the contract.

B. Comply with other architectural and structural portions of the specifications for

materials and methods.

C. Concrete.

1. Concrete shall be commercial grade containing Portland cement,

aggregates, clean water, and mix ratios suitable for the loads, and site

conditions.

2. Concrete shall be 3,000 psi class indoors and 3,500 psi class outdoors

unless noted otherwise.

3. Comply with ACI standards for cold and hot weather applications.

D. Installation

1. Use rigid and smooth forms to prevent visible defects and deflections in

the work. Use form compound to prevent concrete bonding to the forms.

2. Provide chamfered corners on the tops of curbs.

23 00 10-9

3. Reinforce pads and curbs with steel reinforcing bars minimum size

number 3, welded wire fabric, or as indicated on the drawings. Set the

reinforcing depth within the concrete for optimum strength for the

application.

4. Provide equipment pads of sizes indicated and at least large enough to

extend past the mechanical equipment 6" on all sides. Minimum height 6”

unless otherwise noted.

5. Pour pads integral with the floor slab, isolate from the floor slab, or dowel

the pads, as indicated on the drawings.

6. Grout all voids with high strength grout mixture.

7. Installation of the pads shall be coordinated so that the concrete has set

and the strength is suitable for installation of the equipment.

8. Set anchor bolts where indicated by either equipment manufacturer or

Structural Engineer.

9. Brush-finish equipment pads.

2.07. LOCAL SITE CONDITIONS

A. Before bidding, make complete investigation at site in order to be informed as to

location of utilities and as to conditions under which work is to be performed.

Utility locations shown were obtained from surveys and/or local utility companies

and are offered as a general guide only and are not to be assured accurate.

B. Make determination of soil conditions before bidding. These specifications and

accompanying drawings in no way imply condition of soil to be encountered.

2.08. EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling in connection with the mechanical system,

to a point 5'-0" outside the building, is included as part of this Division, unless

indicated otherwise.

B. Excavation required shall be done as part of the contract price regardless of any

implied conditions on the drawings or in these specifications.

C. Excavation to have 12" minimum and 24" maximum clearance on all sides. Do

not carry excavation below required level unless indicated otherwise on the

drawings. Excess excavation below required level shall be backfilled at no

expense to Owner with earth, sand, gravel, or concrete, as directed by Engineer

and thoroughly compacted. Remove any unstable soil and replace with gravel,

crushed stone, or clean sand and thoroughly compact. Engineer will determine the

depth of removal of any unstable soil encountered. Grade ground adjacent to

23 00 10-10

excavation to prevent water from running into excavation. Remove accumulated

water in the excavation.

D. Banks of trenches shall be vertical or as shown on the drawings. Width of trench

shall be 5" minimum, 8" maximum on each side of pipe bell. Excavate bell holes

accurately to size by hand. In rock, excavations shall be carried 8" below bottom

of pipe. Use loose earth or gravel for backfill and tamp thoroughly.

E. Bracing, sheathing, and shoring shall be performed as necessary to complete and

protect excavations indicated on the drawings, as required for safety, as directed

by Engineer, and to conform to governing laws and state and federal regulations.

Comply with OSHA Regulations.

F. After piping installation, inspection, testing, and approval by governing agency;

backfill trenches with clean, stable soil free from stones. Place backfill in 4"

layers, tamped under and around pipe and conduit to height of at least 2' above

pipe. Tamping shall be done in such manner as not to disturb underlying work.

Remainder of trenches and excavations shall be backfilled with clean, stable

earth, deposited in 8" layers and brought up to rough grade, with each layer

compacted to density of surrounding soil. Remove sheathing and shoring as

backfill is placed and fill space with dry sand. Compaction tests may be required

by the Engineer, with the costs paid by the Contractor.

G. Underground piping shall be marked with metallic marking tape inserted in the

trench a minimum of 12" below grade and a minimum of 12" above mains.

H. Replace existing appurtenances removed or damaged in connection with work,

and restore to original conditions, unless directed otherwise.

2.09. MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS:

A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and material installation with other building

components and other trades. Investigate each space in the structure through

which mechanical equipment furnished under these specifications must pass to

reach its final location. Coordinate shipping splits with the manufacturer to

permit safe handling and passage through restricted areas in the structure.

B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. By ordering equipment, Contractor

assumes responsibility for the installation and orientation of equipment in the

available space.

C. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for

mechanical installations.

D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in

poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and

23 00 10-11

equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large

equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building.

F. Fit equipment, pipe, and duct into the available spaces in the building and

introduce into the building, at a time, and in a manner, as not to damage the

structure. Install ductwork and piping to provide the maximum possible clear

height underneath.

G. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the

installation of mechanical equipment and materials.

H. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical

services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

I. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement

of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with

minimum of interference with other installations.

J. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment above ceilings

with suspension systems, light fixtures, and other installations.

K. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and

overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing

regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide

required connection for each service.

L. Do not support material or equipment of other trades from piping or ductwork.

M. Do not use equipment, piping, or ductwork as scaffolding, scaffolding support, or

as other means to access the work. Damaged systems and components shall be

repaired or replaced in accordance with the full satisfaction of the Owner and

Engineer.

N. Core drill piping penetrations of concrete walls, floors, and other concrete

structures.

O. Equipment locations shown on the drawings are approximate. Final locations

shall be established and determined in the field to best utilize available space.

P. Replace architectural features removed or damaged during the course of the work.

Q. Maintain fire assembly ratings as dictated by authorities having jurisdiction. Seal

around penetrations through UL rated assemblies, fire, and smoke walls.

R. Fully seal around duct or pipe routed through exterior walls.

2.10. EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

23 00 10-12

A. Each equipment item with drain connections shall be provided with a properly-

sized drain run to the nearest floor drain or as directed.

B. Rough-in and make final required connections to equipment, furnished under

other Divisions of the Specifications or by the Owner.

1. Provide necessary labor and materials for a complete installation. Trap and

vent drainage connections as required.

2. If equipment or fixtures furnished by others are not delivered prior to final

acceptance, services shall be capped or plugged at walls or floor as

directed, ready for future connection.

C. No equipment or fixture shall be "roughed-in" until proper rough-in drawings are

provided to the installer.

D. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

2.11. CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Provide cutting and patching required to perform the mechanical work, when

alteration, repair, renovation, or addition, to existing construction is specified or

required for new work.

B. Cutting of structural members will not be permitted except through explicit

instructions from the Engineer. Reinforcing will be required where members are

cut.

C. Do not endanger or damage installed work through procedures and processes of

cutting and patching.

D. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a

result of mechanical installations.

E. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching work that

is necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations.

F. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching required to:

1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.

2. Remove and replace defective Work.

3. Remove and replace Work not confirming to requirements of the Contract

Documents.

4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing.

5. Upon written instructions from Engineer, uncover and restore Work to

23 00 10-13

provide for Engineer observation of concealed Work.

2.12. GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, base

plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.

I. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-

cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining,

noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior

applications.

2. Design Mix: 5,000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.13. SEISMIC

A. Mechanical systems shall be installed in conformance with the requirements of

the state and federal codes and regulations for Seismic considerations, as specified

and noted on the drawings.

B. All seismic restraining and snubbing devices shall be manufactured specifically

for this duty. Devices constructed by the Contractor will not be accepted.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for the design and installation of the restraining

and snubbing systems based on the criteria included on the drawings and in the

specifications, and the actual equipment, and locations of installation.

2.14. START UP, TESTING, AND ADJUSTING

A. Contractor shall include adequate time in construction schedule for HVAC system

start-up; testing, adjusting, and balancing; and control system installation,

23 00 10-14

programming, testing, and commissioning.

B. Each and every phase of the plumbing, air conditioning, heating and ventilating

systems shall be operated separately, or in conjunction, one with the other, for a

sufficient period of time to demonstrate to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer the

ability of the systems to meet the capacity and the performance requirements while

maintaining design conditions, in accordance with the intent of these specifications.

C. Previous to any performance tests, the Contractor shall have set and adjusted

valves, dampers, motors, controllers, thermostats, and other items as are necessary

to properly balance phases of the mechanical systems and shall have the systems

operating and maintaining design temperatures, humidity, and air circulation

throughout all areas of the building.

D. See other sections of these specifications for other possible records and tests to be

made.

E. During the first-year warranty, the Contractor may be required to make some or

all of the readings above to assure system is functioning properly through the

various seasons. Contractor shall make additional adjustments as required.

2.15. PAINTING

A. Provide mechanical equipment with factory painted finish. Where factory finish

is damaged during handling and installation, use touch-up paint of same type and

color as original paint. Where extensive refinishing of factory applied finishes are

required, equipment shall be repainted by the factory.

B. All uninsulated, ferrous equipment, tanks, pipes, fittings, pipe hangers, supports,

miscellaneous steel, and ironwork without factory finish shall be primed and

painted. Do not paint galvanized hanger rods or galvanized duct straps.

1. Where exposed to view, except in mechanical spaces, color shall be as

selected by the Architect.

2. Where located in mechanical spaces or in areas not exposed to view, color

shall be as directed by Owner’s representative to match Owner’s existing

color schedule. In the absence of an Owner’s color schedule, color shall

be black.

C. All insulated mechanical equipment, tanks, and piping not provided with a factory

finish shall be painted.

1. Where exposed to view, except in mechanical spaces, color shall be as

selected by the Architect.

2. Where located in mechanical spaces or in areas not exposed to view, color

shall be as directed by Owner’s representative to match Owner’s existing

color schedule. In the absence of an Owner’s color schedule, color shall

23 00 10-15

be black.

D. For uninsulated material to be painted, prime with one coat of alkyd primer and

paint with two coats of alkyd enamel gloss. Paint shall be suitable for the

environmental and temperature conditions where material is installed.

E. Paint insulated material with two coats of alkyd enamel gloss. Paint shall be suitable

for the environmental and temperature conditions where material is installed.

F. Prepare surfaces for painting in accordance with the paint manufacturer’s

requirements. Remove or protect portions of the work which are not to be painted.

G. Apply primer coat(s) of paint as recommended by the paint manufacturer.

H. Apply final coat(s) of paint as recommended by the paint manufacturer. Apply

paint by brush or roller as dictated by the surface to be painted. Paint should have

a smooth appearance without cloudiness, spotting, marks, runs, or other surface

imperfections.

I. Clean-up the area of materials, waste, and rubbish. Clean splattered surfaces.

J. Protect the work from damage. Touch-up and restore defaced painted surfaces at

the end of the project.

2.16. NOISE: Contractor shall isolate pipes, ductwork, equipment, and other items to insure no

additional noise is generated or transmitted to the building when systems are in operation.

2.17. ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment

and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. See

Paragraph 3.11 for painting.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

2.18. OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS

A. Contractor shall provide bound manuals containing complete repair parts' lists,

and operating service and maintenance instructions for equipment provided. The

manual shall include:

1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations,

performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete

nomenclature and commercial numbers of all replaceable parts.

2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in,

routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping,

shut-down, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating

instructions.

3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and

23 00 10-16

troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and

adjusting instructions.

4. Servicing and instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.

B. Contractor shall carefully instruct the Owner's operations personnel during the

adjustment and testing period of the equipment for such length of time as may be

necessary to thoroughly familiarize them with the proper care, operation, and

maintenance of the equipment.

C. Contractor shall turn special tools, maintenance items, keys, other devices and

materials required to operate or maintain the systems over to the Owner.

2.19. CLEAN UP

A. Do not allow waste material or rubbish to accumulate in or about jobsite. Clean

work areas daily.

B. At completion of work, remove rubbish, tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials

from and about building, leaving work clean and ready for use without further

cleaning required. Clean equipment, piping, valves, fixtures, and fittings of

grease, metal cuttings, insulation cement, dust, dirt, paper labels, and other

materials that are not part of the final finish.

C. Any discoloration or other damage to parts of building, its finish or furnishings

due to failure to properly clean or keep mechanical systems clean shall be

repaired without cost to Owner.

2.20. NAMEPLATE DATA:

A. Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power operated

mechanical equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model number,

serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested

compliances, and similar essential data.

B. Locate nameplates in an accessible location. Where manufacturer’s name plate is

not stamped or engraved, provide additional heavy gauge aluminum or brass,

stamped or engraved nameplate.

C. Do not remove manufacturer’s nameplates. When manufacturer’s nameplates are

to be covered by insulation or other material, provide a separate nameplate for

mounting on the exterior of the covering.

2.21. RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. At completion of this project, the Contractor shall provide Engineer with one set of

"red lined" design drawings and specification showing all Work installed by him.

B. These documents shall incorporate all changes made in the course of the project

23 00 10-17

so as to enable the Owner to properly maintain, operate, and repair both exposed

and concealed work. The redlines shall indicate changes:

1. Made by Contractor.

2. Addendum Items.

3. Change Orders.

4. Substitutions.

C. Drawings and specifications shall be updated during the progress of the work and

kept at the job site.

D. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue-line or black-line prints of the Contract

Drawings, Submittals, and Shop Drawings.

1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where

installation varies from that shown originally.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that

would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing

technique.

c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and

check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

2.22. FINAL PROJECT OBSERVATION: The final project observation shall not be made

until the following items have been assembled and approved as indicated in other

sections of the specifications.

A. Certificate of acceptance from local inspecting authorities.

B. Letter of compliance from the Controls Systems Provider indicating that the

system is complete, fully operational, and installed as specified by manufacturer’s

certified or licensed individuals.

C. Test and Balance report.

D. Owner's Operations and Maintenance manual.

E. Copies of bonds, insurance certificates, waivers, affidavits, warranties and

guarantees, and other documents required in the specifications signed and ready

for appropriate action.

F. Written notification from the Contractor that the work is complete and ready for

final observation and the above documents are completed and available

23 00 10-18

G. Other documentation which may be required by the Engineer.

2.23. PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. The final mechanical systems closeout shall not be completed until the Contractor

has completed his work and submitted the documents required by Division 1

portions of the specifications. In addition the following work items and specific

mechanical documents described in other portions of this specification section

shall also be submitted and approved:

1. Record drawings.

2. Record specifications.

3. Guarantee and Warranties.

4. Operating and Maintenance Manuals (O&M). O&M Manuals shall also be

provided to the Owner in duplicate. Manuals shall contain approved shop

drawings, operations and maintenance instructions, parts manuals for

HVAC equipment, an accurate set of design plans showing all construction

revisions to the design set, and a copy of the test and balance report.

5. Final clean up.

6. Final Test and Balance Reports with startup logs.

7. Pipe and Equipment Identification.

8. Pipe test certifications.

9. Water treatment analysis and application.

10. Bonds, Insurance Certificates, Waivers, Affidavits, and other documents

required in the specifications signed and ready for appropriate action.

11. Other items which may be required by the Engineer.

B. Confirm in writing that specified training specified has been completed with the

Owner.

C. Confirm in writing that specified demonstrations have been completed with the

Owner.

D. Confirm that test and balance is complete.

END OF SECTION

23 00 15-1

SECTION 23 0015 - FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE STOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Through-penetration firestopping in fire rated construction.

B. Scope:

1. The scope of the work shall include the mechanical systems, HVAC

piping and ductwork, plumbing piping, fire protection piping, and other

systems installed by the contractor.

1.02. 1.02 REFERENCES

A. Underwriters Laboratories

1. U.L. Fire Resistant Directory

a. Through-penetration firestop devices (XHCR)

b. Fire resistance ratings (BXUV)

c. Through-penetration firestop systems (XHEZ)

d. Fill, void, or cavity material (XHHW)

B. American Society for Testing and Materials Standards:

1. ASTM E 814-88: Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-

Penetration Firestops.

1.03. 1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Assembly: Particular arrangement of materials specific to given type of

construction described or detailed in referenced documents.

B. Barriers: Time rated fire walls, time rated ceiling/floor assemblies, and structural

floors.

C. Firestopping: Methods and materials applied in penetrations and unprotected

openings to limit spread of heat, fire, gasses and smoke.

D. Penetration: Opening or foreign material passing through or into barrier or

structural floor such that full thickness of rated materials is not obtained.

E. System: Specific products and applications, classified and numbered by

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. to close specific barrier penetrations.

F. Sleeve: Metal fabrication or pipe section extending through thickness off barrier

and used to permanently guard penetration. Sleeves are described as part of

23 00 15-2

penetrating system in other sections and may or may not be required.

1.04. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements

1. Fire-rated construction: Maintain barrier and structural floor fire

resistance ratings including resistance to cold smoke at all penetrations,

connections with other surfaces or types of construction, at separations

required to permit building movement and sound or vibration absorption,

and at other construction gaps.

2. Smoke barrier construction: Maintain barrier and structural floor resistance

to cold smoke at all penetrations, connections with other surfaces and types

of construction and at all separations required to permit building movement

and sound or vibration absorption, and at other construction gaps.

1.05. SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with general conditions unless otherwise indicated.

B. Product data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including the

following:

1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication

2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

C. Shop drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes,

general construction, specific modifications, component connections, anchorage

methods, hardware, and installation procedures, plus the following specific

requirements.

1. Details of each proposed assembly identifying intended products and

applicable UL System number, or UL classified devices.

2. Manufacturer or manufacturers’ representative shall provide qualified

engineering judgements and drawings relating to non-standard

applications as needed.

D. Quality control submittals:

1. Statement of qualifications.

E. Applicators' qualifications statement:

1. List past projects indicating required experience.

1.06. QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

23 00 15-3

minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.

1.07. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings and surface burning

characteristics.

B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating

approval of combustibility.

1.08. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is

below 60 degrees F.

B. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after

installation of materials.

C. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.

D. Furnish forced air ventilation during installation if required by manufacturer.

E. Keep flammable materials away from sparks or flame.

F. Provide masking and drop cloths to prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces by

firestopping materials.

G. Comply with manufacturing recommendations for temperature and humidity

conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping.

1.09. SEQUENCING

A. Sequence work to permit firestopping materials to be installed after adjacent and

surrounding work is complete.

1.10. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer's qualifications: Firm experienced in installation or application of

systems similar in complexity to those required for this project, plus the

following:

1. Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer, State or local authority where

applicable.

2. At least 2 years experience with systems.

3. Successfully completed at least 5 comparable scale projects using this

system.

B. Local and State regulatory requirements: Submit forms or acceptance for

proposed assemblies not conforming to specific UL Firestop System numbers, or

UL classified devices.

C. Materials shall have been tested to provide fire rating at least equal to that of the

construction.

23 00 15-4

1.11. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packing and shipping:

1. Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible

manufacturer's identification.

2. Coordinate delivery with scheduled installation date, allow minimum

storage at site.

B. Storage and protection: Store materials in a clean, dry, ventilated location.

Protect from soiling, abuse, moisture and freezing when required. Follow

manufacturer's instruction.

1.12. PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Existing conditions:

1. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct

unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding.

2. Proceed with installation only after penetrations of the substrate and

supporting brackets have been installed.

1.13. GUARANTEE

A. Submit copies of written guarantee agreeing to repair or replace joint sealers which

fail in joint adhesion, co-adhesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance,

extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, or general durability or

appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified by submitted

manufacturer's data as an inherent quality of the material for the exposure indicated.

The guarantee period shall be one year from date of substantial completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING OF FIRE-RATED CONSTRUCTION

A. Systems or devices listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Director under categories

XHCR and XHEZ may be used, providing that it conforms to the construction

type, penetrant type, annular space requirements and fire rating involved in each

separate instance, and that the system be symmetrical for wall applications.

Systems or devices must be asbestos-free.

1. Additional requirements: Withstand the passage of cold smoke either as

an inherent property of the system, or by the use of a separate product

included as a part of the U.L. system or device, and designed to perform

this function.

2. Acceptable manufacturers and products: Those listed in the U.L. Fire

Resistance directory for the U.L. System involved and as further defined

in Part 3.06 of this section.

23 00 15-5

3. All firestopping products must be from a single manufacturer. All trades

shall use products from the same manufacturer.

4. Products shall be 3M firestopping products and systems or equal.

2.02. SMOKE-STOPPING AT SMOKE PARTITIONS

A. Through-Penetration Smoke-Stopping: Any system complying with the

requirements for through-penetration firestopping in fire-rated construction, as

specified in this section, is acceptable, provided that the system includes the

specified smoke seal or will provide a smoke seal. The length of time of the fire

resistance may be disregarded.

B. Construction-Gap Smoke-Stopping: Any system complying with the requirements

for construction-gap firestopping in fire-rated construction, as specified in this

section, is acceptable, provided that the system includes the specified smoke seal

or will provide a smoke seal. The length of time of the fire resistance may be

disregarded.

2.03. MATERIALS

A. Firestopping Material: Single or multiple component silicone elastomeric rubber

type foam compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos ceramic fibers.

B. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate

surfaces.

2.04. 2.04 ACCESSORIE

A. Fill, void or cavity materials: As classified under category XHHW in the U.L.

Fire Resistance Directory.

B. Forming materials: As classified under Category XHKU in the U.L. Fire

Resistance Directory.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION

A. Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to

be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

1. Verify barrier penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for

application of materials.

2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02. SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces to be in contact with penetration seal materials, of dirt, grease, oil,

loose materials, rust, or other substances that may affect proper fitting, adhesion,

23 00 15-6

or the required fire resistance.

3.03. INSTALLATION

A. Apply primer and materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instruction of the

U.L. Fire Resistance Directory and in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction.

C. Seal holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective smoke barrier.

D. Where floor openings without penetrating items are more than four inches in

width and subject to traffic or loading, install firestopping materials capable of

supporting same loading as floor.

E. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve rating and to a

uniform density and texture.

F. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subject to traffic.

G. Install material at walls or partition openings which contain penetrating sleeves,

piping, ductwork, conduit and other items requiring firestopping.

H. Place firestopping in annular space around fire dampers before installation of

damper’s anchoring flanges - installed in accordance with fire damper

manufacturer’s recommendations.

I. Where large openings are created in walls or floors to permit installation of pipes,

ducts, cable tray, bus duct or other items, close unused portions of opening with

firestopping material tested for the application. See U.L. Fire Resistance

Directory.

J. Install smoke stopping as specified for firestopping.

K. Where rated walls are constructed with horizontally continuous air space, double

width masonry, or double stud frame construction, provide vertical 12 inch wide

fiber dams for full thickness and height of air cavity at maximum 15 foot

intervals.

L. Dam material to remain.

3.04. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Examine penetration sealed areas to ensure proper installation before concealing

or enclosing areas.

B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities.

C. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by

cutting or penetration by other trades.

23 00 15-7

3.05. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.

B. Clean up spills of liquid components.

C. Neatly cut and trim materials as required.

D. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean

condition.

3.06. PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.

3.07. SYSTEMS AND APPLICATION

A. The installation shall be as required by manufacturer for type of construction,

Type of U.L. systems, type of penetration, and type of fire stopping system.

END OF SECTION

23020-1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION

SECTION 23020

MECHANICAL DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. This Section describes the demolition, removal, relocation, rerouting and reconnection of existing mechanical facilities, as required, shown and specified herein, to accomplish alteration, restoration and to accommodate new construction.

B. The work shall include but not be limited to, draining, disconnecting, relocating, removing and dismantling, in a neat and workmanlike manner, the items and their accessories as indicated or Shown on the Contract Drawings.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A10.6 – Safety Requirements for Demolition

B. National Association of Demolition Contractors (NADC) – Demolition Safety Manual

C. NFPA 51B – Cutting and Welding Processes

D. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code

E. NFPA 241 – Safeguarding Building Construction and Demolition Operations

F. OSHA 29 CRF 1910 – Occupational Safety and Health Standards

G. US EPA – Clean Air Act Amendment of 1990.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Demolition Schedule

B. Fire Watch Procedures

C. Inspection Report of Underground Piping Systems

D. Welding/Burning Permit – Obtain a welding/burning permit from the local Fire Official prior to the start of any welding or burning in accordance with the local Fire Code or as required by the Owner.


A. Cutting, patching and removal shall be performed by workers skilled in the specific trades involved.

B. Job Conditions: Prior to start of work, make an inspection accompanied by the Engineer to determine physical condition of adjacent construction that is to remain.

1.05 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS

A. Torch cutting of ductwork will not be permitted.


B. Torch cutting of other mechanical equipment will be permitted only as indicated by the Engineer.

C. Any cutting method, which may create sparks, must include “Fire Watch” as required by the Fire Code and/or Owner’s Fire Insurance Carrier. Submit fire watch procedures for approval.

D. Draining operations must not damage building components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 Adequately sized rubbish containers for the proper and safe disposal of all debris.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Construct temporary partitions prior to any demolition work enclosing respective work. Erect temporary fencing and signage around demolished materials. Use water sprinkling and other suitable methods to limit dust and dirt arising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection.

B. Protect existing materials and equipment which are not to be demolished.

C. Prevent movement of structure; provide required bracing and shoring.

D. Do not begin the work until the time schedules and manner of operations have been approved by the Engineer and Owner. All interruptions of existing services shall be included in the schedules as approved by the Engineer and Owner.

3.02 GENERAL

A. Provide alteration and demolition of mechanical facilities as required by the contract drawings and specifications. The drawings are diagrammatic and do not show the exact location of all existing mechanical work. Where existing equipment shall remain in service during construction, provide rerouting and reconnection of mechanical services as required to maintain continuous service.

B. Review all equipment with the Engineer and Owner prior to disposal. Existing ductwork, piping, conduit and similar items to be abandoned that are not embedded in walls or floor slabs shall be completely removed unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Cap open ends at all walls and floors.

C. Remove, store and protect all equipment or materials to be reused by the Owner as shown on the drawings. Coordinate exact location of storage with the Owner. Items indicated to be removed, and not designated for Owner's salvage or for reuse, may be salvaged by Contractor. Transport salvaged items that are not to be reused from site as they are removed. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.

D. Temporarily cap ends of ductwork to avoid entry of dirt, debris, or discharge of foul odors and gases.

E. Where existing louvers or ductwork penetrations are to remain, blank-off the louver on


the inside with galvanized sheet metal on both sides of 2-inch thick, 6 pcf density rigid fiberglass board insulation. Paint side attached to the louver with flat black paint.

F. Do not close or obstruct egress width to exits. Conduct demolition operations and removal of debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walkways, occupied areas, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Ensure safe passage of persons around or through area of demolition operations to prevent injury to adjacent buildings, structures, other facilities, and persons.

G. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without five (5) days' prior written notice to the Engineer and Owner.

H. Conform to procedures applicable when discovering hazardous or contaminated materials.

I. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent building structures or Owner's operations.

J. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger or hazardous materials are encountered. Notify Architect/Engineer. Do not resume operations until directed.

K. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Do not cut or remove more than is necessary to accommodate the new construction or alteration.

L. Remove demolished materials from site daily. Do not burn or bury materials on site. Dispose of all material at an approved disposal facility.

M. Cover and protect floors, furniture, equipment and fixtures to avoid soiling or damage when demolition work is performed in rooms or areas from which such items have not been removed. Protect finished surfaces at all times and repair or replace, if damaged, to match existing construction to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

N. Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and removal of existing construction on exterior surfaces and installation of new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing building.

O. Protect new and existing roofs from damage.

P. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied portions of the facility, except when authorized in writing by Owner's representative. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to the Owner. Contractor shall disconnect and seal only utilities to be demolished serving areas being demolished, prior to start of demolition work. If Contractor is required to disconnect utility services or other services to an occupied area, the Contractor shall provide temporary or alternative service to that area, as acceptable to the Owner.

3.03 PIPING REMOVAL

A. Cut off all welded piping square at the locations indicated on the drawings. No cutting will be required where the demolition ends at a flanged valve or equipment. Close off all openings of any remaining valves, piping or fittings with weld caps or blind flanges to prevent debris from entering the existing system.

B. Disconnect all threaded piping at the location indicated on the drawings. Close off all


openings of remaining valves, piping, fittings and equipment with pipe plugs or pipe caps as required to prevent debris from entering the existing systems.

C. Remove all pipe hangers, supports, miscellaneous steel and anchors with the piping.

3.04 PROTECTION FROM FREEZING

A. It is intended that the building remain protected from damage due to freezing temperatures. To that end, existing equipment and systems used for heating shall remain in place and in operation until scheduling permits shutdown.

B. Where the removal of equipment and/or existing systems will leave an area unprotected from freezing, notify the Owner and Engineer at least 72 hours in advance prior to removal so appropriate steps can be taken by the Owner to protect the area. Provide temporary heating equipment sufficient to prevent freezing.

C. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that piping systems that are being worked on are completely drained from water prior to the start of demolition. If water is not drained and the piping freezes it is the Contractor’s responsibility to replace piping at his own expense.

3.05 DISCONNECTION AND INTERRUPTION OF MECHANICAL SERVICES

A. When portions of an existing piping system or ductwork system are removed, and this removal causes loss of operation to another piece of equipment due to open (disconnected) piping or ductwork, then cap piping or ductwork or provide temporary piping or ductwork system to retain operation of various systems.

3.06 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT REMOVAL

A. Remove all mechanical equipment as shown on the Contract Drawings. Remove all electrical work, including wiring between equipment, and wiring to power source or point of origin.

B. Where equipment is supported by steel and/or structural supports, remove these supports.

3.07 REFRIGERANT REMOVAL

A. Recover and dispose of all existing refrigerant charges in accordance with EPA regulations. Release of chlorofluorocarbon refrigerants to atmosphere is prohibited per the Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990.

3.08 DUCTWORK REMOVAL

A. Disconnect all ductwork, which must be removed, at the closest joint and resupport the remaining ductwork.

B. Prepare all remaining ductwork joints at the point of disconnection to receive new ducts or blank-off panels.

C. Remove all ductwork supports and miscellaneous steel with ductwork to be demolished.

3.09 INSULATION REMOVAL


A. Remove insulation, together with all piping, fittings, valves and equipment designated for demolition.

3.10 CONTROL WIRING REMOVAL

A. Disconnect and remove all control wiring and tubing, including conduit, for the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) System associated with equipment to be removed.

END OF SECTION

23 00 30-1

SECTION 23 00 30 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY:

A. This section specifies the basic requirements for electrical components which are

to be provided for operation of mechanical equipment. These components

include, but are not limited to, motors, starters, and disconnect switches when

indicated, furnished as an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment, or

furnished separately for mechanical equipment.

B. Furnish all motor controllers and contactors, not furnished as part of a motor

control center, for proper operation of all motors.

C. Specific electrical requirements (i.e., horsepower and electrical characteristics) for

mechanical equipment are specified within the individual equipment specification

sections and scheduled on the drawings.

1.02 REFERENCES:

A. NEMA Standards MG 1: Motors and Generators.

B. NEMA Standard ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.

C. NEMA Standard 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.

D. NEMA Standard KS 1: Enclosed Switches.

E. National Electric Code (NFPA 70).

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Separate submittal is not required. Submit product data for motors, starters, and

other electrical components with submittal data required for the equipment for

which it serves, as required by the individual equipment specification sections.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Electrical components and materials shall be UL labeled.

B. The electrical work shall comply with the National Electric Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

23 00 30-2

2.01 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Equipment shall be by same manufacturer, except those items furnished by an

equipment manufacturer as an integral part of his equipment. Where possible the

equipment shall be by the same manufacturer specified in Division 16.

2.02 MOTORS: The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For

special motors, more detailed and specific requirements are specified in the individual

equipment specifications.

A. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven

loads.

B. Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load will not require the

motor to operate in the service factor range.

C. 2-speed motors shall have 2 separate windings on poly-phase motors.

D. Temperature Rating: Rated for 40 degrees C. environment with maximum 90

degree C rise for continuous duty at full load (Class B insulation).

E. Starting Capability: Frequency of starts as indicated by automatic control system,

and not less than 5 evenly spaced starts per hour for manually controlled motors.

F. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors and 1.35 for single phase motors.

G. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty,

Design "B", except "C" where required for high starting torque.

1. Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 56; use driven equipment

manufacturer's standards to suit specific application.

2. Bearings:

a. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals.

b. Re-greasable, except permanently sealed where motor is normally

inaccessible for regular maintenance.

c. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives

produce lateral or axial thrust in motor.

d. For fractional horsepower, light duty motors, sleeve type bearings

are permitted.

23 00 30-3

3. Enclosure Type:

a. Open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or

remotely located during operation.

b. Guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or

building occupants.

c. Weather protected Type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed.

4. Overload Protection: Built-in thermal overload protection and, where

indicated, internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping

motor at starter.

5. Noise Rating: "Quiet".

6. Efficiency:

a. Motor shall comply with the efficiency requirements of the Energy

Independence and Security Act of 2007.

b. Motors smaller than 1 HP shall have minimum full load

efficiencies levels per NEMA Standards.

c. Motors 1 HP and larger shall be premium efficiency.

7. Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings,

characteristics, construction, special features and similar information.

2.03 STARTERS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES, AND WIRING:

A. Motor Starter Characteristics:

1. Enclosures: NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures with padlock ears,

except in wet locations shall be NEMA 3R or NEMA 12 with conduit

hubs installed by contractor, or units in hazardous locations which shall

have NEC proper class and division.

2. Type and size of starter shall conform to adopted standards and

recommended practices of the National Electric Code and Underwriters'

Laboratories.

B. Manual Switches: Manual switches shall have:

1. Pilot lights and extra positions for multi-speed motors.

23 00 30-4

2. Overload protection: Melting alloy type thermal overload relays.

3. Manual starters / switches are to be used on fractional horsepower motors

only.

C. Magnetic Starters:

1. Momentary contact push buttons and pilot lights, properly arranged for

single speed or multi-speed operation as indicated.

2. Trip-free thermal overload relays, each phase.

3. Interlocks, witches and similar devices as required for coordination with

control requirements of controls sections.

4. Built-in 120 volt control circuit transformer, with 2 primary and one

secondary fuse, where service exceeds 240 volts. Fuses sized to carry

holding coil circuit and other connected devices.

5. Externally operated manual reset.

6. Under-voltage release or protection (3-wire control).

7. Branch circuit protection shall meet type 2 coordination protection.

8. A hand-off-auto selector switch shall be provided in addition to start-stop

buttons for all devices being controlled automatically.

9. Phase loss relay.

a. Provide protective relays with DPDT 600V rated contacts, locking

potentiometer undervoltage adjustment, and LED indicating light

at each starter for motors greater than 5 HP. Equal to Square D

Class 8430, Type MPD, mounted in suitable enclosure.

D. Motor Connections:

1. Flexible conduit, except where plug-in electrical cords are specifically

indicated.

E. Heater Contactors:

1. Contactors for resistance heat shall be by same manufacturer as starters

unless furnished with heaters. Contactors shall be of the magnetic type

and mounted in NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosure. Contactors

shall carry a UL listing and shall be rated for 100,000 cycles.

23 00 30-5

F. Disconnect Switches:

1. Fusible Switches: Fused, each phase; heavy duty; horsepower rated; non-

teasible, quick-make, quick-break mechanism; dead front line side shield;

solderless lugs suitable for copper or aluminum conductors; spring

reinforced fuse clips; electro silver plated current carrying parts; hinged

doors; operating lever arranged for locking in the "open" position; arc

quenchers; capacity and characteristics as indicated.

2. Non-fusible Switches: For equipment less than 1 horsepower, switches

shall be horsepower rated; toggle switch type; quantity of poles and

voltage rating as indicated. For equipment 1 horsepower and larger,

switches shall be the same as fusible type.

2.04 CAPACITORS:

A. Features:

1. Individual unit cells, all welded steel housing, each capacitor internally

fused, non-flammable synthetic liquid impregnant, craft tissue insulation,

and aluminum foil electrodes.

2. KVAR size shall be as required to correct motor power factor to 90

percent or better and shall be installed on all motors 1 horsepower and

larger that have an uncorrected power factor of less than 85 percent at

rated load.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Install motors on motor mounting systems in accordance with motor

manufacturer's instructions, securely anchored to resist torque, drive thrusts, and

other external forces inherent in mechanical work. Secure sheaves and other

drive units to motor shafts with keys and Allen set screws, except motors of 1/3

hp and less may be secured with Allen set screws on flat surface of shaft. Unless

otherwise indicated, set motor shafts parallel with machine shafts.

B. Deliver starters and wiring devices which have not been factory-installed on

equipment unit to electrical installer for installation.

C. Install starters and wiring devices at locations indicated, securely supported and

anchored, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Locate

for proper operation access, including visibility, and for safety. Do not cover

equipment data or informational tags when device is to be mounted on equipment.

23 00 30-6

D. Install control connections for motors to comply with NEC and applicable

provisions of Electrical. Install equipment grounding except where non-grounded

isolation of motor is indicated.

E. Connect protective relays to line side lugs of the motor starter and wire control

contacts into motor starter circuit.

F. Label starters with engraved plastic nameplate describing the equipment served,

e.g., "A.C. Unit No. 1". Nameplates shall be U.V. stabilized for use indoor /

outdoor. Attach nameplates with clear silicone sealant.

END OF SECTION

23 00 75-1

SECTION 23 0075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification applications:

1. Equipment identification.

2. Pipe identification.

3. Valve tags.

4. Valve schedule.

5. Duct identification.

1.02. SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product proposed.

B. Product Schedule: Provide schedule indicating each type of identification

material to be used for equipment, piping, and ductwork. Indicate colors to be

used.

C. Valve Schedule: Submit a valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and

reproduced on 8-1/2” x 11” bond paper. Provide three (3) copies. Mark valves

which are intended for emergency shut-off, normally open, normally closed, and

similar special uses by special flag in the margin of the schedule. Include the

following for each valve:

1. Valve identification number.

2. System.

3. Purpose.

4. Location.

5. Type.

6. Size.

7. Manufacturer.

23 00 75-2


A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, “Scheme for the Identification

of Piping Systems”, for letter size, length of color field, for colors not included in

the schedule herein, and for viewing angles of identification devices for piping.

1.04. COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and

painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and

doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar

concealment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Engraved Plastic Laminate Identification Signs

1. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate in the sizes

and thicknesses indicated, with engraver’s standard letter style, black with

white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for

mechanical fastening except where using adhesive mounting.

2. Thickness: 1/16” for units up to 20 inches square or 8” length; 1/8” for

larger units.

3. Fasteners: Self tapping stainless steel screws except use contact-type,

permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the

substrate. Where sign cannot be attached directly to device or equipment,

attach with brass chain.

4. Letter sizes: Minimum ¼ inch for names of units if viewing distance is less

than 24 inches, ½ inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and

proportionally larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include

secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of the principal

lettering.

2.02. PIPE IDENTIFICATION

A. All above grade piping shall be identified with pipe markers with colors as

indicated. Identification shall have proper legend and meet OSHA specifications.

Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise noted.

23 00 75-3

B. For piping where diameter including insulation is less than 8”, pipe markers shall

be plastic, pre-tensioned, semi-rigid type that encircles entire pipe without the use

of adhesives. Tape and sticker types are unacceptable.

C. For piping where diameter including insulation is 8” or greater, pipe markers shall

be plastic, full-band, semi-rigid type strapped to pipe using manufacturer’s

standard stainless steel bands.

D. Underground line markers: Manufacturer’s standard permanent, bright colored,

continuous printed, plastic tape intended for direct burial service, not less than 6”

wide and 4 mils thick. Provide tape with printing which most accurately indicates

the type of buried pipe.

E. Manufacturer: Pipe markers as manufactured by Seton, Brady, Brimar, or EMED

are acceptable.

F. Identification Schedule:

Piping System Legend Band/Text Color

1. Plumbing Piping System

Cold Water Cold Water Green/White

Hot Water Hot Water Yellow/Black

Hot Water Return Hot Water Return Yellow/Black

2. Gas Piping System

Low Pressure Natural Gas Low Pressure Gas Yellow/Black

High Pressure Natural Gas High Pressure Gas Yellow/Black

Gas Vent Gas Vent Yellow/Black

3. Sanitary Sewer System

Sanitary Waste Sanitary Sewer Green/White

Sanitary Vent Sanitary Vent Green/White

23 00 75-4

4. Storm Drain System

Storm Drain Storm Drain Green/White

G. Arrows and lettering shall be black. Arrows shall point in the direction of flow.

Locate downstream of pipe legend.

H. Arrows shall be of same color as bands and shall point in direction of flow.

Locate downstream of pipe legend.

I. Valve Identification: Provide brass tags for all valves and steam traps with legend

describing function of each valve and trap. Tag shall also indicate normally open

or normally closed, where position is noted on the drawings.

J. Valve Tags: Brass tags shall be a minimum of 2" diameter or 3-1/2" oval, to

accommodate 1" high numbers. Tag shall be equipped with a 3/16" X 6" long

brass chain.

2.03. DUCT IDENTIFICATION

A. Engraved Plastic Laminate Identification Signs

1. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate in the sizes

and thicknesses indicated, with engraver’s standard letter style, colored

black background with white letters except as otherwise indicated.

2. Thickness: 1/16” for units up to 20 inches square or 8” length; 1/8” for

larger units.

3. Fasteners: Contact-type, permanent adhesive.

4. Letter sizes: Minimum ¼ inch for names of units if viewing distance is

less than 24 inches, ½ inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and

proportionally larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include

secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of the principal

lettering.

B. Stencils: As specified and indicated herein.

2.04. STENCILS: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum

letter height of 1-1/4” for ducts; and minimum letter height of ¾” for equipment and

access door signs. Use alkyd paint. Use stencils only as directed herein.

23 00 75-5

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide permanent, factory, operational data, nameplate on each item of power

operated mechanical equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model

number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of

tested compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible

location. Where manufacturer’s nameplate is not stamped or engraved, provide

additional heavy gauge, aluminum or brass, stamped or engraved nameplate. Do

not remove manufacturer’s nameplates. When manufacturer’s nameplates are to

be covered by insulation or other material, provide a separate nameplate for

mounting on the exterior of the covering.

B. In addition to factory nameplate, provide an engraved plastic laminate (stenciled)

identification sign for each major item of mechanical equipment and each

operational device. Provide identification signs for the following general

categories of equipment.

1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous

units such as gas outlets or steam relief valves.

2. Chillers, cooling towers, condensing units, compressors, pumps, and

similar motor-driven units.

3. Heat exchangers, coils, and similar equipment.

4. Fans and blowers.

5. Packaged and central-station type air units.

6. Tanks and pressure vessels.

7. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water treatment systems, and similar

equipment.

8. Control panels.

9. Fuel burning units, such as boilers, furnaces, and heaters.

10. Fire department hose valves and hose stations.

C. Provide engraved sign at each access door, indicating equipment or device to be

accessed.

D. Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in equipment

identification with corresponding designations shown, specified, scheduled, or as

designated by the Owner’s representative. Provide numbers, lettering, and

23 00 75-6

wording as indicated or as directed by the Owner’s representative. Owner shall

set priority for lettering and graphics. Where multiple systems of the same

generic name are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates

individual system number as well as service (as examples; Boiler No. 3, AHU-

1H, Standpipe G14).

3.02. PIPE IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide 1” thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket under each plastic pipe

marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes where fluid temperatures will be

125F or greater. Insulation shall extend 4” beyond edges of marker.

B. Valve tags and steam traps shall be numbered as indicated on the valve listing

provided to the Owner.

C. See Section 15050 for piping to be painted.

D. As a minimum, identification shall be applied to piping at the following locations:

1. Adjacent to each valve.

2. At each branch and riser take-off.

3. At each pipe passage through wall, floor, and ceiling construction.

4. At each pipe passage to underground.

5. At not more than forty feet spacing on straight pipe runs.

E. Place identification so it can be easily read. Arrows shall be applied to indicate

direction of flow.

F. Underground Piping: During back-filling of each exterior underground piping

system, install plastic line marker, located directly over buried line no deeper than

8” below finished grade. Where multiple small lines are buried in common trench

and do not exceed overall width of 16”, install a single line marker.

3.03. DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify ductwork using stenciled signs. Letter color for stenciled signs shall be

either white or black. Provide the color that produces the most contrast with the

covering being stenciled. Indicate direction of flow, air handling unit or fan, air

terminal box, and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust).

B. Apply ductwork identification at the following locations:

1. Adjacent to each damper.

2. At each passage through walls, floors, or ceiling construction.

23 00 75-7

3. At no more than forty feet intervals.

4. At air handling units, fans, and air terminal boxes

END OF SECTION 23 0075

23 00 86-1

SECTION 23 0086

PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY

A. Perform all Work required to provide and install piping insulation, jackets, and

accessories indicated by the Contract Documents with supplementary items necessary for

proper installation.

B. Insulation of Underground Piping is specified elsewhere and not work of this Section.

1.02. REFERENCE STANDARDS

C. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless

identified by a specific edition date.

D. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be

applicable to this Project.

E. All materials, installation and Workmanship shall comply with the applicable

requirements and standards addressed within the following references:

1. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

2. ASTM C168 - Terminology Relating to Thermal Insulation Materials.

3. ASTM C177 - Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission

Properties by Means of the Guarded- Hot-Plate Apparatus.

4. ASTM C195 - Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.

5. ASTM C335 - Steady-State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation.

6. ASTM C449 - Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing

Cement.

7. ASTM C518 - Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat

Flow Meter Apparatus.

8. ASTM C534 - Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in

Sheet and Tubular Form.

9. ASTM C547 - Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.

10. ASTM C552 - Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.

23 00 86-2

11. ASTM C578 - Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.

12. ASTM C585 - Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal

Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System).

13. ASTM C591 - Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal

Insulation.

14. ASTM C450 - Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for NPS Piping, and Vessel

Lagging.

15. ASTM C610 - Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.

16. ASTM C921 - Jackets for Thermal Insulation.

17. ASTM C1126 - Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation.

18. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.

19. ASTM D1667 - Flexible Cellular Materials – Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed-

Cell).

20. ASTM D2842 - Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

21. ASTM C795 - Insulation For Use Over Austenitic Steel.

22. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

23. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

24. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

25. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

26. ASTM D5590 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Resistance of Paint

Films and Related Coatings to Fungal Defacement by Accelerated Four-Week Agar

Plate Assay

1.03. DEFINITIONS

F. Concealed: Areas that cannot be seen by the building occupants.

G. Interior Exposed: Areas that are exposed to view by the building occupants, including

underneath countertops, inside cabinets and closets, and all equipment rooms.

H. Interior: Areas inside the building exterior envelope that are not exposed to the outdoors.

I. Exterior: Areas outside the building exterior envelope that are exposed to the outdoors,

including building crawl spaces and loading dock areas.

23 00 86-3

J. Unconditioned Space: Interior space that is not temperature-controlled by cooling and/or

heating system. Includes attics, chases, unconditioned living spaces and non-conditioned

equipment rooms.


K. All piping requiring insulation shall be insulated as specified herein and as required for a

complete system. In each case, the insulation shall be equivalent to that specified and

materials applied and finished as described in these Specifications.

L. All insulation, jacket, adhesives, mastics, sealers, and accessories utilized in the

fabrication of these systems shall meet NFPA for fire resistant ratings (maximum of 25

flame spread and 50 smoke developed ratings) and shall be approved by the insulation

manufacturer for guaranteed performances when incorporated into their insulation

system, unless a specific product is specified for a specific application and is stated as an

exception to this requirement.

1. Certificates to this effect shall be submitted along with submittal data.

2. No material shall be used that, when tested by the ASTM E84-89 test method, is

found to melt, drip or delaminate to such a degree that the continuity of the flame

front is destroyed, thereby resulting in an artificially low flame spread rating.

M. Application Company Qualifications: Company performing the Work of this Section

shall have minimum three (3) years experience specializing in the trade.

N. All insulation shall be applied by mechanics skilled in this particular Work and regularly

engaged in such occupation.

O. All insulation shall be applied in strict accordance with these Specifications and with

factory printed recommendations on items not herein mentioned. Unsightly, inadequate,

damaged or water-soaked Work will not be acceptable.

P. Stainless Steel: Insulation applied on stainless steel shall meet requirements of ASTM

C795 and NRC 1.36. These requirements are for prevention of external stress Corrosion

Cracking (ESCC) for austenitic stainless steel.

1.05. SUBMITTALS

Q. Prepare a schedule of piping insulation showing systems insulated. For each system, show

insulation type, thickness, temperature rating, and special conditions where applicable.

R. Submit product data for each piping system. Product data shall include but not be limited

to the following:

1. Manufacturer's name

2. Insulation material and thickness

23 00 86-4

3. Jacket

4. Adhesives

5. Fastening methods

6. Fitting materials

7. Manufacturer's data sheets indicating density, thermal characteristics, temperature

ratings

8. Insulation installation details (manufacturer's installation instructions/details,

Contractor's installation details, MICA plates where applicable)

9. Other appropriate data

S. Samples: When requested, submit three (3) samples of any representative size illustrating

each insulation type.

T. Operation and Maintenance Data: Indicate procedures that ensure acceptable standards

will be achieved. Submit certificates to this effect.

1.06. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

U. Deliver materials to the Project Site in original factory packaging, labeled with

manufacturer’s identification including product thermal ratings and thickness.

V. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic.

Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.

W. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,

mastics and insulation cements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01. GENERAL


local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having

jurisdiction.

2.02. MANUFACTURERS

B. Insulation:

1. Owens-Corning

2. Certainteed Corporation

23 00 86-5

3. Johns Manville Corporation

4. Knauf Corporation

5. Armstrong/Armacell (Armaflex)

6. RBX Industries/Rubatex

7. FOAMGLAS (Cellular Glass) by Pittsburgh Corning

C. Jackets:

1. Childers Products Company

2. PABCO

3. RPR Products, Inc.

4. John Mansfield Speedline

5. Foamglas

D. Coatings, Sealants, and Adhesives:

1. Foster

2. Childers

2.03. INSULATION MATERIALS

E. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

F. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content

of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

G. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable

according to ASTM C 795.

H. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the

manufacturing process.

I. Piping Insulation Type P1: Glass-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: Glass fibers bonded

with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A with factory

applied ASJ-SSL vapor barrier jacket with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based

adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

Provide one of the following:

1. Owens Corning; Evolution Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

23 00 86-6

2. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok Pipe Insulation.

3. Knauf; Earthwool 1000 degree Pipe Insulation.

J. Piping Insulation Type P2: Flexible Elastomeric Pipe Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or

expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.

Provide one of the following:

1. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex

2. Aeroflex USA Inc; Aerocel

3. K-Flex USA; Insul-Lock, Insul-Tube, and K-FLEX LS.

K. Piping Insulation Type P3: Handicap Lavatory and Sink Piping Insulation Kit:

1. Handicap lavatory and sink drain piping, P-trap, cold and hot water assemblies and

valves shall be insulated with fully molded insulation kit specifically designed for

handicap lavatories and sinks. ADA conforming.

2. Material shall be 3/16" thick molded closed cell vinyl with nylon fasteners, white

finish and be self-extinguishing per ASTM D635, with K value of 1.17

BTU/in./hr./sq. ft./deg. F.

L. Piping Insulation Type P4: Preformed Cellular Glass: Comply with ASTM C 585, ASTM

C 450. Provide one of the following:

1. Pittsburgh Corning; Foamglas

2.04. FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

M. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands

by 10 strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for pipe. Provide one of the following:

1. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc; Mast-A-Fab.

2. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.

2.05. FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

N. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

O. Piping Jacket Type J1: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with

ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; 40 mil thickness, roll stock ready for shop or field cutting

and forming. Provide factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket. Provide one of the

following

1. Johns Manville; Zeston.

23 00 86-7

2. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke

P. Piping Jacket Type J2: Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005,

3105, or 5005, Temper H-14. Provide factory-fabricated fitting covers or field fabricate

covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available. Provide one of the

following:

1. Provide Childers Brand Metal Jacketing Systems.

2. Provide shop fabricated smooth aluminum jacket 0.016".

2.06. TAPES

Q. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic

adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.

2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.

3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

4. Elongation: 2 percent.

5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

R. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic

adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Width: 2 inches.

2. Thickness: 6 mils.

3. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.

4. Elongation: 500 percent.

5. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.

2.07. INSULATION INSERTS

S. Provide insert between support shield and piping on piping 1 1/2" diameter or larger.

Inserts shall be factory fabricated of heavy density insulating material suitable for

temperature. Insulation inserts shall not be less than the following lengths:

1. 1 1/2" to 2 1/2" pipe size 10" long

23 00 86-8

2. 3" to 6" pipe size 12" long

3. 8" to 10" pipe size 16" long

4. 12" and over 22" long

2.08. PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES

T. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.

U. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.

V. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12-inch centers.

W. Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM

C449/C449M.

X. Insulating Cement: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

Y. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.

Z. Banding:

1. Aluminum bands, 3/4" x 0.02 inches

2. Stainless Steel, 304, 3/4" by 0.02 inches

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01. PREPARATION

A. Thoroughly clean all surfaces to be insulated as required to remove all oil, grease, loose

scale, rust, and foreign matter. Piping shall be completely dry at the time of application.

Insulating piping where condensate is occurring is unacceptable. Wet insulation is

unacceptable and shall be removed and replaced before acceptance by the Owner.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with trade installing heat trace. Comply with

requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Verify that piping has been tested for leakage before applying insulation.

3.02. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

D. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements,

referenced standards, and shall conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having

jurisdiction.

23 00 86-9

E. Installation of insulation and jacket materials shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s

published instructions.

F. Handle and install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions in the absence

of specific instructions herein.

G. On exposed piping, locate insulation cover seams with the ridge of the lap joint is directed

down.

H. Provide dams in insulation at intervals not to exceed 20 feet on cold piping systems to

prevent migration of condensation or fluid leaks. Indicate visually where the dams are

located for maintenance personnel to identify and also provide dams at butt joints of

insulation at fittings, flanges, valves, and hangers.

I. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even

surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and

specialties.

J. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses

required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

K. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service.

Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in

either wet or dry state.

L. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

M. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and

specialties.

N. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

O. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints

with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

P. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

Q. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at

hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on

anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to

structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

23 00 86-10

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal

insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by

insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields

over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and

shield.

R. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and

wet and dry film thicknesses.

S. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with

longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing

lap.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's

written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints

and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

T. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its

nominal thickness.

U. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and

cracking due to thermal movement.

V. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere and seal patches similar

to butt joints.

W. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.

2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

4. Manholes.

23 00 86-11

5. Handholes.

6. Cleanouts.

3.03. PENETRATIONS

X. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof

surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor

insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor

insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top

of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

Y. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation

flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

Z. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall

surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor

insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor

insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing

at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

AA. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire

Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

BB. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Comply with

requirements in Section 15050 for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

CC. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

23 00 86-12

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 15050."

3.04. GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

DD. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more

specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

EE. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other

specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise

indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made

from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be

butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams,

voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and

uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of

same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation

to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond

pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of

same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining

pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one

pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the

bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular

surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of

same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining

pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one

pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with

insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily

removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a

removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design

that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.

Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe

insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

23 00 86-13

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a

mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather

mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing

mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket, install fitted PVC cover

over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC

end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket where concealed unions, check valve or

piping specialties are insulated. Provide descriptive label at device under the

insulation. For example at each union stencil with the word "union." Match size

and color of pipe labels.

FF. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature

taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes.

Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with

insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

GG. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to

the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same

thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe

insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend

insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness

over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover

in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible

with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except

divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of

mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its

attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over

adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union

cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with

insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel

second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed

surfaces with a metal jacket.

23 00 86-14

3.05. INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

HH. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

II. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus

twice the thickness of pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference

of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same

thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface

being insulated.

JJ. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface

being insulated.

KK. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation

when available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and

sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and

to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air

to surface being insulated.

3.06. INSTALLATION OF GLASS-FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION

LL. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

23 00 86-15

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and

tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and

protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, secure tabs

with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and

seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

MM. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus

twice the thickness of pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference

of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at

least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

NN. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation

when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered

sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure

insulation materials with bands.

OO. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation

when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe

insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

23 00 86-16

3.07. FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

PP. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and

end joints; for horizontal applications. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the

finish bead along seam and joint edge.

QQ. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and

end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with

weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with

stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.08. FINISHES

RR. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats

of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

SS. Do not field paint aluminum jackets.

3.09. PIPING SYSTEMS INSULATION SCHEDULE

PIPING SYSTEMS INSULATION SCHEDULE

Service Insulation

Type

Location Jacket

Type

Pipe Size Insulation

Thickness

by Pipe

Size

COLD PIPING

Chilled Water P1 Interior

Concealed

-- 3.0" and

smaller

1.0"

4.0" and

larger

1.5"

Cooling Coil Condensate P2 Interior

Concealed

-- 3.0" and

smaller

0.5"

Branch Lines 4.0" and

larger

0.75"

Cooling Coil Condensate Interior Exposed J1 3.0" and

smaller

0.5"

Drain Main Lines 4.0" and

larger

0.75"


23 00 90-1

SECTION 23 0090 - SUPPORTS, HANGERS AND ANCHORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01. WORK INCLUDED

A. Inserts, Anchors, and Upper Attachments

B. Pipe Hangers, Rods, Supports, and Accessories

C. Fabricated Steel Support


A. Design of pipe supporting elements shall be in accordance with ANSI B31.1

B. Fabrication and installation of pipe hangers and supports shall be in accordance with the

following Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) Standards:

1. SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports: Materials, Design and Manufacture.

2. SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports: Selection and Application.

3. SP-89 Pipe Hangers and Supports: Fabrication and Installation Practices.

C. Steel angles, channels and plate shall be in accordance with ASTM A36, red primed or

hot dipped galvanized for interior applications and hot galvanized for exterior

applications.

D. Bolts, including nuts and washers, used for fabricating steel members shall be in

accordance with ASTM A325 and shall be stainless steel or plated for corrosion

protection. Plain steel components are unacceptable.

E. Welding of steel members shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1.

F. Steel supports for ducts, pipe anchors, pipe guides, and piping supported from below

shall be fabricated in accordance with AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication

and Erection of Structural Steel for buildings. If required, the Contractor shall include

the cost of the services of a structural engineer to design or review the system.

1.03. APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. Applicable sections of the publications listed below form a part of this Section. The

publications are referenced by the basic designation only.

1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

4. American Welding Society (AWS)

5. The Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry

23 00 90-2

(MSS)

6. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA)

7. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc.

(SMACNA)

1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. Submit schedule indicating type of hanger to be used by system and pipe size. Include

rod size for each hanger size.

B. Product data, along with installation operation and maintenance instructions, shall be

included in the operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Provide shop drawings for fabricated steel supports.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Inserts, Anchors, and Upper Attachments:

1. Anvil International, Inc.

2. Carpenter Paterson, Inc.

3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

4. Elecen Metal Products

5. Hilti

6. Unistrut

7. ITW Red Head

B. Pipe Hangers, Rods, Supports and Accessories:

1. Anvil International, Inc.

2. Carpenter Paterson, Inc.

3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

4. Elcen Metal Products

5. Hilti

6. Unistrut

C. Fabricated Steel Support: As indicated on Drawings.

2.02. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Supports capable of supporting the pipe for all service and testing conditions. Provide 4-

to-1 safety factor.

23 00 90-3

B. Allow free expansion and contraction of the piping to prevent excessive stress resulting

from service and testing conditions or from weight transferred from the piping or

attached equipment.

C. Design supports and hangers to allow for proper pitch of pipes.

D. For chemical and waste piping, design, materials of construction, and installation of

pipe hangers, supports, guides, restraints, and anchors:

1. ASME B31.3.

2. MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.

3. Except where modified by this Specification.

E. For steam and hot and cold water piping, design, materials of construction and

installation pipe hangers, supports, guides, restraints and anchors:

1. ASME B31.1

2. MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.

F. Check all physical clearances between piping, support system, and structure. Provide

for vertical adjustment after erection.

G. Support vertical pipe runs in pipe chases at base of riser. Support pipes for lateral

movement with clamps or brackets.

H. Place hangers on outside of pipe insulation. Use a pipe covering protection saddle for

insulated pipe at support point.

I. Fabricated Steel Supports: As detailed on the drawings.

2.03. INSERTS AND ANCHORS

A. Inserts: MSS Type 18; malleable iron body and nut, galvanized finish, opening in top of

insert for reinforcing rod, lateral adjustable.

B. Anchors: Steel shell and expander plug, snap off end fastener

2.04. HORIZONTAL PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and around

piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping.

B. For suspension of non-insulated or insulated stationary pipe lines: Adjustable steel

clevices, MSS Type I.

C. For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe lines: Adjustable band hangers, MSS

Type 7 or 9; or split pipe rings, MSS Type II.

D. For support of piping where horizontal movement due to expansion and contraction

may occur, and where a low coefficient of friction is desired: Pipe slides and slide

plates, MSS Type 35, including guided plate mounted on a concrete pedestal or

structural steel support.

23 00 90-4

E. For support from floor stanchion, using floor flange to secure stanchion to floor:

Adjustable pipe stanchion saddles, MSS Type 37 or 38, including steel pipe base

support and cast-iron floor flange.

F. For suspension of pipe from two (2) rods where longitudinal movement due to

expansion and contraction may occur: Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43.

G. For suspension of pipe from a single rod where horizontal movement due to expansion

and contraction may occur: Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43.

H. For support of pipe from a single rod where vertical adjustment is not necessary: Pipe

roll stands, MSS Type 45.

I. For support of pipe where small horizontal movement due to expansion and contraction

may occur, but vertical adjustment is not necessary: Pipe rolls and plates, MSS Type 45.

J. For support of pipe lines where vertical and lateral adjustment during installation may

be required in addition to provision for expansion and contraction: Adjustment pipe

rolls stands, MSS Type 46.

2.05. VERTICAL PIPING CLAMPS

A. Select size of vertical piping clamps to exactly fit size of bare pipe.

B. For support and steadying of pipe risers: Two-bolt riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or 42.

2.06. HANGER ROD ATTACHMENTS

A. Select size of hanger rod attachments to suit hanger rods.

B. For adjustment up to six (6) inches for heavy loads: Steel turnbuckles, MSS Type 13.

C. For use on high temperature piping installations: Steel clevices, MSS Type 14.

D. For use with split pipe rings, MSS Type II: Swivel turnbuckles, MSS Type15.

E. For attaching hanger rod to various types of building attachments: Malleable iron

sockets, MSS Type 16 or 17.

F. Rods:

1. Size 3/8" and up: All thread steel rod electro galvanized. Sizing for pipe or

equipment support as follows:

Copper Tube, Plastic Steel, Cast Iron

Pipe Size (Copper,

Plastic)

Pipe Size (Steel,

Cast Iron)

Rod Size Max. Equip. Load

1/4" to 2" 1/4" to 2" 3/8" 730 lbs.

2-1/2" to 4" 2-1/2" to 3" 1/2" 1,350 lbs.

6" 4" 5/8" 2,160 lbs.

8" to 12" 6" 3/4" 3,230 lbs.

23 00 90-5

14" 8" to 12" 7/8" 4,480 lbs.

16" 14" to 16" 1" 5,900 lbs.

18" to 20" 18" to 20" 1-1/4" 9,500 lbs.

22" to 42" 22" to 42" 1-1/2" 13,800 lbs.

2. Rods may be reduced one size for double rod hangers with 3/8" minimum

diameter, or when other paragraphs require a minimum of 2 hangers per section,

provided the minimum diameter of 3/8" is maintained.

G. For upper attachment for suspending pipe hangers from concrete: Concrete inserts MSS

Type 18.

H. For attachment to top flange of structural shape: Top beam C-clamps, MSS Type 19.

I. For attachment to bottom flange of structural shape: Side beam or channel clamps, MSS

Type 20 or 27.

J. For attachment to center of bottom flange of beams: Center beam clamps, MSS Type

21.

K. For attachment to bottom of beams where heavy loads are encountered and hanger rod

sizes are large: Welded attachments, MSS Type 22.

L. For attachment to structural shapes: C-clamps, MSS Type 23.

M. For attachment to top of beams when hanger rod is required tangent to edge of flange:

Top I-beams clamps, MSS Type 25.

N. For attachment to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads: Steel I-beam/WF-beam

clamps with eye nut, MSS Type 28 or 29.

O. Steel brackets, for indicated loading:

1. Light duty, 750 pounds, MSS Type 31.

2. Medium duty, 1,500 pounds, MSS Type 32.

3. Heavy duty, 3,000 pounds, MSS Type 33.

P. For use on sides of steel beams: Side beam brackets, MSS Type 34.

2.07. SPRING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Select spring hangers and supports to suit pipe size and loading.

B. For control of piping movement: Restraint control devices, MSS Type 47.

C. For light loads where vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inch: Springs cushion

hangers, MSS Type 48.

D. For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs: Spring cushion roll hangers, MSS Type

49.

23 00 90-6

E. For retardation of sway or thermal expansion in piping systems: Spring way braces, MSS

Type 50.

F. For absorbing expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger: Variable spring

hangers, MSS Type 51; preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25%.

G. For absorbing expansion and contraction of piping system from base support: Variable

spring base supports, MSS Type 52; preset to indicated load and limit variability factor

to 25%; include flange.

H. For absorbing expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support:

Variable spring trapeze hangers, MSS Type 53; preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25%.

I. Constant supports: Provide one of the following types, selected to suit piping system.

Include auxiliary stops for erection and hydrostatic test, and field load-adjustment

capability.

1. Horizontal Type: MSS Type 54.

2. Vertical Type: MSS Type 55.

3. Trapeze Type: MSS Type 56.

2.08. SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTS

A. Where support spacing is more frequent than distance between structural members,

provide steel angles, channels or beams sized to provide a deflection of less than 1/240

of span when fully loaded, to transfer pipe support loads to structural members.

B. Where deflection of center of trapeze support exceeds 1/240 of distance between hanger

rods, provide additional hanger rods.

C. Where multiple risers are supported within shafts, provide steel angles, channels or

beams, sized to provide a deflection of less than 1/240 of span when fully loaded, to

transfer loads to the concrete floor slab. Anchor supplemental supports to the slab, and

provide resilient element where required by other Sections of this Division.

2.09. ACCESSORIES

A. Protective Shields, MSS Type 40: Carbon steel, galvanized minimum of 12" length

sized for required insulation.

B. Protective Saddles, MSS Type 39: Carbon steel plate, minimum of 12" length, sized for

required insulation.

C. Steel Turnbuckle, MSS Type 13: Forges steel, galvanized finish with locknuts. Rated at

a minimum of 730 lbs. at 3/8" size.

D. Steel Clevis, MSS Type 14: Forged steel, galvanized finish with steel pin and cotter pin.

Rated for a minimum of 730 lbs. at 3/8" size.

E. Weldless Eye Nut, MSS Type 17: Forges steel, galvanized finish. Rated for a minimum

23 00 90-7

of 730 lbs. at 3/8" size.

2.10. PIPE INSULATION HANGER SHIELDS

A. Where hangers are placed outside the jackets of pipe insulation, provide shields equal to

"Thermal Hanger Shields" as manufactured by Pipe Shields, Inc. or equivalent by Elcen

Metal Products Company.

B. Shields shall consist of a 360-degree insert of high-density, 100 psi, waterproof calcium

silicate, encased in a 360-degree galvanized sheet steel shield. Insert shall be same

thickness as adjoining pipe insulation, and shall extend 1 inch beyond sheet metal shield

in each direction on cold lines. Shield lengths and minimum sheet metal gauges shall be

as directed below:

PIPE SIZE SHIELD LENGTH MINIMUM GAUGE

1/2" to 1-1/2" 4" 26

2" to 6" 6" 20

8" to 10" 9" 16

12" to 18" 12" 16

20" & Larger 18" 16

C. Shields shall be Model CS-CW, except for pipe roller applications: then provide Model

CSX-CW.

D. At the Contractor's option, shop-fabricated galvanized metal shields may be provided

based on approved shop drawings. Length and gauge of sheet metal shall be as specified

above.

E. For all insulated piping 4” and larger, provide insulation insert at a minimum of 12”

long. Insert shall extend a minimum of one inch beyond shield. Insulation inserts shall

be minimum 12” long section of foam glass insulation.

2.11. METAL FRAMING: Provide products compliant with NEMA ML-1.

2.12. STEEL PLATES, SHAPES AND BARS: Provide products compliant with

ANSI/ASTM A-36.

2.13. PIPE GUIDES: Provide factory-fabricated guides, of cast semi-steel or heavy

fabricated steel, consisting of a bolted two-section outer cylinder and base, with a

two-section guiding spider bolted tight to pipe or as shown on Drawings. Size guides

and spiders to clear pipe, cylinder and insulation, if any. Provide guides of length

recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Where applicable, install in accordance with the manufacturer's written installation

23 00 90-8

instructions.

B. Where supports are in contact with copper pipe, provide copper plated support.

C. Where supports are in contact with glass, aluminum or brass pipe, provide plastic

coating on supports.

D. Interior hangers, supports, including attachments, that are plain steel shall be primed

and painted.

E. Hangers and supports, including attachments, exposed to weather or located in utility

tunnels or accessible utility trenches or subject to spillage shall be hot dip galvanized

after fabrication.

F. Fabricated steel supports exposed to weather or located in utility tunnels and accessible

utility trenches or subject to spillage shall be primed and painted. Cut, welded, drilled or

otherwise damaged surfaces of coating shall be repaired.

3.02. PREPARATION

A. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building

structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct

inadequacies including but not limited to proper placement of inserts, anchors and other

building structural attachments.

3.03. INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from

building structure in compliance with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs

of horizontal piping to be supported together in trapeze-type hangers where possible.

Install supports with maximum spacing as specified in this Section. Where piping of

various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest

pipe size or install intermediate supports for small diameter pipe. Do no use wire or

perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping.

B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and

other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs,

install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar

piping.

C. Support fire protection water piping independently of other piping

D. The location of hangers and supports shall be coordinated with the structural work to

ensure that the structural members will support the intended load.

E. Provide hex head nut on rod at top and bottom of clevis hanger yoke, and at each rod

connection to intermediate und upper attachment. Rod nuts shall be securely locked in

place.

F. Hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only. Where lateral or axial movement is

anticipated, use suitable linkage in hanger rod to permit swing.

G. Hangers shall be fabricated to permit adequate adjustment after erection while still

23 00 90-9

supporting the load. Turnbuckles shall be provided where required for vertical

adjustment of the piping.

H. Supports for vertical piping shall be located at each floor or at intervals of not more than

15 feet and at intervals of not more than 8 feet from end of risers. Where supports are

provided on intermediate floors spaced 15 feet or less between floors, no additional

supports are required other than those specified for end of risers.

I. A hanger or support shall be provided adjacent to each piece of equipment to ensure

that none of the pipe weight is supported from the equipment.

J. Provide protective shields on all piping required to be insulated.

K. Provide protective saddles sized to match insulation thickness on all hot piping required

to be insulated. Fill void between saddle and pipe with insulation as specified.

L. Provide turnbuckles on all hangers that require leveling or aligning.

M. Provide steel clevis where detailed and/or required.

N. Provide weldless eye nuts on hanger terminations where disassembly or swing may be

required. Use in combination with steel clevis.

O. Supports

1. Provide additional supports at:

a. Changes in direction.

b. Branch piping and runouts over 5 feet.

c. Concentrated loads due to valves, strainers and similar items.

d. At valves 4 inches and larger in horizontal piping.

e. Support piping on each side of valve.

f. Brace hubless piping to prevent horizontal and vertical movement.

g. Where number of grooved couplings exceeds 3 between supports or provide

continuous steel between supports.

2. Sanitary waste and vent, roof drains per UPC Section 316: Vertical supports are

not required within 2.5 feet of wall penetrations for pipes 8 inches in diameter and

smaller, and not more than 3 feet for 10 inches and larger.

3. Other piping support spacing shall be as scheduled on Drawing or as required by

referenced standard.

3.04. HANGER SPACING

A. The maximum spacing between pipe supports for straight runs shall be in accordance

with the following chart. If any deviation from the table exists within the manufacturer's

written installation instruction, whichever spacing reflecting the smaller centerline to

centerline dimension shall be used.

23 00 90-10

MAXIMUM HORIZONTAL PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORT SPACING

TABLE

1. Steel Pipe (Schedule 40 & 80):

Up to 1" ..................................7 ft. on center

1-1/4" and greater ...................10 ft. on center

2. Copper Pipe (Types L, K and M):

Up to 1" size: ..........................5 ft. on center

1-1/4" to 2-1/2" ......................7 ft. on center

3" and larger ...........................10 ft. on center

3. Ductile Iron and Cast Iron: Two hangers per section length.

4. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC):

Up to 1-1/2" ...........................3 ft. on center

2" to 4" ...................................4 ft. on center

5" to 8" ...................................5 ft. on center

10" and larger .........................6 ft. on center

5. Sprinkler and Standpipe: Pipe hangers to be as per NFPA-13 and NFPA-

14 standards.

B. Hanger centerline spacing shall be reduced by 50% in areas of concentrated valves

and/or fittings, also no more than a maximum distance of 12 inches from valves, fittings

and/or couplings, or 24 inches from a change in direction.

3.05. ATTACHMENT TO STRUCTURE

A. For plain steel devices, prime and paint.

B. Adjust attachment location for proper alignment and no more than 4 degrees offset from

a perpendicular alignment.

C. If proper alignment cannot be achieved from the existing building structure, provide a

trapeze type support sized to handle the design load with a minimum safety factor of 5.

3.06. INSERTS

A. Contractor shall have inserts at site and dimensional location drawings ready at the

beginning of the involved concrete work.

B. Install inserts by securing to concrete forms and inserting reinforcing rod through the

opening provided in the insert in accordance with shop drawings.

C. Provide necessary supervision while concrete is being poured to correct any

misalignment caused by the concrete.

3.07. INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS

A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by

ANSI B-31, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bards to piping and to

23 00 90-11

structure. Comply with ANSI B-31, with AWS standards, and with the Details shown

on the drawings.

C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with

expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions to limit movement of piping and

forces to maximums recommended by manufacturer for each unit.

D. Anchor Spacing: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal

pipe runs and at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends.

Make provisions for preset of anchors as required, accommodating both expansion and

contraction of piping.

E. Size anchor shell length to assure a minimum of 1" solid concrete remaining from shell

and to concrete face.

3.08. INSTALLATION OF TRAPEZES OR PIPE RACKS

A. Light/Medium Duty: Assemble from standard manufactured metal framing systems, in

accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Heavy Duty: Fabricate from structural steel shapes selected for loads required. Weld

steel in accordance with AWS standards.

3.09. AUXILIARY STEEL

A. Furnish all miscellaneous structural members necessary to hang or support ductwork,

piping, and mechanical equipment.

B. Notify Engineer of any adjustment necessary in main structural system for proper

support of major equipment.

C. Fabricated Steel Supports: Steel for supports shall be saw cut, with sharp edges ground

smooth. After fabrication, remove all foreign material, including welding slag and

spatter, and leave ready for painting.

END OF SECTION

MAYFLOWER CITY CENTER

& POLICE STATION 23 01 20-1

SECTION 23 0120

PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 Specific requirements for specialties indicated on drawings or in other sections of these

specifications shall take precedence over items as specified in this section.

1.02 Submit brochures and other supportive product data for all items.

1.03 Ranges for thermometer, gages, or similar instruments shall be selected so that normal

operation will be near center of scale. Range shall not be longer than required. Use

compound gage where vacuum may be encountered.

1.04 Combination instruments for thermometers and gages will not be acceptable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 THERMOMETERS:

A. Thermometers shall be equal to Trerice Series BX9, 9-inch, adjustable type. Stem length

shall be a minimum of 3/4 of the pipe diameter, plus well extension length. Use 12-inch

stem length in tanks.

B. Provide brass wells and stems.

2.02 THERMOMETER WELLS:

A. Provide wells with extension neck for insulated piping.

B. Wells shall be Trerice Series 138 type.

C. Test wells to be Trerice Series 169 type with cap and chain.

2.03 GAGES:

A. Gages shall be equal to Trerice Series 800, 3-1/2-inch size.

B. Provide snubber and cock for each gage.

C. Provide coil syphon and cock for each steam gage.

D. Gauges shall be liquid filled.

2.04 TEST PLUGS:



A. Test plugs shall be equal to Peterson Engineering Company #110, 1/4" size, with brass

body, dust cap and "Nordel" valve core material.

2.05 STRAINER:

A. "Y" Type (Haywood, Muessco, or Sarco):

1. 1/2" through 2": Haywood Model 80, bronze, 300 lb. WP, 500 lb. WOG or

Haywood Model 80 iron body, 250 lb. WP, 900 lb. WOG. Provide Monel or

stainless steel screen, blow-off outlet, screwed ends.

2. 2-1/2" through 12": Haywood Model 80 iron body, 125 lb. SWP, 175 lb. WOG,

brass screen, blow-off outlet, flanged ends.

B. Screens - Steam:

1. Monel or stainless steel.

2. Perforations - .057 diameter, 144 per sq. in.

C. Screens - Water:

1. Brass.

2. Perforations: Up to 2" - 1/10" diameter, 49 per sq. in.; 2-1/2" to 4" - 1/8" diameter,

32 per sq. in.; 5" up - 1/4" diameter, 8 per sq. in.

2.06 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS:

A. Pumps and Chillers: Bellows Type 3, equal to Keflex #151-TR-1250, with 150 lb.

flanges and tie rods. 150 psig maximum working pressure. 304 stainless steel. Bellows

welded to flanges. Tie rods with chatter proof spacers. Unit rated at 800°F.

B. Coils, Valves, And Miscellaneous Equipment: Stainless steel braided hose type.

2.07 ELECTRICAL HEAT TAPE:

A. Heat tape shall be equal to Emerson Chromalox.

B. Electrical heat tape shall be installed where indicated on the drawings to prevent pipe

freezing.

C. Heat tape shall be approved for use in hazardous areas as indicated and U.L. listed.

2.08 CALIBRATED BALANCE VALVE:



A. For valves 2” and smaller:

1. Bronze body.

2. Ball or globe type.

3. 250 psig at 250° F rating.

4. Threaded ends.

5. Calibrated orifice or venturi.

6. Meter connections with integral seals.

7. Memory stop.

B. For valves 2-1/2” and larger:

1. Iron or steel body.

2. Ball or globe type.

3. 125 psig at 250° F rating.

4. Flanged connection.

5. Calibrated orifice or venturi.

6. Meter connections with integral seals.

7. Memory stop.

C. Acceptable manufacturers:

1. Flow Design

2. Bell and Gossett

3. Taco

4. Armstrong

5. Nibco

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GAGES, THERMOMETERS, AND TEST PLUGS:



A. Provide thermometers in inlet and outlet piping of chillers, boilers, water heaters, air

handling unit coils, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings.

B. Provide gages on inlet and outlet piping of all pumps, except domestic hot water

circulators, steam gages on boiler headers, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings.

C. Arrange thermometers and gages so they might be read standing in a normal position on

the floor.

D. Provide test plugs on inlet and outlet piping of all heat exchanger equipment not equipped

with thermometers. This includes all heating and cooling coils in air handling units, fan

coil units, and other terminal devices with coils.

E. Locate gages, thermometers, and test plugs as close as possible to equipment being

monitored.

3.02 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS:

A. Install flexible pipe connectors where indicated on the drawings.

B. Install connectors as close as possible to equipment inlets and outlets.

C. Support pipe work independently of flexible connectors. Brace and anchor piping as

required to prevent movement of piping ends of flexible connectors and align all

equipment, pipe work, and flanges so that no flexible connectors shall be misaligned

and/or stressed beyond the manufacturer's recommended maximum limits.

3.03 HEAT TAPE:

A. Install the heat tape below the pipe insulation in a uniform distribution to obtain the

watts/linear foot as indicated.

B. Wiring installation shall be done in accordance with the NEC and the manufacturer's

requirements.

C. Power for heat tape shall come from an emergency circuit. If no emergency circuit is

available, the power shall come from a dedicated circuit, marked heat tape in the panel.

D. Unless indicated otherwise on the plans, install heat tape with a minimum capacity of 5

watts/foot.

E. Heat tape shall be thermostatically controlled and shall be preset to energize before

freezing. An indicator light shall energize when the heat tape is "on."

END OF SECTION

EDUCATION BUILDING

SAU MAGNOLIA 23 01 50-1

SECTION 23 01 50 MECHANICAL HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This Section includes piping for heating water, chilled-water, make-up water,

and associated drain piping.

B. Provide materials suitable for system pressures and temperatures.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of pipe, fitting, and specialty indicated.

B. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and

personnel.

C. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section.

Include the following:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.

D. Maintenance Data: Include hydronic specialties in maintenance manuals.

1.03 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system

components with other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC

equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.

B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations, for

exterior walls and floor assemblies.

D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related

Sections.

E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into

base.

F. Coordinate with requirements for fire stopping.

EDUCATION BUILDING


1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver, store, and protect piping and devices.

B. Maintain hydronic specialties in shipping containers with labeling left in place.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.

B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.

C. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV.

D. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

E. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

F. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin antimony.

G. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (silver).

H. ProPress Mechanical Joints, or equal.

2.02 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASTM A 53, ERW, Grade B, Schedule 40,

black steel, plain ends.

B. Steel Pipe, NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12: ASTM A 53, ERW, Grade B,

Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends.

C. Steel Pipe, NPS 14 through NPS36: ASTM A 53, ERW, Grade B, standard

weight, black steel, plain ends.

D. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, black

steel; ERW.

E. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250.

F. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300.

EDUCATION BUILDING


G. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300.

H. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125,

and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced.

I. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match

adjoining pipe.

J. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings:

ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material

group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1.

2. End Connections: Butt welding.

3. Facings: Raised face.

2.03 PEX PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PEX Distribution System: PEX-a Piping, ASTM F 877, SDR 9 tubing

B. Fittings for PEX Tube: ASTM F 1960, cold expansion fittings with PEX

Reinforcing Rings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Chilled Water and Heating Water, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type L drawn-temper

copper tubing with soldered joints, or Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded

joints.

B. Chilled Water and Heating Water, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Schedule 40 steel

pipe with welded and flanged joints.

C. Equipment Drains: Same as hydronic system connected to equipment, DWV

copper, SCH 80 PVC, or clear vinyl tubing.

3.02 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying

insulation and servicing of valves.

B. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short

NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and

EDUCATION BUILDING


elsewhere as required for system drainage.

C. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to new mains using tee

fittings in main pipe. Use forged tees or forged weld-o-lets for branch

connections to existing mains.

F. Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction. Install

anchors at minimum of 300 linear feet.

G. Route piping plumb and square with the building structure.

H. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space

and other work.

I. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

J. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and

location of access doors.

K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building faming,

scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

L. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting.

M. Install with proper access around device for service clearance.

N. Set and level all floor mounted equipment.

O. For systems requiring drains, install drain and route to nearest drainage point

or as indicated on the drawings.

P. Make-up water and relief:

1. For each system, provide pressure-reducing valve for feeding make-

up water and a pressure relief valve.

2. Provide make-up water from nearest domestic water with reduced

pressure backflow preventer.

3. Operating pressures of PRV and relief valves shall be determined by

required system pressures.

3.04 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

EDUCATION BUILDING


A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment

connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for

examination during test.

2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain

reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical,

isolate expansion joints from testing.

3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.

4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment,

its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without

damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher

than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or

other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is

risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers

and compatible with piping may be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to

release trapped air. Use drains installed at low points for complete

draining of liquid.

3. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and

that system is full of water.

4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than

1.5 times the design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed

maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component

in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of

EDUCATION BUILDING


vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum

yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of

ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 4 hours,

examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks

by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat

hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.

3.06 ADJUSTING

A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system

balancing has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced

position.

B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system:

1. Open valves to fully open position.

2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation.

3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.

4. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are

installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air

completely (manual type).

5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.

6. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.

7. Check and set operating temperatures of chilled water and hot water

systems.

8. Lubricate motors and bearings.

3.07 CLEANING: Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and

clean or replace strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping

systems, but before balancing, remove disposable fine-mesh strainers in

pump suction diffusers.

END OF SECTION 23 01 50



SECTION 23 0160 - MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Provide required insulation for HVAC ductwork and plumbing piping.

1.02 All ductwork and piping is insulated unless otherwise noted.

1.03 SUBMITTTALS

A. Submit product data for each system. Product data shall include but not be limited to the

following:

1. Manufacturer's name

2. Insulation material and thickness

3. Jacket

4. Adhesives

5. Fastening methods

6. Fitting materials

7. Manufacturer's data sheets indicating density, thermal characteristics, temperature

ratings

8. Insulation installation details (manufacturer's installation instructions/details,

Contractor's installation details, MICA plates where applicable)

9. Other appropriate data


A. All ductwork and piping requiring insulation shall be insulated as specified herein and

as required for a complete system. In each case, the insulation shall be equivalent to that

specified and materials applied and finished as described in these Specifications.

B. All insulation, jacket, adhesives, mastics, sealers, etc., utilized in the fabrication of these

systems shall meet NFPA for fire resistant ratings (maximum of 25 flame spread and 50

smoke developed ratings) and shall be approved by the insulation manufacturer for

guaranteed performances when incorporated into their insulation system, unless a

specific product is specified for a specific application and is stated as an exception to

this requirement. Certificates to this effect shall be submitted along with Contractor's

submittal data for this Section of the Specifications. No material may be used that, when



tested by the ASTM E84-89 test method, is found to melt, drip or delaminate to such a

degree that the continuity of the flame front is destroyed, thereby resulting in an

artificially low flame spread rating.

C. Application Company Qualifications: Company performing the Work of this Section

must have a minimum of three (3) years' experience specializing in the trade.

D. All insulation shall be applied by mechanics skilled in this particular Work and

regularly engaged in such occupation.

E. All insulation shall be applied in strict accordance with these Specifications and with

adequate factory-printed recommendations on items not herein mentioned. Unsightly,

inadequate, damaged or water-soaked Work will not be acceptable.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL


local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having

jurisdiction.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. CertainTeed Corporation.

B. Johns Manville Corporation.

C. Knauf Corporation.

D. Owens-Corning.

E. Unifrax 1 LLC (FyreWrap).

F. Armacell

2.03 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Type D1: Flexible glass fiber; ASTM C553 and ASTM C1290; commercial grade; 'k'

value of 0.25 at 75 degrees F; 1.5 lb/cu ft minimum density; 0.002 inch foil scrim kraft

facing for air ducts.

B. Type D2: Rigid glass fiber; ASTM C612, Class 1; 'k' value of 0.23 at 75 degrees F; 3.0

lb/cu ft minimum density; 0.002 inch foil scrim kraft facing for air ducts.

C. Type D3: Ductliner (to be used in return air sound boots only), flexible glass fiber;

ASTM C1071; Type II, ‘k’ value of 0.23 at 75 degrees F; 3.0 lb/cu ft minimum density;

coating air side for maximum 4,000 feet per minute air velocity. The airstream surface

must be protected with a durable acrylic surface coating specifically formulated to:



1. Be no more corrosive than sterile cotton when tested in accordance with the test

method for corrosiveness in ASTM C665.

2. Absorb no more than 3 percent by weight when tested in accordance with the test

method for moisture vapor sorption in ASTM C1104.

3. Not support the growth of fungus or bacteria, when tested in accordance with the

test method for fungi resistance in ASTM C1071, ASTM C1338, ASTM G21, and

ASTM G22.

4. Show no signs of warpage, cracking, delaminating, flaming, smoking, glowing, or

any other visibly negative changes when tested in accordance with the test method

for temperature resistance in ASTM C411.

5. Have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or

less when tested in accordance with the test method for surface burning in ASTM

E 84.

6. Meet the sound absorption requirements when tested in accordance with the test

method for sound absorption in ASTM C423.

7. Show no evidence of continued erosion, cracking, flaking, peeling, or

delamination when tested in accordance with the test method for erosion

resistance in UL181.

D. Type D4: Fire Rated Grease Duct Insulation (High Temperature Flexible Blanket); 1-

1/2-inch thick refractory grade fibrous fire barrier material with minimum service

temperature design of 2,000 degrees F; aluminum foil laminated on both sides; with a

minimum ‘k’ value of 0.25 and a minimum density of 6 lbs/cu ft; containing no

asbestos. Listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) UL to meet

ASTM E 2336, ASTM E119, and with flame spread/smoke minimum rating of 25 / 50

when tested as per ASTM E84/UL 723.

E. Type D5: Outdoor Duct Insulation (Closed Cell Flexible Elastomeric Insulation); 1 inch

thick material that has a service temperature range from –60 degrees F to 180 degrees F.

This outdoor duct insulation meets ASTM C 177 or C 518 and shall have minimum ‘k’

value of 0.27 Btu-in. / hr-ft2- degrees F at minimum density measurement of 3 lb/cu ft.

The insulation and outside surface must be protected with a white Thermo Plastic

Rubber Membrane formulated to:

1. Be resistant to UV, and ozone, acid rain, and physical elements produced from

outdoor weather per ASTM E 96 Procedure A.

2. Have aflame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or

less when tested in accordance with the test method for surface burning in ASTM

E 84.



3. Show no evidence of continued erosion, delaminating, cracking, flaking, or

peeling when tested in accordance with the test method for erosion resistance in

UL181. Be resistant to mold growth resistance, ASTM G 21/C 1338 resistant to

fungi, and resistant to bacteria growth per ASTM G 22.

F. Type D6: Ductliner (to be used in return air sound boots only), flexible glass fiber;

ASTM C1071; Type II, ‘k’ value of 0.23 at 75 degrees F; 3.0 lb/cu ft minimum density;

coating air side for maximum 4,000 feet per minute air velocity. The airstream surface

must be protected with a durable polyacrylate copolymer emulsion specifically

formulated to:

1. Not support the growth of fungus or bacteria, when tested in accordance with the

test method for fungi resistance in ASTM D 5590 with “0” growth rating.

2. Act as a fungicidal protective coating: water based, VOC < 50 g/l. Fungicidal

coating must be EPA registered for use in HVAC duct systems. Manufacturer:

H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc., Foster 40-20 (white) or 40-30 (black)

Fungicidal Protective Coating or approved equal. Coatings may also be used to

repair damage to duct liner insulation.

G. High Density Duct Insulation Insert, see Type D2.

2.04 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesives: Waterproof vapor barrier type, meeting requirements of ASTM C916;

Childers CP-82 or Foster 85-20/85-60.

B. Weather Barrier: Breather Mastic: Childers CP-10/CP-11 or Foster 46-50 White.

C. Vapor Barrier Coating: Permeance - ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.08 perm or less at 45-

mil dry film thickness, tested at 100F and 50%RH; Foster 30-65 or Childers CP-34

1. When higher humidity levels may be of concern, only specify the following

fungus/mold resistant coating: Foster 30-80 AF (anti-fungal). Coating must meet

ASTM D 5590 with 0 growth rating**

D. Reinforcing Mesh: 10x10 or 9x8 glass mesh; Foster Mast a Fab or Childers #10

E. Jacket: Pre-sized glass cloth, minimum 7.8 oz/sq yd.

F. Type D4 Insulation Adhesive: Fire resistive to ASTM E84, Childers CP-82 or Foster

85-20.

G. Impale Anchors: Galvanized steel, 12 gage self-adhesive pad.

H. Joint Tape: Glass fiber cloth, open mesh.

I. Tie Wire and Wire Mesh: Annealed steel, 16 gage.



J. Stainless Steel Banding: 3/4-inch wide, minimum 22 gage, 304 stainless.

K. Armaflex 520, 520 BLV, or Foster 85-75 contact adhesive.

L. Armatuff 25 white seal seam tape.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. The application of all insulation shall be performed by experienced mechanics,

regularly employed in the trade, in a neat and workmanlike manner. Unless otherwise

specified to a greater quality, the application of all insulation shall be in accordance

with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Omit insulation from the following items:

1. Exposed plated plumbing pipe.

2. Vents to atmosphere, discharge from safety and relief valves, overflow pipes, and hot

only drain pipes.

3. Valves, unions, flanges, traps, strainers, and devices in HOT ONLY piping.

C. Foil-Faced (FF) Duct Insulation shall comply with NFPA Standards 90A and 90B.

D. All exposed ends of pipe insulation shall be pointed up neatly with appropriate

insulating cement, or use pre-molded PVC end caps on cold only piping and preformed

aluminum end caps on dual-temp, hot or steam piping.

E. Provide high density insert at duct hangers. Maintain vapor barrier between insulation

and duct hanger. Do not insulate duct hangers or supports.

3.02 DUCT AND PIPE PREPARATION

A. Verify that piping and ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.

C. Maintain required ambient temperature during and after installation for a minimum

period of 24 hours.

3.03 ARMAFLEX PIPE INSULATION

A. Apply in strict accordance with latest edition of Armstrong's "Installation Instructions to

the Contractor". Joints and seams shall be sealed moisture tight without gaps and

openings in the insulation



3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements,

referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations.

C. Extend duct insulation without interruption through walls, floors, and similar

penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.

D. Provide external insulation on all round ductwork connectors to ceiling diffusers and on

top of diffusers as indicated in the Ductwork Insulation Application and Thickness

Schedule and the Drawings. Secure insulation to the top of ceiling diffusers with

UL181B-FX listed polypropylene duct tape Do not insulate top of ceiling diffuser if it is

used in ceiling return air plenum or in an open space with no ceiling.

E. Flexible and Rigid fiberglass insulation (Types D1 and D2) application for exterior of

duct:

1. Secure flexible insulation jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive, tape. Tape

shall be UL181B-FX listed polypropylene duct tape.

2. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use 4-inch wide strips of adhesive

on 8-inch centers and mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging.

Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier

adhesive. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to

allow operation without disturbing wrapping.

3. Insulate standing seams and stiffeners that protrude through the insulation with 1-

1/2 inch thick, unfaced, flexible blanket insulation. Cover with reinforcing mesh

and coat with vapor barrier finish coating.

4. On circumferential joints, the 2-inch flange on the facing shall be secured with

9/16 inch outward clinch steel staples on 2-inch centers, and taped with minimum

3-inch wide strip of glass fabric and finish coating.

5. Vapor seal all seams, joints, pin penetrations and other breaks with vapor barrier

coating reinforced with reinforcing mesh.

F. Duct Liner (Type D3 or D6) application for interior of return air sound boots or return

air plenums:

1. Secure insulation with 100 percent coverage of duct liner adhesive, pins and clips

not more than 18 inches on center.

2. Secure bottom of duct insulation using alternate single and double clips. The first

pin will secure the insulation and the second clip will be used to secure the



cladding. Isolate the exterior clip from the cladding by using two 1/8 inch closed

cell neoprene (Armaflex) washers on either side of the cladding. Predrill holes in

cladding and avoid contact with pin during installation.

3. For round duct, secure insulation with 100 percent coverage of duct liner

adhesive. Secure cladding with 3/4 inch, 0.020 inch stainless steel bands on 12-

inch centers.

4. For joints and overlaps, fold cladding to form a double thickness hem 2 inches

minimum. Seal with a non-shrink, non-hardening sealing compound.

5. Type D6: Provide fungicidal coating in air handlers ten feet on either side, first

ten feet downstream of cooling coils, ten feet downstream of mix boxes, in

mechanical rooms or as otherwise specified in potentially high humidity areas in

the duct system shall be coated with an fungicidal coating; EPA registered for use

in HVAC duct systems at a coverage rate of 80 ft2/gallon.

G. Insulation (Type D4) application for exterior of grease ducts:

1. External duct wrap system requires two (2) 1.5-inch layers of lightweight, flexible

wrap overlapped to provide an effective fire barrier. The barrier is installed in 24-

inch or 48-inch wide sections. Insulation pins are welded in certain locations to

maintain the fire barrier material up against the duct.

2. Grease duct doors to be installed so the door can be removed and re installed and

meet code requirements.

3. Install duct wrap as tested per manufacturer’s instructions to assure the duct wrap

is mechanically attached per the manufacturer’s spacing of bands or weld pins.

4. Vertical and horizontal members of the support hanger system shall be wrapped

with one layer of the insulation. Vertical and horizontal portions shall be wrapped

independent of one another. The horizontal hanger shall be removed from the

vertical support rods and wrapped and then immediately replaced so that an

adjacent horizontal support can be removed, wrapped, and reinstalled. The end of

the threaded vertical rod shall extend 6-inch past the horizontal member at the

beginning of the installation.

5. Penetrations: Where ducts penetrate fire rated walls, floors and roofs, the duct

wrap shall be used in conjunction with a firestop system that is listed by a

nationally recognized laboratory and rated for penetration of a rated wall or floor

by the fire rated grease duct system used.

H. Insulation (Type D5) application for outdoor ducts:

1. Horizontal ductwork located outdoors shall be sloped at a minimum 2-degree

angle to prevent the accumulation of water on top of the finished insulated duct.

Support members that connect directly to the ductwork are to be insulated with



this same material. Keep compression or sharp creases of outdoor insulation to a

minimum by distributing the weight of the duct resting on horizontal duct support

members.

2. Follow the insulation manufacturer’s installation instructions and procedures to

assure the ductwork is properly insulated and that the insulation will meet the

manufacturer’s warranty requirements.

I. All ductwork, accessories, and all plenums including metal and masonry construction,

etc., shall be insulated as indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein and as required

for a complete system. In each case, the insulation shall be equal to that specified and

materials applied and finished as described in these Specifications.

J. Flexible ductwork connections to equipment shall not be insulated.

K. Where vapor barriers are required, the vapor barrier shall be on the outside. Extreme

care shall be taken that the vapor barrier is unbroken. Joints, etc., shall all be sealed.

Where insulation with a vapor barrier terminates, it shall be sealed off with the vapor

barrier being continuous to the surface being insulated. Ends shall not be left raw.

L. Extreme care shall be taken in insulating high and medium pressure ductwork including

all ductwork between the fan discharge and all mixing boxes to ensure the duct is not

pierced with sheet metal screws or other fasteners. All high and medium pressure ducts

in these Specifications are classified as high velocity ductwork.

M. Where canvas finish is specified use lagging adhesive/coating to prevent mildew in

securing canvas. Do not use wheat paste. Use only anti-fungal lagging adhesive that

adheres to ASTM D 5590 with 0 growth rating. (Foster 30-36AF, Childers CP-137AF).

In addition, cover all exterior canvas-covered insulation with a fire retardant weather

barrier mastic.

N. All supply ductwork in the Project shall be insulated; all exhaust and fume hood exhaust

ductwork shall not be insulated, unless used for energy recovery purposes or noted on

drawings.

O. Flexible round ducts shall be factory insulated.

3.05 INSPECTION

A. Visually inspect the completed insulation installation per manufacturers recommended

materials, procedures and repair or replace any improperly sealed joints.

B. Where there is evidence of vapor barrier failure or “wet” insulation after installation, the

damaged insulation shall be removed, duct surface shall be cleaned and dried and new

insulation shall be installed.

3.06 DUCTWORK INSULATION APPLICATION AND THICKNESS SCHEDULE



Ductwork System Application

Insulation

Type

Insulation

Thickness

Supply Air

(Hot, Cold, Combination)

Outside of Mechani-

cal Rooms D1 2"

Inside of

Mechanical Rooms D2 1-1/2"

Return Air, Relief Air, and Ex-

haust Air All D1 1"

Outside Air Treated and Untreat-

ed D1 2"

Kitchen Grease Hood Exhaust

Air All D4 3"

Duct mounted coils Inside of

Mechanical Rooms D2 2”

Terminal Unit Heating Coils All D1 2”

Supply Air Diffusers Top of Diffuser D1 2"

Supply Air Duct Outdoor Environ-

ment D5 2”

Return, Exhaust Air Duct Outdoor Environ-

ment D5 1-1/2"

Return Air Sound

Boots/Elbows/Return Air Ple-

nums

All D6 1"


23705 -1 HIGH PRESSURE DUCTWORK

SECTION 230705

HIGH PRESSURE DUCTWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Extent of high pressure ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by

requirements of this section. High pressure ductwork is hereby defined as supply

ductwork between air handling units and terminal air boxes, see drawings for pressure

classes.


A. Installer: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects

with high pressure ductwork systems work similar to that required for project.

B. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards"

for fabrication and installation of high pressure ductwork.

C. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, 1988 Equipment Volume,

Chapter 1 "Duct Construction," for fabrication and installation of high pressure ductwork.

D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air

Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and ANSI/NFPA 90B "Standard for the

Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

E. Field Reference Manual: Have available at project field office, copy of "SMACNA

HVAC Duct Construction Standards - current edition."

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications on manufactured products and

factory-fabricated ductwork and duct sealants, used for work of this section.

B. Submit duct leakage tests.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased

products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and

prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.

B. Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to

store outside, store above grade and enclosure with waterproof wrapping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DUCTWORK MATERIALS:


A. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet

steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A 527, lock-forming quality, with ANSI/ASTM A

525, G90 zinc coating; mill phosphatized for exposed locations.

2.02 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIAL:

A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and,

where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork

system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment.

B. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15

degree change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45

degree laterals and 45 degree elbows for branch take-off connections. Where 90 degree

branches are indicated, provide conical type tees.

C. Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant (type

applicable for fabrication/installation detail) as compounded and recommended by

manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork.

D. Duct Cement: Non-hardening, migrating mastic or liquid neoprene based cement (type

applicable for fabrication/installation detail) as compounded and recommended by

manufacturer specifically for cementing fitting components, or longitudinal seams in

ductwork.

E. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped

galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork.

1. Except where space is indicated as "High-Humidity area, interior support

materials of not less than 1/4" diameter or 3/16" thickness may be plain (not

galvanized).

2. For exposed stainless steel ductwork, provide matching stainless steel support

materials.

F. Flexible Duct: Furnish and install where indicated on the drawings semi-rigid

lightweight aluminum duct. Duct to be manufactured using a soft aluminum strip which

is spirally wound and mechanically joined. Duct to be listed under UL #181 Class 1 and

NFPA 90A. Insulation shall be 1-1/2” thick, ¾ lb. density fiberglass blanket, maximum

“K” value of 0.25 btu-in/hr.-ft-F and vapor barrier shall be metalized Mylar film. Semi-

rigid duct shall be rated for 12” positive and 12” negative static pressure. Duct to be

equal to Flexmaster Type TL-M. Vinyl or non-aluminized vapor barriers will not be

allowed. Maximum runouts shall not exceed lengths indicated on drawings.

G. Access Doors: Access doors in high velocity ducts shall be equal to Semco Type 5-3I.

Door shall be rated for installation in duct systems with pressures up to 8 in w.g. Where

required for fire dampers, door shall be furnished as a factory fabricated unit along with

extended sleeve and fire damper (installed downstream of fire reinforced corners). Door

shall be 20 gage galvanized steel sheet with 1" inch thick foil faced duct liner insulation,

sandwiched to 22 gage perforated inner liner. Door panel shall have spring clips designed

to relieve a minimum of 150 cfm at 2-1/2" negative. Panels shall be: 12" x 12" on ducts

less than 12" diameter; 12" x 18" on ducts from 12" to 24" diameter; and 18" x 18" on

ducts from 26" to 36" diameter.


2.03 FABRICATION:

A. Shop fabricate ductwork in 4, 8, 10 or 12-foot lengths, unless otherwise indicated or

required to complete runs.

B. Shop fabricate ductwork of gages and reinforcement complying with SMACNA "HVAC

Duct Standards."

C. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as

applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with centerline

radius equal to associated duct width. Limit angular tapers to 30 degrees for contracting

tapers and 20 degrees for expanding tapers.

D. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent

possible.

2.04 FACTORY-FABRICATED DUCTWORK:

A. General: At Installer's option, provide factory-fabricated duct and fittings, in lieu of

shop-fabricated duct and fittings.

B. Round Ductwork:

1. Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A 527 by the

following methods and in minimum gages listed.

DIAMETER MINIMUM GAGE METHOD OF MANUFACTURE

3" to 14" 26 Spiral Lockseam





over 60" 16 Longitudinal Seam

2. Provide locked seams for spiral duct; fusion-welded butt seam for longitudinal

seam duct.

3. Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gages listed. Provide continuous

welds along seams.

DIAMETER MINIMUM GAGE

3" to 36" 20

38" to 50" 18

Over 50" 16

C. Flat-Oval Ductwork: Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A

527, of spiral lockseam construction, in minimum gages listed.

MAXIMUM WIDTH MINIMUM GAGE

Under 25" 24

25" to 48" 22

49" to 70" 20

Over 70" 18



weld along seams.

MAXIMUM WIDTH MINIMUM GAGE

Up to 8" 22

8" to 37" 20

37" to 50" 18

Over 50" 16

D. Internally Insulated Duct and Fittings: Construct with outer pressure shell, 1" thick

insulation layer, and perforated inner liner. Construct shell and liner of galvanized sheet

steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A 527, of spiral lockseam construction (use

longitudinal seam for over 59"), in minimum gages listed.

ROUND NOMINAL DUCT

DIAMETER OUTER SHELL INNER LINER

3" to 12" 26 ga. 28 ga.

13" to 24" 24 ga. 28 ga.

25" to 34" 22 ga. 28 ga.

35" to 48" 20 ga. 28 ga.

49" to 58" 18 ga. 28 ga.

Over 59" 16 ga. 28 ga.

FLAT OVAL OUTER DUCT

MAJOR AXIS OUTER SHELL INNER LINER

To 12" 26 ga. 28 ga.

13" to 24" 24 ga. 28 ga.

25" to 34" 22 ga. 28 ga.

35" to 48" 20 ga. 28 ga.

49" to 58" 18 ga. 28 ga.


weld along seams of outer shell.

2. NOMINAL DUCT

DIAMETER OUTER SHELL INNER LINER

3" to 34" 20 ga. 20 ga.

36" to 48" 18 ga. 20 ga.

Over 48" 16 ga. 20 ga.

3. Inner Liner: Perforate with 3/32" holes for 22% open area. Provide metal

spacers welded in position to maintain spacing and concentricity.

4. Hospital grade insulation shall completely fill the 1" space between the liner and

the outer shell and shall have the following UL ratings:

Flame Spread 10-20

Fuel Contributed 10-15

Smoke Developed 10-20


5. At the end of an insulated section or run, where internally insulated duct connects

to insulated spiral duct or fittings, fire damper or flex, a manufactured insulation

end fitting shall be installed to bring the outer pressure shell down to nominal

size.

E. Fittings shall be equal to Semco Mfg., Inc. machine formed fittings as follows:

1. 90 degree elbow - 10 inch and smaller ............... E901

2. 45 degree elbow - 10 inch and smaller ................ E451

3. 90 degree elbow - over 10 inch ............................ E905

4. 45 degree elbow - over 10 inch ............................ E453

5. 90 degree conical tee ............................................ CT

6. 90 degree reducing conical tee ............................. CTR

7. 180 degree conical cross ...................................... CC

8. 180 degree conical cross, reducing .................. CCR

9. 45 degree lateral ................................................... L

10. 45 degree double lateral cross .............................. LC

11. 45 degree reducing lateral .................................... LR

12. 45 degree double reducing lateral ..................... LDR

13. Two-way "Y" ....................................................... WYE

14. Concentric Reducer.............................................. RC

15. Non-Concentric Reducer ..................................... RE

16. Coupling (Male) ................................................... CPL-M

17. Coupling (Female) ............................................... CPL-F

18. Offset ................................................................... OFF

19. Round to Oval Transition (Concentric) ............... RC

20. Round to Oval Transition (Non-Concentric) ....... RE

F. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering factory-fabricated ductwork which may be incorporated in the work include, but

are not limited to, the following:

1. Semco, Inc.

2. McGill Airflow, LLC.

3. Spiral Pipe of Texas

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK:

A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry

practices which will achieve an airtight system and noiseless (no objectionable noise)

systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum of

joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and

with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers,

and anchors of type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling.

3.02 DUCT SEALING


A. Seal supply, return and exhaust ductwork per SMACNA high pressure standards with

mastic equal to "Hard Cast" FTA-20 with DT tape for indoor use and RTA-50 with DT

tape for outdoor use.

1. Seal per SMACNA Standards to achieve airtight system.

2. Duct Seal Levels:

Duct Location Duct Type

Supply Exhaust Return

Outdoors A A A

Unconditioned Spaces A B B

Conditioned spaces (concealed ductwork) B B B

Conditioned spaces (exposed ductwork) B B B

Lab and Animal Room Exhaust A A

3. Seal Level Description:

Seal Level Sealing Requirements

A All transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetration

B All transverse joints and longitudinal seams

C Transverse joints only

4. Seal ductwork, after installation, in accordance with recommendations of

SMACNA Standards.

5. All high velocity ductwork joints shall be either welded or joint shall be sealed.

6. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

a. Application Method: Brush on.

b. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.

c. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.

d. Water Resistant.

e. Mold and Mildew Resistant.

f. VOC: Maximum 75g/L (less water).

g. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.

h. Service: Indoor or Outdoor.

i. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and

bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.

7. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

a. General: Single-component, acid curing, silicone, elastomeric.

b. Type: S.


c. Grade: NS.

d. Class: 25.

e. Use: O.

B. Install concrete inserts for support of ductwork in coordination with formwork, as

required to avoid delays in work. Drilled expansion anchors selected and installed as

directed by manufacturer may be used. Expansion anchors shall be equal to "Phillips Red

Head", verify with structural engineer that drilled anchors are suitable for the deck

design.

C. Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop-fabricated work and

accommodate installation requirements.

D. Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and

avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and

notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not

obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts

close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent-

enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for

enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where

possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. Where possible

in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical

shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal

runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended

ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.

E. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run ductwork through transformer vaults and other

electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

F. Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, conceal space between

construction opening and duct or duct-plus-insulation with sheet metal flanges of same

gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2".

G. Where ducts pass through fire-rated floors, walls, or partitions, install fire dampers,

provide firestopping between duct and substrate.

H. Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames,

equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system.

I. Support ductwork in manner complying with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Standards."

3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:

A. Clean ductwork internally, unit-by-unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean

external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of

metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint

deterioration.

B. Strip protective paper from stainless ductwork surfaces, and repair finish wherever it has

been damaged.


C. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air

distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of

polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until

time connections are to be completed.

3.04 TESTING FOR LEAKAGE:

A. General: After each duct system is completed, test for duct leakage in accordance with

SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 1995 Edition. Repair leaks and repeat

test until total leakage is less than limits outlined in the manual.

END OF SECTION

23 07 10-1

SECTION 23 0710 - HVAC SHEET METAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. All low pressure duct work including supply, exhaust, and outside air to complete the

systems as shown on the Drawings or specified herein.

1.02 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit the following:

1. Air distribution devices.

2. Life safety dampers and doors.

3. Flexible duct.

4. Flexible connections.

5. Access doors and duct access doors.

6. Turning vanes.

7. Duct take-off, fittings.

8. Roof outside air intake.

9. Duct sealants.

10. Duct leak tests.

1.03 GOVERNING PUBLICATIONS AND AUTHORITIES:

A. ASHRAE "Guide".

B. SMACNA "Low Velocity Duct Construction Standards".

C. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.

D. NFPA Pamphlets No. 90A, 90B, 91 and 96.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DUCT MATERIALS:

A. Galvanized steel sheets shall be lock-forming quality (LFQ), shall have a galvanized

690 zinc coating of 1-1/4 oz. total for both sides of one square foot, and the gauge of

galvanized steel sheets shall be as prescribed by the latest edition of SMACNA for

pressure classification of ductwork.

B. Aluminum sheets shall be made from an aluminum base alloy having not more than

23 07 10-2

0.5% copper (for corrosion resistance), a minimum tensile strength of 16,000 psi and

the ability to satisfactorily make a Pittsburgh lock seam without splitting.

2.02 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS:

A. Flexible connections shall be made on duct connections of air moving equipment

greater than 2000 CFM or as required for equipment installation.

B. Connections shall be made of 30 ounce woven glass fabric; fire-, water-, and

weather-resistant fabric equal to “Ventfab”, double coated with neoprene "Ventglas",

or equal. Canvas connections to give no less than 3" clear break between metals

jointed. Insulate with 1" minimum fiberglass duct wrap with a vapor barrier facing of

foil reinforced kraft. Seal with reinforced aluminum tape.

C. Flexible connections on exterior shall be protected from weather with sheetmetal

cover which shall be coated for protection same as ductwork.

D. Connections in high pressure systems, fume hoods, and for those exposed to the

weather shall be made from "Ventglas", neoprene coated glass fabric.

2.03 ACCESS DOORS:

A. Access doors to 16" by 24" size shall be "Ventlock" stamped insulated access doors.

B. Larger access doors shall be double panel construction with one inch thick 1.5 pcf

density rigid insulation between panels. Doors with largest dimension over 24", but

less than 48", shall use "Ventlock" series 200 latches, hinges and gasketing, and

construction shall be 22 gage galvanized steel. Doors with largest dimension over

48" shall use "Ventlock" series 300 latches, hinges and gasketing, and construction

shall be 20 gage galvanized steel.

C. Provide vision panels on access doors for fire dampers and control dampers.

2.04 FLEXIBLE DUCT:

A. Low Pressure: furnish and install, where indicated on the drawings, flexible metal

insulated round ductwork, factory fabricated, listed under U.L. #181, Class 1 and

NFPA 90A, capable of a minimum centerline bend radius equal to duct inside

diameter. Insulation shall be 1-1/2" thick, 3/4 lb. density fiberglass blanket,

maximum "K" value of 0.25 btu-in/hr-ft5-EF., and vapor barrier shall be neoprene

coated fiberglass fabric laminated to aluminized polyester film. Flexible duct shall

be rated for 10" positive and 2" negative static pressure.

B. Vinyl or non- aluminized vapor barriers will not be allowed. Maximum runouts shall

not exceed length indicated on drawings in notes or details.

2.05 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES:

A. General:

1. All outlet grilles shall have gaskets.

2. Furnish opposed blade volume controls on all supply outlets and return

23 07 10-3

grilles.

B. Devices: Devices shall be as scheduled on the drawings.

2.06 LIFE SAFETY DAMPERS:

A. Dampers shall be equal to those manufactured by the Ruskin Corporation or

Greenheck.

B. Dampers shall be U.L. listed.

C. Fire, smoke or combination fire/smoke dampers shall be provided in rated

assemblies requiring them.

D. All dampers, methods and location of installation shall comply with the requirements

of the International Building Code, National Fire Protection Association and all

authorities having jurisdiction. In the case of discrepancies, most stringent

requirements shall dictate installation.

E. Fire and smoke dampers shall be provided with an approved means of access, large

enough to permit inspection and maintenance of the damper and its operating parts.

Access shall be provided on either side of damper assemblies.

F. Access shall not affect the integrity of fire-resistance-rated assemblies. The access

openings shall not reduce the fire-resistance rating of the assembly.

G. Provide access door minimum 12" x 12".

H. Access points shall be permanently identified on the exterior by a label having letters

not less than 0.5 inch (12.7 mm) in height reading: fire/smoke damper, smoke

damper or fire damper.

I. Access doors in ducts shall be tight fitting and suitable for the required duct

construction. Contractor shall install dampers in accordance with the following:

J. Fire dampers shall be constructed and tested in accordance with UL Safety Standard

555. Dampers shall have an hourly rating as indicated on the drawings, a 212°F

fusible link, and shall include a UL label.

K. All outlet grilles shall have gaskets.

L. Contractor shall furnish opposed blade volume controls on all supply outlets and

return grilles.

M. Dampers shall be equipped for vertical or horizontal installation as required by the

location.

N. Manufacturer’s integral sleeves and frames may be used at the contractor's option.

O. Dampers shall be provided which are tested and rated for design duct velocity and

pressure.

P. Dampers rating shall meet or exceed the rating of the wall in which it is housed.

23 07 10-4

Q. Contractor shall install fire or smoke or combination dampers in all rated walls as

necessary to maintain the integrity of all rated walls whether indicated on the plans

or not.

2.07 ACCESSORIES:

A. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Furnish and install single thickness, multiple radius,

airfoil steel turning vanes. Static pressure loss for square ducts shall be no more than

20% of velocity head. Turning vanes shall be furnished with a mounting plate to

facilitate installation in ductwork.

B. Manual Balancing Damper:

1. Square or Rectangular: Minimum 16 ga. body and 18 ga. blades, equal to

Ruskin or Greenheck with vinyl blade seal and locking hand operator

quadrant.

2. Round: Minimum 20 ga. body and 22 ga. blades, equal to Ruskin or

Greenheck with locking hand operator

C. Control Dampers:

1. Control dampers shall be furnished by AHU Manufacturer or Control

System.

D. All dampers shall be capable of 100% seal off.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL:

A. All ductwork not specifically indicated on drawings or specified elsewhere to be

high- pressure duct shall be fabricated, braced and erected in accordance with

SMACNA "Low Velocity Duct Construction Standard" or the latest edition of

ASHRAE "Guide".

B. Ductwork shall be galvanized steel unless otherwise noted.

C. Stainless steel and aluminum ductwork shall welded seam.

D. Adhere to drawings as closely as possible. However, where required to meet

structural or other interferences vary the run and shape of ducts and make offsets

during progress of work. Duct routes shall be established and field measurements

shall be taken before duct work is fabricated. Where pipes or other items are "taken-

in" to the duct, streamline collars shall be formed and placed around the item. If

collar obstructs more than 20% of the cross sectional area, the duct shall be enlarged

to accommodate obstruction.

E. All changes of direction and elbows shall be fitted with turning vanes. Standard

radius elbows may be used if space permits.

F. Ductwork shall be free of any objectionable self-generating noise or rattles.

23 07 10-5

G. Furnish and install shop fabricated ductwork. Pre-assemble work in shop to the

greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field assembly of systems. Fabricate

ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent possible.

H. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct

requirements as applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate

elbows with center-line radius equal to associated duct width. Limit angular tapers

to 30 degrees for contracting tapers and 20 degrees for expanding tapers.

I. Duct Sealing: All ductwork, regardless of system pressure classification, shall be sealed

in accordance with Seal Class A, as referenced in SMACNA Standards. All transverse

joints, longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetrations shall be sealed.

1. All seams and joints in shop and field fabricated ductwork shall be sealed by

applying duct sealant complying with manufacturer’s recommendations. Tapes

recommended by the sealant manufacturer may used in addition to sealant to achieve

leakage limit requirements.

2. Sealant shall be water based latex UL 181A-M sealant with flame spread of 0 and

smoke developed of 0. Sealants shall be Hard Cast Iron Grip 601, Ductmate Pro

Seal, Foster 32-19, Childers CP-146 or Design Polymerics DP 1010.

3. Sealing tapes shall be from the same manufacturer as duct sealants.

4. Sealer shall be rated by the manufacturer and shall be suitable for use at the system

pressure classification of applicable ductwork.

5. Except as noted, oil or solvent-based sealants are specifically prohibited.

6. For exterior applications, “Uni-Weather” (United McGill Corporation), solvent-

based sealant, or Foster 32-19 shall be used.

J. Support materials shall be hot dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods,

straps, trim and angles. (Support duct with all thread rods and unistrut as equal

trapeze hangers).

K. Install air flow measuring stations, furnished by Control Contractor, where indicated

on the drawings.

3.02 MANUAL BALANCING DAMPERS:

A. All low pressure branch ducts on either supply, return or exhaust shall be provided

by some means of balancing in addition to dampers at registers.

B. Splitter dampers shall be made of at least the same thickness material as duct

(minimum thickness 22 gage). They shall be securely hinged at air leaving edge and

made of 2 thicknesses so that entering edge presents a rounded surface to air flow.

C. Butterfly dampers shall be made of 16 gage galvanized steel. Butterfly dampers may

be used in widths up to 10" wide. Dampers that require blades over 10" wide shall

be multi-blade louver dampers.

D. Multi-blade louver dampers used for balancing shall be of the opposed blade type.

23 07 10-6

Damper blades shall be constructed of 16 gage steel. Individual blade width shall

not exceed 10" and blade length shall not exceed 48".

E. All dampers shall be so constructed and installed that there shall be no vibration due

to air flow over damper.

F. Extend all handles and levers to outside of insulation.

3.03 ACCESS DOOR:

A. Access doors shall be provided at all dampers, equipment in duct and as indicated on

drawings.

B. Access doors shall be minimum of 12" X 12" unless a larger size is required for

maintenance of equipment or a smaller size must be used because of small duct size.

C. Provide access doors at all fire dampers, smoke dampers, humidifiers, and as

indicated on the drawings.

3.04 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS:

A. Furnish and install sound isolating flexible connections on the inlet and outlet of

each fan and unit to which duct connectors are made.

B. At least one inch slack shall be allowed in these connections to insure that no

vibration is transmitted from fan to ductwork.

C. The fabric shall either be folded in with the metal or attached with metal collar

frames at each end to prevent air leakage.

3.05 FLEXIBLE DUCT

A. Maximum runout shall not exceed lengths indicated on drawings.

B. Ducts shall be supported at intervals indicated in SMACNA and not laid on top of

ceiling.

C. Minimum bend radius shall be as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Ducts shall be run straight and true with minimum offsets, and with excess duct

lengths removed.

E. Connections to ducts and air devices shall be with minimum of one duct diameter

straight into connection (kinked or pinched installations restricting flows are not

acceptable).

F. Connections to duct and air devices shall be air tight.

3.06 TESTS:

A. Test duct systems in accordance with SMACNA latest edition of HVAC Air Duct

Leakage Test Manual to achieve air tight systems not exceeding the limits outlined in

the manual. Submit test results.

END OF SECTION

230895 -1 AIR TERMINAL DEVICES

SECTION 230895

AIR TERMINAL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Extent of air terminals work required by this section is indicated on drawings and

schedules and by requirements of this section.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air terminals

with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in

satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. ADC Compliance: Provide air terminals which have been tested and rated in

accordance with ADC standards, and bear ADC Seal.

2. AHRI Compliance: Provide air terminals which have been tested and rated in

accordance with ARI 880 "Industry Standard for Air Terminals" and bear ARI

certification seal.

3. NFPA Compliance: Construct air terminals using acoustical and thermal

insulations complying with NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating

Systems."

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including performance data

for each size and type of air terminal furnished; schedule showing drawing designation,

room location, number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished; and

installation and start-up instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating

dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of

components.

C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of air terminal;

including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data, product data, shop

drawings, and maintenance data in maintenance manual.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver air terminals wrapped in factory-fabricated fiberboard type containers. Identify

on outside of container type of air terminal and location to be installed. Avoid crushing

or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in boxes.


B. Store air terminals in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work

traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above

grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering air terminals which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited

to, the following or equal:

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air terminals of

one

a. Kreuger

b. Tuttle-Bailey

c. Price

d. Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc.

2.02 AIR TERMINALS – SUPPLY AND EXHAUST

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated and tested air terminals as indicated, selected with

performance characteristics which match or exceed those indicated on schedule.

B. Terminals shall be pressure independent type. Provide with cross-shaped flow sensor, and

factory damper ready for installation of box damper actuator and electronic controller

provided by control system manufacturer.

C. The casing shall be constructed of coated steel meeting SMACNA or ASHRAE

Standards. Internal insulation shall meet the requirements of NFPA Bulletin 90A and UL

181. Boxes shall have solid galvanized sheet metal liner.

D. Terminal box shall have 24 volt control voltage provided by control system

manufacturer.

E. Furnish each supply air terminal with heating coil as specified on the drawings. Hot water

coils shall be a minimum of two rows.

F. Control system contractor shall provide readout at the graphical computer interface of the

following points:

1. Airflow, CFM

2. Box damper position, and commanded % open.

3. Leaving air temperature.

4. SCR heater operation, and output.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION:

A. Examine areas and conditions under which air terminals are to be installed. Do not

proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner

acceptable to Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF AIR TERMINALS:

A. General: Install air terminals as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's

installation instructions.

B. Location: Install each unit level and accurately in position indicated in relation to other

work; and maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance, but in no

case less than that recommended by manufacturer.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Upon completion of installation and prior to initial operation, test and demonstrate that

air terminals, and duct connections to air terminals, are leak-tight.

B. Repair or replace air terminals and duct connections as required to eliminate leaks, and

retest to demonstrate compliance.

3.04 CLEANING:

A. Clean exposed factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with

manufacturer's touch-up paint.

END OF SECTION


THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

23 09 90-1

SECTION 23 0990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY:

A. This section specifies the requirements and procedures for total mechanical systems

testing, adjusting, and balancing. Requirements include measurement and

establishment of the fluid quantities and temperatures of the mechanical systems as

required to meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the results.

1. Test, adjust, and balance the following mechanical systems:

a. Supply air systems, all pressure ranges.

b. Return air systems.

c. Exhaust air systems.

d. Outside air systems.

e. Verify control system operation.

2. Contractor shall:

a. Put heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and equipment

into full operation and continue the operation of same during each

working day of testing and balancing.

b. Allow the air balance agency to schedule this work in cooperation

with other trades involved and comply with the completion date.

c. Make available to the balance agency a complete copy of submittal

data on mechanical equipment including pump performance curves,

fan curves, manufacturer's balancing factors and other manufacturers

ratings for installed equipment.

d. Make any changes in pulleys, belts, and dampers or the addition of

dampers as required for correct balance as recommended by TAB

Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner.

e. Have strainers and filters clean prior to starting of testing and

balancing activity.

23 09 90-2

B. This section does not include:

1. Specifications for materials for patching mechanical systems.

2. Specifications for materials and installation of adjusting and balancing

devices. If

devices must be added to achieve proper adjusting and balancing, refer to the

respective system sections for materials and installation requirements.

3. Requirements and procedures for piping and ductwork systems leakage tests.

1.02 DEFINITIONS:

A. Systems testing, adjusting, and balancing is the process of checking and adjusting

building environmental systems to produce design objectives. It includes:

1. Balance of air distribution;

2. Adjustment of total system to provide design qualities;

3. Electrical measurement;

4. Verification of performance of equipment and automatic controls;

B. Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment.

C. Adjust: To regulate the specified fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal

equipment (e.g., reduce fan speed, throttling).

D. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system (mains, branches, and

terminals) according to specified design quantities.

E. Report Forms: Test data sheets arranged for collecting test data in logical order for

submission and review. These data should also form the permanent record to be

used as the basis for required future testing, adjusting and balancing.

F. Terminal: The point where controlled fluid enters or leaves the distribution system.

These are supply inlets on water terminals, supply outlets on air terminals, return

outlets on water terminals, and exhaust or return inlets on air terminals such as

registers, grilles, diffusers, louvers, and hoods.

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Agency Data: Submit proof that the proposed testing, adjusting, and balancing

agency meets the qualifications specified below.

23 09 90-3

B. Technicians Data: Submit proof that the Test and Balance Staff assigned to

supervise the procedures, and the technicians proposed to perform the procedures

meet the qualifications specified below.

C. Procedures and Agenda: Submit a synopsis of the testing, adjusting, and balancing

procedures and agenda proposed to be used for this project.

D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance and operating data that include how to test,

adjust, and balance the building systems.

E. Sample Forms: Submit sample forms.

F. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal

and signature of the Test and Balance Technician. The reports shall be certified

proof that the systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with

the referenced standards; are an accurate representation of how the systems have

been installed; are a true representation of how the systems are operating at the

completion of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures; and are an accurate

record of all final quantities measured, to establish normal operating values of the

systems. Follow the procedures and format specified below.

G. Draft Reports: Upon completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures,

prepare draft reports on the approved forms. Draft reports may be hand written, but

must be complete, factual, accurate, and legible. Organize and format draft reports

in the same manner specified for the final reports. Submit 2 complete sets of draft

reports. Only 1 complete set of draft reports will be returned.

H. Final Report: Upon verification and approval of draft reports, prepare final reports,

type written, and organized and formatted as specified below. Submit 2 complete

sets of final reports.

I. Report Format: Report forms shall be those standard forms prepared by the

referenced standard for each respective item and system to be tested, adjusted, and

balanced. Bind report forms complete with schematic systems diagrams and other

data in reinforced, vinyl, three-ring binders. Provide binding edge labels with the

project identification and a title descriptive of the contents. Divide contents of

binder into the below listed divisions, separated by divider tabs:

1. General Information and Summary

2. Air Systems

4. Temperature Control Systems

J. Report Contents: Provide the following minimum information, forms and data:

23 09 90-4

1. General Information And Summary: Inside cover sheet to identify testing,

adjusting, and balancing agency, Contractor and Project. Include addresses,

and contact names and telephone numbers. Also include a sheet containing

the seal and name address, telephone number, and signature of the Certified

Test and Balance Technician. Include in this division a listing of the

instrumentations used for the procedures along with the proof of calibration.

2. The remainder of the report shall contain the appropriate forms for each

respective item and system. Prepare a schematic diagram for each item of

equipment and system to accompany each respective report form.

3. Air systems report shall include the following:

a. blower RPM;

b. motor full load amperes and voltages;

c. system static pressures, suction and discharge;

d. cfm outside air (for demand controlled ventilation with CO2 sensors,

provide airflow readings at 2 different CO2 levels;

e. entering air temperatures; DB/WB

f. leaving air temperatures; DB/WB

g. main supply, return, and exhaust air ducts cfm, (pitot transverse);

h. each diffuser, grille and register cfm. (Balance to within +/-10% of

design requirements and pressure relationships shown on drawings.)

i. each grille, diffuser, and register shall be identified as to location and

area;

j. copies of start-up logs;

k. space temperatures and humidity readings; DB/WB

l. pressure drops across coils, filters, dampers, and other equipment in

ducts.

m. pressure profiles of each system.

n. sheave size, brand name, and number.

23 09 90-5

o. belt quantity, stock name, and number.

K. Calibration Reports: Submit proof that required instrumentation has been calibrated

to tolerances specified in the referenced standards, within a period of 6 months prior

to starting the project.


A. Agency Qualifications:

1. Employ the services of an independent testing, adjusting, and balancing

agency meeting the qualifications specified below, to be the single source of

responsibility to test, adjust, and balance the building mechanical systems

identified above, to produce the design objectives. Services shall include

checking installations for conformity to design, measurement and

establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to

meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the results.

2. The independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency shall be certified by

National Environmental Balancing Bureaus (NEBB) or Associated Air

Balance Council (AABC) in those testing and balancing disciplines required

for this project, and having at least one Technician, certified by NEBB or

AABC.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. NEBB: "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of

Environmental Systems".

2. AABC: "National Standards for Total System Balance".

3. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, Current Systems Volume, Chapter 37,

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.

C. Pre-Balancing Conference: Prior to beginning testing, adjusting, and balancing

procedures, schedule and conduct a conference with the Contracting Officer and

representatives of installers of the mechanical systems. The objective of the

conference is final coordination and verification of system operation and readiness

for testing, adjusting, and balancing.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Systems Operation: Systems shall be fully operational prior to beginning

procedures.

23 09 90-6

1.06 ACCEPTANCE:

The Contracting Officer will not accept the building until the systems have been properly

started, balanced, and the TAB Report is approved.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR AIR SYSTEM BALANCING:

Before operating the system, perform these steps:

A. Obtain design drawings and specifications and become thoroughly acquainted with

design intent.

B. Obtain copies of approved shop drawings of air handling equipment, outlets (supply

and return) and temperature control diagrams.

C. Compare design to installed equipment and field installations.

D. Walk the system from the system air handling equipment to terminal units to

determine variations of installation from design.

E. Check filters for cleanliness.

F. Check dampers (both volume and fire) for correct and locked position, and

temperature control for completeness of installation before starting fans.

G. Prepare report test sheets for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet

factors and recommended procedures for testing. Prepare a summation of required

outlet volumes to permit a crosscheck with required fan volumes.

H. Determine best locations in main and branch ductwork for most accurate duct

traverses.

I. Place outlet dampers in full open position.

J. Prepare schematic diagrams of system "as-built" ductwork and piping layouts to

facilitate reporting.

K. Verify that motors and bearings have been lubricated.

L. Check fan belt tension.

M. Check fan rotation.

23 09 90-7

3.03 MEASUREMENTS:

A. Provide required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements, calibrated to the

tolerances specified in referenced standards. Instruments shall be properly

maintained and protected against damage.

B. Provide instruments meeting the specifications of the referenced standards.

C. Use only those instruments which have the maximum field measuring accuracy and

are best suited to the function being measured.

D. Apply instrument as recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Use instruments with minimum scale and maximum subdivisions and with scale

ranges proper for the value being measured.

3.04 PERFORMING TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING:

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system identified, in accordance

with the detailed procedures outlined in the referenced standards.

B. Cut insulation, ductwork, and piping for installation of test probes to the minimum

extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures.

C. Patch insulation, ductwork, and housings, using materials identical to those removed.

D. Seal ducts and piping, and test for and repair leaks.

E. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier.

F. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan

speed control levers, and similar control and devices, to show final settings. Mark

with paint or other suitable, permanent identification materials.

G. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications,

and resubmit test results.

3.05 CONTROL SYSTEM VERIFICATION:

A. In conjunction with Control System Vendor, during the process of TAB work,

manipulate control system devices as required to facilitate necessary system TAB.

Provide listing of control system components and/or sequences that are not operating

properly in TAB report and to Control System Vendor.

23 09 90-8

3.06 RECORD AND REPORT DATA:

A. Record data obtained during testing, adjusting, and balancing in accordance with,

and on the forms recommended by referenced standards, and as approved on sample

report forms.

B. Prepare report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical

performances when system cannot be successfully balanced.

3.07 DEMONSTRATION:

A. Training:

1. Train maintenance personnel on troubleshooting procedures and testing,

adjusting, and balancing procedures. Review with personnel the information

contained in Operating and Maintenance Data.

2. Schedule training through the Owner with at least 7 days' prior notice.

END OF SECTION

239000-1 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM

SECTION 239000

AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01. WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish a totally native BACnet-based system. Control system shall be an addition to and an

extension of the existing Building Automation system that serves the existing facility.

B. System

C. Provide all necessary BACnet-compliant hardware and software to meet the system’s functional

specifications.

D. Prepare individual hardware layouts, interconnection drawings, and software configuration from

project design data.

E. Implement the detailed design for all analog and binary objects, system databases, graphic

displays, logs, and management reports based on control descriptions, logic drawings,

configuration data, and bid documents.

F. Design, provide, and install all equipment cabinets, panels, data communication network cables

needed, and all associated hardware.

G. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between supplied cabinets, application controllers,

and input/output devices.

H. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between all equipment controllers.

I. Provide complete manufacturer’s specifications for all items that are supplied. Include vendor

name of every item supplied.

J. Provide supervisory specialists and technicians at the job site to assist in all phases of system

installation, startup, and commissioning.

K. Provide a comprehensive operator and technician training program as described herein.

L. Provide as-built documentation, operator’s terminal software, diagrams, and all other associated

project operational documentation (such as technical manuals) on approved media, the sum total

of which accurately represents the final system.

M. All measurable points on each piece of hardware, duct, or equipment monitored by the building

control system shall be made available to view, control, and trend from the user interface.

1.02. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. A distributed logic control system complete with all software and hardware functions shall be

provided and installed. System shall be completely based on ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-

2001, BACnet. This system is to control all mechanical equipment, using native BACnet-

compliant components. Non-BACnet-compliant or proprietary equipment or systems


(including gateways) shall not be acceptable and are specifically prohibited.

B. Room sensors shall be provided with digital readout that allow the user to view room

temperature, view outside air temperature, adjust the room setpoint within preset limits and set

desired override time. User shall also be able to start and stop unit from the digital sensor.

Include all necessary wiring and firmware such that room sensor includes field service mode.

1.03. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. To facilitate system integration into the existing campus network, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated shall be limited to the following:

1. Siemens Desigo.

2. No substitutions or alternatives shall be accepted.


A. Responsibility: The supplier of the EMCS shall be responsible for inspection and Quality

Assurance (QA) for all materials and workmanship furnished.

B. Component Testing: Maximum reliability shall be achieved through extensive use of high-

quality, pre-tested components. Each and every controller, sensor, and all other DDC

components shall be individually tested by the manufacturer prior to shipment.

C. Tools, Testing and Calibration Equipment: The EMCS supplier shall provide all tools, testing,

and calibration equipment necessary to ensure reliability and accuracy of the system.

D. The systems control contractor shall have been in business a minimum of five years and be the

authorized installing contractor for the manufacturer of the BACnet components.

E. Control system shall be engineered, programmed and supported completely by representative’s

local office that must be within 75 miles of project site.

1.05. SUBMITTALS

A. Drawings

1. The system supplier shall submit engineered drawings, control sequence, and bill of

materials for approval.

2. Drawings shall be submitted in the following standard sizes: 11” x 17” (ANSI B).

3. Eight complete sets (copies) of submittal drawings shall be provided.

4. Drawings shall be available on CD-ROM.

1.06. WARRANTY

A. Warranty shall cover all costs for parts, labor, associated travel, and expenses for a period of

one year from completion of system acceptance.

B. Hardware and software personnel supporting this warranty agreement shall provide on-site or


off-site service in a timely manner after failure notification to the vendor. The maximum

acceptable response time to provide this service at the site shall be 24 hours Monday through

Friday, 48 hours on Saturday and Sunday.

C. This warranty shall apply equally to both hardware and software.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. BACnet APPLICATION EQUIPMENT CONTROLLERS

A. Provide one or more native BACnet application controllers for each controlled piece of

equipment. All controllers shall interface to building controller via MS/TP LAN using BACnet

protocol. No gateways shall be used. Controllers shall include input, output and self-contained

logic program as needed for complete control of units. Controllers shall be fully programmable

using graphical programming blocks. Programming tool shall be resident at the operator

workstation.

B. BACnet Conformance

1. Application controllers shall as a minimum support MS/TP BACnet LAN types. They

shall communicate directly via this BACnet LAN at 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 and 76.8 Kbps, as

native BACnet devices. Application controllers shall be of BACnet conformance class 3

and support all BACnet services necessary to provide the following BACnet functional

groups:

a. Files Functional Group

b. Reinitialize Functional Group

c. Device Communications Functional Group

2. Please refer to section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups, in the BACnet standard, for a

complete list of the services that must be directly supported to provide each of the

functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used in the system, shall be

thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools

shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.

2. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum—Analog Input,

Analog Output, Analog Value, Binary Input, Binary Output, Binary Value, Device, File,

and Program object types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be

thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools

shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.

C. Application controllers shall include universal inputs with 10-bit resolution that accept 3K and

10K thermistors, 0–10VDC, 0–5 VDC, 4–20 mA and dry contact signals. Any input on a

controller may be either analog or digital with a minimum of 3 inputs that accept pulses.

Controller shall also include support and modifiable programming for interface to intelligent

room sensor with digital display. Controller shall include binary and analog outputs on board.

Analog outputs shall be switch selectable as either 0–10VDC or 0–20mA. Software shall

include scaling features for analog outputs. Application controller shall include 24VDC voltage

supply for use as power supply to external sensors.


D. All program sequences shall be stored on board application controller in EEPROM. No batteries

shall be needed to retain logic program. All program sequences shall be executed by controller

10 times per second and capable of multiple PID loops for control of multiple devices. All

calculations shall be completed using floating-point math and system shall support display of all

information in floating-point nomenclature at operator’s terminal. Programming of application

controller shall be completely modifiable in the field over the installed BACnet LANs from the

Touch Screen Interface.

E. Application controller shall include support for intelligent room sensor (see section 2.9.B.)

Display on intelligent room sensor shall be programmable at application controller and include

an operating mode and a field service mode. All button functions and display data shall be

programmable to show specific controller data in each mode based on which button is pressed

on the sensor.

2.02. SENSORS and MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES

A. Temperature Sensors

1. All temperature sensors to be solid state electronic, factory-calibrated to within 0.5°F,

totally interchangeable with housing appropriate for application. Wall sensors to be

installed as indicated on drawings. Mount top of thermostat at approximately 44 inches

above finished floor, align with light switch of associated room. Duct sensors to be

installed such that the sensing element is in the main air stream.

B. Room Sensor with LCD Readout

1. Sensor shall contain a backlit LCD digital display and user function keys along with

temperature sensor. Controller shall function as room control unit, and shall allow

occupant to raise and lower setpoint, and activate terminal unit for override use—all

within limits as programmed by building operator. Sensor shall also allow service

technician access to hidden functions as described in sequence of operation.

2. Room Sensor shall simultaneously display room setpoint, room temperature, outside

temperature, and fan status (if applicable) at each controller. This unit shall be

programmable, allowing site developers the flexibility to configure the display to match

their application.

3. Override time may be set and viewed in half-hour increments. Override time count down

shall be automatic, but may be reset to zero by occupant from the sensor. Time remaining

shall be displayed. Display shall show the word “OFF” in unoccupied mode unless a

function button is pressed.

2.03. ENCLOSURES

A. All controllers, power supplies and relays shall be mounted in enclosures.

B. Enclosures may be NEMA 1 when located in a clean, dry, indoor environment. Indoor

enclosures shall be NEMA 12 when installed in other than a clean environment.

C. Enclosures shall have hinged, locking doors.

D. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for all enclosures in any mechanical room or electrical

room. Include location and unit served on nameplate. Laminated plastic shall be 1/8” thick


sized appropriately to make label easy to read.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION

A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work

is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence.

B. Notify the owners' representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely

completion of the work.

C. Do not begin work until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved.

3.02. INSTALLATION (GENERAL)

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide all miscellaneous devices, hardware, software, interconnections installation and

programming required to ensure a complete operating system in accordance with the sequences

of operation and point schedules.

3.03. INTERLOCKING AND CONTROL WIRING

A. Provide all interlock and control wiring. All wiring shall be installed neatly and professionally,

in accordance with Specification Division 16 and all national, state and local electrical codes.

B. Provide wiring as required by functions as specified and as recommended by equipment

manufacturers, to serve specified control functions. Provide shielded low capacitance wire for

all communications trunks.

C. Control wiring shall not be installed in power circuit raceways. Magnetic starters and disconnect

switches shall not be used as junction boxes. Provide auxiliary junction boxes as required.

Coordinate location and arrangement of all control equipment with the owner's representative

prior to rough-in.

D. Provide auxiliary pilot duty relays on motor starters as required for control function.

E. Provide power for all control components from nearest electrical control panel or as indicated

on the electrical drawings—coordinate with electrical contractor.

F. All control wiring in the mechanical, electrical, telephone and boiler rooms to be installed in

raceways. All other wiring to be installed neatly and inconspicuously per local code

requirements. If local code allows, control wiring above accessible ceiling spaces may be run

with plenum rated cable (without conduit).

3.04. TRAINING

A. Provide application engineer to instruct owner in operation of systems and equipment.

B. Provide on-site training above as required, up to 8 hours as part of this contract.


END OF SECTION

ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260000 - 1

SECTION 260000 - ELECTRICAL - GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment required and install complete and make operational,

electrical system as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. The work shall include the following:

1. Coordinate the electrical service requirements with the power company and provide the

electrical service(s) from the Power Company at the locations indicated.

2. Provide conduit, wire and field connections for all equipment, HVAC systems,

panelboards, transformers, and electrical equipment furnished under Divisions 1, 11, 21,

22, 23, and 26.

C. Each bidder or their authorized representatives shall, before preparing their proposal, visit all

areas of the existing buildings and structures in which work under this sub-bid is to be

performed and inspect carefully the present installation. The submission of the proposal by this

bidder shall be considered evidence that their representative has visited the buildings and

structures and noted the locations and conditions under which the work will be performed and

that he/she takes full responsibility for a complete knowledge of all factors governing his/her

work.

2.1 SUBMITTALS

A. As a minimum all equipment specified in each Section of Division 26 shall be submitted at one

time. As an example all lighting fixtures shall be submitted together, all motor control centers

shall be submitted together, etc. Submittals that do not comply will be returned disapproved.

B. Mark submittals to clearly identify proposed equipment including accessories, options, and

features and to exclude parts not applicable to the project. When manufacturer’s cut sheets

apply to a product series rather than a specific product, the data specifically applicable to the

project shall be highlighted or clearly indicated by other means. Each submittal piece of

literature and each submittal drawing shall clearly reference the Project Specification and/or

Contract Drawing that the submittal is to cover. General catalogs will not be accepted as cut

sheets to fulfill submittal requirements.

C. Check shop drawings for accuracy prior to submittal. Shop drawings shall be stamped with the

date checked and a statement indicating that the shop drawings conform to this Section and the

Drawings. This statement shall also list all exceptions to this Section and the Drawings. Mark

submittals to identify proposed equipment including accessories, options and features being

proposed for approval and exclude parts not to be used. Shop drawings not so checked and

noted shall be returned marked NOT APPROVED.

D. The Engineer's check shall be for conformance with the design concept of the project and

compliance with this Section and the Drawings. Errors and omissions on approved shop


drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of providing materials and

workmanship required by this Section and the Drawings.

E. All dimensions shall be field verified at the job site and coordinated with the work of all other

trades.

F. Material shall not be ordered or shipped until the shop drawings have been approved. No

material shall be ordered or shop work started if shop drawings are marked “APPROVED AS

NOTED - CONFIRM," "APPROVED AS NOTED - RESUBMIT" or "NOT APPROVED."

G. Operation and Maintenance Data

1. Submit operations and maintenance data for equipment furnished under this Division, in

accordance with Section 017823. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this

installation and shall include catalog data sheets, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions,

parts lists including replacement part numbers, to instruct operating and maintenance

personnel unfamiliar with such equipment.

2. Manuals shall include the following as a minimum:

a. A complete "As-Built" set of approved shop drawings.

b. A complete list of the equipment supplied, including serial numbers, ranges and

pertinent data.

c. Detailed service, maintenance and operation instructions for each item supplied.

H. Exceptions for Submittals

1. Exceptions to the Specifications or Drawings shall be clearly defined by the Electrical

Subcontractor in a separate section of each submittal package. The submittal shall

contain the reason for the exception, the exact nature of the exception and the proposed

substitution so that a proper evaluation may be made by the Engineer. The acceptability

of any device or methodology submitted as an “or equal” or “exception” to the

Specifications shall be at the sole discretion of the Engineer.

I. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor under one of the following codes.

Code 1 - "APPROVED" is assigned when there are no notations or comments on the submittal.

When returned under this code the Contractor may release the equipment and/or material for

manufacture.

Code 2 - "APPROVED AS NOTED" - This code is assigned when a confirmation of the

notations and comments IS NOT required by the Contractor. The Contractor may release the

equipment or material for manufacture; however, all notations and comments must be

incorporated into the final product.

Code 3 - "APPROVED AS NOTED/CONFIRM" - This combination of codes is assigned when

a confirmation of the notations and comments IS required by the Contractor. The Contractor

may, at his own risk, release the equipment or material for manufacture; however, all notations

and comments must be incorporated into the final product. This confirmation shall specifically


address each omission and nonconforming item that was noted. Confirmation is to be received

by the Engineer within 10 calendar days of the date of the Engineer's transmittal requiring the

confirmation.

Code 4 - "APPROVED AS NOTED/RESUBMIT" - This combination of codes is assigned when

notations and comments are extensive enough to require a resubmittal of the package. This

resubmittal is to address all comments, omissions and non-conforming items that were noted.

Resubmittal is to be received by the Engineer within 15 calendar days of the date of the

Engineer's transmittal requiring the resubmittal.

Code 5 - "NOT APPROVED" is assigned when the submittal does not meet the intent of the

Contract Documents. The Contractor must resubmit the entire package revised to bring the

submittal into conformance. It may be necessary to resubmit using a different

manufacturer/vendor to meet the Contract Documents.

Code 6 - "COMMENTS ATTACHED" is assigned where there are comments attached to the

returned submittal which provide additional data to aid the Contractor.

Code 7 - "RECEIPT ACKNOWLEDGED" - This code is assigned to acknowledge receipt of a

submittal that is not subject to the Engineer’s review and approval; and, is being filed for

informational purposes only. This code is generally used in acknowledging receipt of means

and methods of construction work plan, field conformance test reports, and Health and Safety

plans.

Codes 1 through 5 designate the status of the reviewed submittal with Code 6 showing there has

been an attachment of additional data.

3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Electric equipment, materials and installation shall comply with the National Electrical Code

(NEC).

B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid

opening shall apply.

4.1 PRIORITY OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. If, during the performance of the work, the Contractor finds a conflict, error or discrepancy

between or among one or more of the Sections or between or among one or more Sections and

the Drawings, furnish the higher performance requirements. The higher performance

requirement shall be considered the equipment, material, device or installation method which

represents the most stringent option, the highest quality or the largest quantity.

B. In all cases, figured dimensions shall govern over scaled dimensions, but work not dimensioned

shall be as directed by the Engineer and work not particularly shown, identified, sized, or

located shall be the same as similar work that is shown or specified.


C. Detailed Drawings shall govern over general drawings, larger scale Drawings take precedence

over smaller scale Drawings, Change Order Drawings shall govern over Contract Drawings and

Contract Drawings shall govern over Shop Drawings.

D. If the issue of priority is due to a conflict or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract

Documents and any referenced standard, or code of any technical society, organization or

association, the provisions of the Contract Documents will take precedence if they are more

stringent or presumptively cause a higher level of performance. If there is any conflict or

discrepancy between standard specifications, or codes of any technical society, organization or

association, or between Laws and Regulations, the higher performance requirement shall be

binding on the Contractor, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

E. In accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents, the Contractor accepts the fact that

compliance with the priority order specified shall not justify an increase in Contract Price or an

extension in Contract Time nor limit in any way, the Contractor's responsibility to comply with

all Laws and Regulations at all times

5.1 SERVICE AND METERING

A. Service is existing at 208 Volts, 3Phase, 4Wire, 60 Hz.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the following work:

1. Obtain an estimate from the power company for the work described above and include

the cost of the power company work in the Bid Price.

2. Make all arrangements with the power company for obtaining electrical service, pay all

power company charges.

6.1 CODES, INSPECTION AND FEES

A. Equipment, materials and installation shall comply with the requirements of the local authority

having jurisdiction.

B. Obtain all necessary permits and pay all fees required for permits and inspections.

7.1 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS

A. Unless specifically stated to the contrary, the Drawings do not show exact locations of conduit

runs. Coordinate the conduit installation with other trades and the actual supplied equipment.

B. Install each 3 phase circuit in a separate conduit unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

C. Conduit shown exposed shall be installed exposed; conduit shown concealed shall be installed

concealed. Unless otherwise indicated install branch circuit conduits exposed in process/

industrial type spaces and concealed in finished spaces.

D. Where circuits are shown as "home-runs" all necessary fittings and boxes shall be provided for a

complete raceway installation. Where home-runs indicate conduit is to be installed concealed

or exposed the entire branch circuit shall be installed in the same manner.


E. Verify the exact locations and mounting heights of lighting fixtures, switches and receptacles

prior to installation.

F. Except where dimensions are shown, the locations of equipment, fixtures, outlets and similar

devices shown on the Drawings are approximate only. Exact locations shall be determined by

the Contractor and approved by the Engineer during construction. Obtain information relevant

to the placing of electrical work and in case of any interference with other work, proceed as

directed by the Engineer and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in

an approved manner.

G. Circuit layouts are not intended to show the number of fittings, or other installation details.

Furnish all labor and materials to install and place in satisfactory operation all power, lighting

and other electrical systems shown.

H. Redesign of electrical or mechanical work, which is required due to the Contractor's use of an

alternate item, arrangement of equipment and/or layout other than specified herein, shall be

done by the Contractor at his/her own expense. Redesign and detailed plans shall be submitted

to the Engineer for approval. No additional compensation will be provided for changes in the

work, either his/her own or others, caused by such redesign.

I. Raceways and conductors for low voltage (120 Volts) thermostats controlling HVAC unit

heaters, exhaust fans and similar equipment are not shown on the Drawings. Provide raceways

and conductors between the thermostats, the HVAC equipment and the motor starters for a

complete and operating system. Raceways shall be installed concealed in all finished space and

may be installed concealed or exposed in process spaces. Refer to the HVAC drawings for the

locations of the thermostats.

8.1 SIZE OF EQUIPMENT

A. Investigate each space in the structure through which electrical equipment furnished under

Division 26 must pass to reach its final location. Coordinate shipping splits with the

manufacturer to permit safe handling and passage through restricted areas in the structure.

B. The equipment shall be kept upright at all times during storage and handling. When equipment

must be tilted for passage through restricted areas, brace the equipment to ensure that the tilting

does not impair the functional integrity of the equipment.

9.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. As the work progresses, legibly record all field changes on a set of Project Contract Drawings,

hereinafter called the "Record Drawings."

10.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and equipment furnished under this contract shall be new.

B. Material and equipment of the same type shall be the product of one manufacturer and shall be

UL listed.

11.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION


A. Identify equipment, disconnect switches, separately mounted motor starters, control stations,

etc. furnished under Division 26 with the name of the equipment it serves. Motor control

centers, control panels, panelboards, switchboards, switchgear, junction or terminal boxes,

transfer switches, etc, shall have nameplate designations as shown on the Drawings.

B. Nameplates shall be engraved, laminated plastic, not less than 1/16-in thick by 3/4-in by

2-1/2-in with 3/16-in high white letters on a black background.

C. Nameplates shall be screw mounted to NEMA 1 enclosures. Nameplates shall be bonded to all

other enclosure types using an epoxy or similar permanent waterproof adhesive. Two sided

foam adhesive tape is not acceptable. Where the equipment size does not have space for

mounting a nameplate the nameplate shall be permanently fastened to the adjacent mounting

surface.

PART 2 EXECUTION

1.1 INSTALLATION

A. Work not installed according to the Drawings and Specification shall be subject to change as

directed by the Engineer at Contractor's expense.

B. Electrical equipment shall be protected against mechanical and water damage. Store all

electrical equipment in dry permanent shelters. Do not install electrical equipment in place until

structures are weather-tight.

C. Damaged equipment shall be replaced or repaired by the equipment manufacturer, at the

Engineer's discretion and at the Contractor's expense.

D. Repaint any damage to factory applied paint finish using touch-up paint furnished by the

equipment manufacturer.

2.1 WORK SUPERVISION

A. The Contractor shall designate in writing the qualified electrical supervisor who shall provide

supervision to all electrical work on this project. The minimum qualifications for the electrical

supervisor shall be a master electrician as defined by the Arkansas Board of Electrical

Examiners. The supervisor or his appointed alternate possessing at least a journeyman

electrician license shall be on site whenever electrical work is being performed. The

qualifications of the electrical supervisor shall be subject to approval of the Owner and the

Engineer.

B. All master and journeyman electricians shall be licensed in accordance with Arkansas Code

Title 17 Chapter 28 - Electricians. The website located at http://www.arkleg.state.ar.us

publishes the text of this statutory requirement. No unlicensed electrical workers shall perform

work on this project. Apprentice electricians in a ratio of not more than one apprentice per

journeyman electrician will be allowed if the apprentices are licensed and actively participating

in an apprenticeship program recognized and approved by the Arkansas Board of Electrical

Examiners.


http://www.arkleg.state.ar.us/

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less.

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control systems

communications cables and Classes 1, 2, and 3 control cables.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with

an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Cerro Wire LLC.

2. General Cable Technologies Corporation.

3. Okonite Company (The).

4. Southwire Company.

C. Standards:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for

intended location and use.

2. RoHS compliant.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=12724

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457076828





3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's

"Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."

D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8

for stranded conductors.

E. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type NM: Comply with UL 83 and UL 719.

2. Type RHH and Type RHW-2: Comply with UL 44.

3. Type USE-2 and Type SE: Comply with UL 854.

4. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.

5. Type THW and Type THW-2: Comply with NEMA WC-70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 83.

6. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material,

type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

B. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, zinc die-cast with set

screws, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section.

C. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section.

1. Material: Copper.

2. Type: One hole with long barrels.

3. Termination: Compression.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and

larger.

B. Power-Limited Fire Alarm and Control: Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND

WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.


C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2,

single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:

Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

E. Feeders in Cable Tray: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

F. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors

in raceway.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single

conductors in raceway

H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:

Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to

Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and

cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended

maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will

not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and

follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that

possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced

conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.


3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for

Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of

conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore

original fire-resistance rating of assembly.


GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.




A. Coordination Drawings: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features

specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.

C. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems.

2. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.

3. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.

2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Conductors shall be as specified under Section 260519 “Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables.”






2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in

which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items

connected.

B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions.

C. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire

terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

D. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual,

tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts.

E. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy.

F. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub.

G. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt.

H. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt.

I. Lay-in Lug Connector: Mechanical type, copper rated for direct burial terminal with set screw.

J. Water Pipe Clamps:

1. Mechanical type, two pieces with stainless-steel bolts.

a. Material: Die-cast zinc alloy.

b. Listed for direct burial.

2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet.

B. Ground Plates: 1/4 inch thick, hot-dip galvanized.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for

No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install barecopper conductor, No. 4/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.


C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated.

3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.

4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE

A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the

ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.

3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated

equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond

conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise

indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may

be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless

otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as

otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if

any.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance

except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate

any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install

bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection

is required, use a bolted clamp.

D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,

from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service

entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;


use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of

the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect

grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or

sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water

meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment

shutoff valve.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been

energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,

electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's

written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance

level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test

wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are

connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of

precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural

drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of

reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed 5 ohms.

F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Engineer

promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Steel slotted support systems.

2. Conduit and cable support devices.

3. Support for conductors in vertical conduit.

4. Structural steel for fabricated supports and restraints.

5. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, including powder-actuated fasteners,

mechanical expansion anchors, concrete inserts, clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts, and

hanger rods.

6. Fabricated metal equipment support assemblies.



B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation details for electrical hangers and support

systems.

1. Hangers. Include product data for components.

2. Slotted support systems.

3. Equipment supports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Preformed steel channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch-

(10-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. in at least one surface.

1. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

2. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: Galvanized steel.

3. Channel Width: 1-5/8 inches.

4. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-

4.

5. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating

applied according to MFMA-4.

6. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-

4.

7. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary

protective covering before shipping.


B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed

for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

C. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded

body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for nonarmored electrical conductors or cables in

riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as

required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be made of malleable

iron.

D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel plates, shapes,

and bars; black and galvanized.

E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their

supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for

supported loads and building materials where used.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS

Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for

attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions

of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes

and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with the following standards for application and installation requirements of hangers

and supports, except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter:

1. NECA 1.

2. NECA 101


B. Comply with requirements in "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and

installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.

C. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and

Boxes for Electrical Systems."

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this

article.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength

will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.

Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported

components plus 200 lb.

C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten

electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods

unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.

4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.

5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm)

thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs

less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS SP-58,Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27), complying with

MSS SP-69.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.

8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,

transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate

D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for

reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation

to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.


RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits and fittings.

2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings.

3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

6. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.



B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and

attachment details.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Metal Conduit:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to

the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International.

b. Republic Conduit.

c. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.

2. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

3. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

4. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

5. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

a. Comply with NEMA RN 1.

b. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.


6. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

7. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

8. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

B. Metal Fittings: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.



the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International.

b. Republic Conduit.


2. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing

agency, and marked for intended location and application.

3. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use.

4. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 1203 and

NFPA 70.

5. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel.

b. Type: Compression.

6. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated

for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding

jumper.

7. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with

overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

C. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities

having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and

protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Nonmetallic Conduit:



the following:

a. CANTEX INC.

b. RACO; Hubbell.


B. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,

and marked for intended location and application.


1. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.

2. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise

indicated.

3. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.

C. Nonmetallic Fittings:



the following:

a. CANTEX INC.

b. RACO; Hubbell.


2. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use.

3. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type

and material.

4. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.

5. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R, Type 4, or

Type 12 based on installation location, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,

hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for

complete system.

2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS



1. Crouse-Hinds, an Eaton business.

2. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection.

3. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.

4. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.

5. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets

installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.





D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with

gasketed cover.

E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

F. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: Cast metal.

2. Type: Fully adjustable.

3. Shape: Rectangular.

4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

G. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb.

Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and

marked for the maximum allowable weight.

H. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

I. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773,

galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

J. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as

recessed box.

K. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.

L. Gangable boxes are prohibited.

2.5 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as

defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and

aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a

combination of the two.



the following:

a. Quazite: Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.

3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with closed bottom unless otherwise indicated.


4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.

5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.

6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC.".

7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC.

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried except for incoming

utility service shall be concrete encased.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.

5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated.

1. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the

following:

a. Loading dock.

b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.

c. Mechanical rooms.

d. Electrical rooms

e. Gymnasiums.

2. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet

locations.

4. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.

5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless

steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this

type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after

installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and

apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.


3. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

F. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"

for hangers and supports.

B. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements

on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.

Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and

number of floors.

C. Do not install raceways or electrical items on any "explosion-relief" walls or rotating

equipment.

D. Do not fasten conduits onto the bottom side of a metal deck roof.

E. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.

Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

F. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"

for hangers and supports.

G. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

H. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for

control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of

changes in direction.

I. Make bends in raceway using large-radius preformed ells. Field bending shall be according to

NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Use only equipment specifically designed for material

and size involved.

J. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

K. Support conduit within 12 inchesof enclosures to which attached.

L. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab

support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.


2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion

fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions.

4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location.

5. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor.

M. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.

2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

N. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply

listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound

manufacturer's written instructions.

O. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive

compound prior to assembly.

P. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes

or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal

bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated

throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not

less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap

underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

R. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature

change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each

of the following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature

change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.

c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

temperature change.

d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot

of length of straight run per degree F of temperature change for PVC conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure

expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected

according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time

of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.


S. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of

flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise

transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

T. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings or in Specification 262726 “Wiring Devices”. If

mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements.

Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

U. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,

and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a

raintight connection between the box and cover plate or the supported equipment and box.

V. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same

vertical channel.

W. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

X. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing

members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

Y. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by

conduits.

Z. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

AA. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit.

2. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end

of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction

as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to

provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12

inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete

backfilling with normal compaction as specified.

3. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-up at poles and equipment and at building

entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts

throughout length of elbow.

4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and

at building entrances through floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the

coupling.


b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits

penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of

60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding

bushings on terminations at equipment.

5. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553

"Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with

connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from

1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of

other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut

wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings

to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.


IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Color and legend requirements for raceways, conductors, and warning labels and signs.

2. Labels.

3. Tapes and stencils.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NFPA 70.

B. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

C. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS

A. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed

below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

1. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG if

authorities having jurisdiction permit.

2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Black.

b. Phase B: Red.

c. Phase C: Blue.


3. Color for Neutral: White.

4. Color for Equipment Grounds: Green.

5. Colors for Isolated Grounds: Green with white stripe.

B. Warning Label Colors:

1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.

C. Equipment Identification Labels:

1. Black letters on a white field.

2.3 SIGNS

A. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:

1. Engraved legend.

2. Thickness:

a. For signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm), minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

b. For signs larger than 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm), 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick.

c. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.

d. Self-adhesive.

e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application

requirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or

interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine

screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with

requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings,

manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent

designations throughout Project.

B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.


D. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation

and maintenance manual.

E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

F. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation, and maintenance

of electrical systems and connected items.

G. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean

substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by

manufacturer of identification product.

H. System Identification for Raceways and Cables under 600 V: Identification shall completely

encircle cable or conduit. Place identification of two-color markings in contact, side by side.

1. Secure tight to surface of conductor, cable, or raceway.

I. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control,

and signal connections.

J. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels, signs, and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor.

K. Underground Line Warning Tape:

1. During backfilling of trenches, install continuous underground-line warning tape directly

above cable or raceway at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use

multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete

envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.

2. Install underground-line warning tape for direct-buried cables and cables in raceways.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Equipment Identification Labels:

1. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive label.

2. Outdoor Equipment: Laminated acrylic or melamine sign.


PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards.

2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

B. SPD: Surge protective device.


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental protection,

knockouts, corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets, hinges, and locks.

3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.

6. Include evidence of NRTL listing for SPD as installed in panelboard.

7. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.

8. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.


1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.

2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panelboards that fail in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Panelboard Warranty Period: 18 months from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELBOARDS COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. Enclosures: Flush or Surface-mounted, dead-front cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

c. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X,.

d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

e. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive

Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.

2. Height: 84 inches maximum.

3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within

hinged trim cover. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware.

E. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

F. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type, with a lug on the neutral bar for each pole in

the panelboard.

3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type, with a lug on the bar

for each pole in the panelboard.


4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at

opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.

G. Future Devices: Panelboards shall have mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and

necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit

current available at terminals. Assembly listed by an NRTL for 100 percent interrupting

capacity.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying

with UL 1449 SPD Type 1 or Type 2 as shown on drawings.

2.3 POWER PANELBOARDS



1. Eaton.

2. SIEMENS Industry, Inc.; Energy Management Division.

3. Square D; by Schneider Electric.

a. If Square D, project shall be quoted, ordered, and managed by Randall Robinette in

Little Rock Field Office. Phone# 501-803-9494.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, distribution type.

2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS



1. Eaton.





B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

2.5 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Eaton.






B. All circuit breakers 1200A and higher shall be equipped with energy-reducing maintenance

switching with local status in order to provide arc energy reduction per NEC 240.87

C. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:

a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads.

b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.

c. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-

mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers:

a. RMS sensing.

b. Field-replaceable rating plug or electronic trip.

c. Field-Adjustable Settings:

1) Instantaneous trip.

2) Long- and short-time pickup levels.

3) Long and short time adjustments.

4) Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared T response.

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings

less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and double-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault

protection (6-mA trip).

6. Subfeed Circuit Breakers: Vertically mounted.

7. MCCB Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

b. Breaker handle indicates tripped status.

2.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of phases,

and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door.

B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC

rating.

C. Circuit Directory: Directory card inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

C. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.

D. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back

box.

E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

F. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately derived systems to

ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes, separate grounds for isolated ground bars,

and connections to separate ground bars.

G. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; install warning

signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room

designations. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten directories are not acceptable.

Install directory inside panelboard door.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements

for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for

Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,

and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:


1. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.


ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches.

2. Nonfusible switches.

3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).

4. Molded-case switches.

5. Horsepower Rated Toggle Disconnect Switch

6. Enclosures.


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component

indicated. Include nameplate ratings, dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and

manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,

accessories, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective

devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single manufacturer.


B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed

switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces

and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

2.2 FUSIBLE SWITCHES



1. Eaton.





B. Type HD, Heavy Duty:

1. Single throw.

2. Three pole.

3. 600-V ac.

4. 1200 A and smaller.

5. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate

indicated fuses.

6. Lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in

closed position.

C. Accessories (as required per plans):

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, labeled for copper and aluminum

neutral conductors.

4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.

5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.

2.3 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES



1. Eaton.













B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Three Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and

NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and

interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories (as required per plans):

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, labeled for copper and aluminum

neutral conductors.

4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.

5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.

2.4 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS



1. Eaton.





B. Circuit breakers shall be constructed using glass-reinforced insulating material. Current carrying

components shall be completely isolated from the handle and the accessory mounting area.

C. Circuit breakers shall have a toggle operating mechanism with common tripping of all poles,

which provides quick-make, quick-break contact action. The circuit-breaker handle shall be

over center, be trip free, and reside in a tripped position between on and off to provide local trip

indication. Circuit-breaker escutcheon shall be clearly marked on and off in addition to

providing international I/O markings. Equip circuit breaker with a push-to-trip button, located

on the face of the circuit breaker to mechanically operate the circuit-breaker tripping

mechanism for maintenance and testing purposes.

D. The maximum ampere rating and UL, IEC, or other certification standards with applicable

voltage systems and corresponding interrupting ratings shall be clearly marked on face of circuit

breaker. Circuit breakers shall be 100 percent rated or series rated as indicated on the Drawings.

combinations for series connected interrupting ratings shall be listed by UL as recognized

component combinations. Any series rated combination used shall be marked on the end-use

equipment along with the statement "Caution - Series Rated System. _____ Amps Available.

Identical Replacement Component Required."

E. MCCBs shall be equipped with a device for locking in the isolated position.







F. Lugs shall be suitable for 167 deg F rated wire.

G. Standards: Comply with UL 489 with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault

currents.

H. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current thermal element for low-level

overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip

setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

I. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted,

field-adjustable trip setting.

J. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the field-

adjustable settings as indicated on drawings.

K. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less

than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

2.5 Horsepower Rated, Toggle Switch Type Disconnect Switch

A. Toggle type disconnect switches shall be manufactured of thermoplastic materials with screw-

type terminals. The switches shall be rated 600 VAC and 20A at 600 VAC.

B. Toggle type disconnect switches shall be similar to a manual non-reversing starter without

overloads and shall be 3 Pole, capable of “on-off” control of a 10 horsepower motor at 460

VAC.

C. Enclosure shall be provided with lock off provisions.

D. NEMA 4 enclosures shall be die-cast zinc.

E. Switches shall be as manufactured by the Square D Co.; Siemens Electrical Products; Cutler-

Hammer or equal.

2.6 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: UL 489, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to

comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

B. Enclosure rating shall be equal to or greater than the fuse or circuit breaker rating.

C. Enclosure Finish: The enclosure shall be as indicated on drawings.

D. Conduit Entry: NEMA 250 Types 4, 4X, and 12 enclosures shall contain no knockouts.

NEMA 250 Types 7 and 9 enclosures shall be provided with threaded conduit openings in both

endwalls.


E. Operating Mechanism: The circuit-breaker operating handle shall be externally operable with

the operating mechanism being an integral part of the box, not the cover. The cover interlock

mechanism shall have an externally operated override. The override shall not permanently

disable the interlock mechanism, which shall return to the locked position once the override is

released. The tool used to override the cover interlock mechanism shall not be required to enter

the enclosure in order to override the interlock.

F. Enclosures designated as NEMA 250 Type 4, 4X stainless steel, 12, or 12K shall have a dual

cover interlock mechanism to prevent unintentional opening of the enclosure cover when the

circuit breaker is ON and to prevent turning the circuit breaker ON when the enclosure cover is

open.

G. NEMA 250 Type 7/9 enclosures shall be furnished with a breather and drain kit to allow their

use in outdoor and wet location applications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ENCLOSURE ENVIRONMENTAL RATING APPLICATIONS

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: Provide enclosures at installed locations with the

following environmental ratings.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

3. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.

4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after

arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric

service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.

3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission.

4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

B. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment

served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances

for equipment access doors and panels.

C. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless

otherwise indicated.


D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting of eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

E. Install fuses in fusible devices. Fuse Ratings for mechanical equipment or transformers shall

match the rating of the upstream circuit breaker feeding the equipment.

F. Comply with NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.

a. Label on each disconnect means shall include both purpose and source, such as

“AHU-1. Fed from Panel MDP”


A. Tests and Inspections for Switches:

1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.

c. Verify that the unit is clean.

d. Verify blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and mechanical operation.

e. Verify that fuse sizes and types match the Specifications and Drawings.

f. Verify that each fuse has adequate mechanical support and contact integrity.

g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two

following methods:

1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter.

a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar

connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar

bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated

torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or

NETA ATS Table 100.12.

a) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's

published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use


h. Verify that operation and sequencing of interlocking systems is as described in the

Specifications and shown on the Drawings.

i. Verify correct phase barrier installation.


j. Verify lubrication of moving current-carrying parts and moving and sliding

surfaces.

B. Tests and Inspections for Molded Case Circuit Breakers:

1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

a. Verify that equipment nameplate data are as described in the Specifications and

shown on the Drawings.

b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.

d. Verify that the unit is clean.

e. Operate the circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation.

f. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two

following methods:

1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter.

a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar

connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar

bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated

torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or


a) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's

published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use


g. Inspect operating mechanism, contacts, and chutes in unsealed units.

h. Perform adjustments for final protective device settings in accordance with the

coordination study.

C. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.


Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation B021078: Bid Proposal

Documents

Transcript of Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation B021078: Bid Proposal